JP6518633B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol is variably displayed based on the result of determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, and the result of this variability display is predetermined special. As a result, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player.

  In such a gaming machine, the interest of the game is enhanced by performing variational rendering in which the rendering symbol is variably displayed by the image display means in accordance with any of a plurality of types of variation patterns so as to correspond to the variation display of the special symbol. There is a thing (refer patent document 1).

JP, 2014-195682, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent documents, there is a room for improvement in the fluctuation presentation, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is poor.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed based on the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result of the determination means. A special effect control means for executing a fluctuation effect to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and a sound output means capable of outputting a sound effect, the result of the fluctuation effect being predetermined When it comes to the result, in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player, the change effect will be the special result after the indication effect period for performing the indication effect for predicting the special result. The transition effect period to perform the transition effect to the specific effect to be expected is a transition effect period, and the first specific effect mode for executing the specific effect without returning to the indication effect period after that, and the indication effect period after the indication effect period Becomes a row staging period, then becomes the transition effect period after returning to the indication effect period, a second specific effect mode of operating the specific effect without subsequent return to the indication effect period, there is the effect The control means causes temporary stop display in a mode different from the mode of the plurality of effect symbols in which the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in the stop state during the transition effect period before the indication effect period, and the sound output means It is possible to output a specific effect sound from the above, and the degree of expectation that the change effect of the second specific effect aspect is the special result is higher than that of the change effect of the first specific effect aspect. It is characterized by

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 2 is a partial perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A-1) is a figure showing the big hit determination table for the first special symbol, (a-2) is a figure showing the big hit determination table for the second special symbol, (b) is a figure showing the reach determination table . (A) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for big hit selection, (b) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for losing. (A) is a figure showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing a large winning opening / closing control table for long game, (c) is a figure showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for short game. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern judging table in a non time saving game state. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in time saving game state. (A) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for normal symbols, (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a diagram showing a common pattern variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a table, (e) is a diagram showing an auxiliary game control table, and (f) is a diagram showing a second start opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol hold storage area, (c) is a normal symbol hold storage area of the main RAM A figure showing composition, (d) is a figure showing composition of each storage part of a usual design reservation storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting opening detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize gate detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the drawing control processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the auxiliary game processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the command analysis process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows pending information update processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the process at the time of the starting opening prize in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the starting opening prize of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the icon display mode scenario determination processing for the turning effect non-execution in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows production mode setting processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol stop display pattern determination processing in a production | presentation control board. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading zone production start judging processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows change production pattern determination processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the operation production determination process in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows icon change notice judging processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading zone production end processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows production input control processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows game information display control processing in a production control board. (A) is a figure showing the structure of the presentation information storage area of sub RAM102c, (b) is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a presentation information storage area. It is a figure showing an example of a pre-reading zone production scenario judging table. It is a figure showing an example of a final number determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a zone precursor presentation scenario determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for pre-reading zone production execution. It is a figure showing an example of a handshake meeting advance notice execution determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon final display mode determination table for handshake party advance notices. It is a figure showing an example of the words frequency judgment table for handshake party notices. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake party advance notices. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake party advance notices. It is a figure showing an example of the icon last display mode determination table for normal use. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use. It is a figure explaining the normal mode which is a display mode of an icon, the 1st special mode, and the 2nd special mode. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special mode 11-35 which is a display mode of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special mode 41-65 which is a display mode of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 4th special mode 11-24, 31 and 41 which is a display mode of an icon. It is a figure showing an example of a presentation mode determination table. (A) is a figure showing an example of the production | presentation symbol stop display pattern determination table for production mode A, (b) is a figure showing an example of the production | presentation symbol stop display pattern determination table for zone turning presentation. (A) is a figure showing an example of the production design temporary stop display scenario table for the pseudo continuation production in zone production and countdown production, (b) is an example of the production design temporary suspension display scenario table for the pseudo continuation production in the story production FIG. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation production pattern judging table (during zone precursory production and non-execution of pre-reading zone production) for production mode A. (A) is a figure showing an example of the change production pattern determination table (at the time of zone turning failure production 1) execution for production mode A, (b) is the change production pattern determination table for production mode A (zone rotation failure production 2 During execution of (1)). It is a figure showing an example of the change production pattern judging table (during zone run success presentation execution) for production mode A. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation production pattern judging table (during execution of pre-reading zone production) for production mode A. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation production pattern judging table for production mode B. It is a figure. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation production pattern judging table for production mode C. (A) shows an example of an operation effect determination table for effect mode A, (b) shows an example of an operation effect determination table for effect mode B, (c) shows an operation effect for effect mode C It is a figure showing an example of a judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of the operation presentation scenario determination table for operation presentation pattern A6 referred in presentation mode A. It is a figure showing an example of the operation presentation scenario determination table for operation presentation pattern B4 referred in presentation mode B. It is a figure showing an example of the operation presentation scenario determination table for the operation presentation pattern C4 referred in the presentation mode C. It is a figure showing an example of a promotion image. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the image display device in various game states. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a display example of simulated no normal variation effect in the effect mode A. It is a figure showing the example of a display of pseudo | simulation no shortening fluctuation production in production mode A. FIG. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the 1st SP reach change production in production mode A. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a display example of simulated no normal variation effect in the effect mode B. (A) is a figure showing the example of a display of the gargling effect performed during normal reach, (b) is a figure showing the example of a display of the operation effect performed during normal reach. (A) is a figure showing the example of a display of the operation production performed during SPSP reach, (b) is a figure showing the example of a display of the operation production performed during SPSP reach. It is a figure showing the presentation flow of a notice of a handshake meeting. It is a figure showing the presentation flow of a throwing kiss notice. (A-1) is a time chart for explaining an effect flow of zone turn effect and pre-reading zone effect (in the case of zone turn effect being executed with variation effect of 4 seconds), (a-2) is zone turn effect and pre-read Time chart for explaining the flow of effect of zone effect (when zone turn effect is executed by fluctuation effect of 8 seconds), (b-1) is the display pattern of effect design in zone turn success effect (change effect of 4 seconds (B-2) is a display pattern of the effect design in zone turn failure effect 1 (in case of 4 seconds of fluctuation effect, zone turn failure effect 1 is an example) (C-1) is the relationship between the stop of the special symbol and the change in the display mode of the icon (C-2) is for explaining the relationship between the stop of the special symbol and the change in the display mode of the icon (in the case of the zone turning failure effect 1 being executed by the fluctuation effect of 4 seconds). It is a time chart of. It is a figure showing a mode before a handshake meeting advance generate | occur | produces. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a hold icon to be a target of a handshake meeting advance notice is displayed in the third special mode 11, and (b) is a hold icon displayed before the hold icon to be a target of a handshake view notice (C) is a diagram showing the appearance of a handshake meeting venue related to a handshake meeting advance notice, (d) is a handshake character and an escort pertaining to a handshake meeting advance notice. It is a figure showing a mode that the character appeared. It is a figure showing a mode that the pending | holding icon used as the object of a notice of a handshake meeting is waiting. It is a figure showing a mode that the pending | holding icon used as the object of a notice of a handshake meeting is waiting. It is a figure showing a mode that a handshake meeting advance is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a handshake meeting advance is performed. (A) is a figure showing a mode immediately before the end of the handshake meeting advance notice, and (b) and (c) is a view showing a situation after the handshake meeting advance notice is finished. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing how the hold icon changes from the normal mode to the second special mode 13; (A) is a view showing a state before a throwing kiss notice is made, (b) is a view showing a character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is a character showing a target for the throwing kiss notice. It is a figure showing a mode that it flew toward the icon. (A) is a diagram showing that the heart hit the icon of the target of the throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a view showing that the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is notified. FIG. 6C is a view showing a state after the end of the throwing kiss notice. (A) is a view showing a state before a throwing kiss notice is made, (b) is a view showing a character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is a character showing a target for the throwing kiss notice. It is a figure showing a mode that it flew toward the icon. (A) is a diagram showing that the heart hit the icon of the target of the throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a view showing that the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is notified. FIG. 6C is a view showing a state after the end of the throwing kiss notice. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a mode before a zone precursor effect is performed, (c) and (d) is a mode that the display mode of the icon is a zone precursor effect by the 3rd special mode 41 is performed FIG. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing that a zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 4 is executed in the display mode of the icon, and (c) is a third special mode 5 and the third special mode with the icon displayed It is a figure showing a mode that zone presiding production by mode 2 (pre-reading zone production suggestion mode) is performed. (A) is a diagram showing that a zone precursor effect is being executed according to the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) and the pre-reading symbol constituting the zone turning effect is temporarily stopped in the display mode of the icon. In (b), the zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) is executed as the display mode of the icon, and the pre-reading symbol and zone pattern constituting the zone turning effect are temporarily stopped The figure showing a mode, (c) is a pre-read symbol, zone symbol and rush that constitutes zone turn effect while the zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) is executed as the icon display mode. It is a figure showing a mode that the symbol has stopped temporarily. In (a), while the zone precursor effect by the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) is being executed, the pre-read symbol, zone pattern and rush pattern that make up the zone turn effect are stopped. (B) and (c) show that zone notification effects are being performed according to the third special mode 3 (pre-reading zone notification effect mode) and the icon display mode is a pre-reading zone. It is a figure showing a mode that a zone background image is displayed. While showing zone information production by the 3rd special mode 3 (pre-reading zone effect informing aspect), and showing the pre-reading zone background image which shows that it is a pre-reading zone, the display mode of an icon is a figure showing a mode . (A) is a diagram showing how a zone notification effect is being performed by the third special mode 3 (pre-reading zone effect notification mode) in the display mode of the icon; (b) is a big hit informing notification in the icon display mode FIG. (A) is a time chart of the fluctuation effect when the pre-reading zone effect is ended by the execution of the transition effect, and (b) is a time chart of the fluctuation effect where the pre-reading zone effect is resumed after the execution of the transition effect. c) is a time chart of the fluctuation effect in which the pre-reading zone effect is promoted and resumed after the execution of the transition effect. It is a figure showing the mode of the fluctuation production in case the pre-reading zone production is ended by execution of a transition production. It is a figure showing a mode of change production in which pre-reading zone production is resumed after execution of transition production. It is a figure showing the mode of change production in which pre-reading zone production is promoted and resumed after transition production. (A) is a time chart of the fluctuation effect when the pre-reading zone effect started after the zone turning success effect is ended by the execution of the transition effect, and (b) is the shifting of the pre-reading zone effect started after the zone turning success effect It is a time chart of the fluctuation production resumed after execution of production, and (c) is a time chart of the fluctuation production in which the pre-reading zone production started after the zone turning success production is promoted and resumed after the execution of the transition production. It is a figure showing the mode of the fluctuation production in case the pre-reading zone production started after the zone crossing success production ends by execution of a transition production. (A) and (b) are time charts of the fluctuation effect when the story effect is ended by execution of the normal reach, and (c) is a time chart of the fluctuation effect in which the story effect is developed and resumed after the execution of the normal reach is there. It is a figure showing the mode of the fluctuation production in case story production ends by execution of normal reach. It is a figure showing the continuation of the fluctuation production of FIG. It is a figure showing the mode of the fluctuation production in which a story production advances and restarts after execution of normal reach. It is a figure showing the continuation of the fluctuation production of FIG. (A) is a time chart of the fluctuation effect when the countdown effect ends by the execution of the normal reach, (b) is a time chart of the fluctuation effect in which the countdown effect is developed and resumed after the execution of the normal reach. It is a figure showing the mode of the fluctuation production in case countdown production is ended by execution of normal reach. It is a figure showing the continuation of the fluctuation production of FIG. It is a figure showing the appearance of the change production in which countdown production is developed and resumed after execution of normal reach. It is a figure showing the mode of change production in which pre-reading zone production is promoted and resumed after transition production.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the gaming machine Y, a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down are formed. And the game board 2 that is present.

  The game board attachment frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game arcade, and is detachably attached.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board attachment frame Y1 via the hinge mechanism H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably around the hinge mechanism H. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the front surface portions of the game area 2A and the game board attachment frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the front portion of the game area 2A in a visible manner by a glass (transparent member) attached from the back side to a window provided at the center.

  Further, on the other end side of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. Fixation by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y2 is provided with a tray 50 for storing a plurality of gaming balls and a launch operation device 3 capable of an operation for launching the gaming balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a launch device 4 (see FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball toward the game area 2A. The launcher 4 is provided on the front of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the launch device 4.

  The launch operation device 3 has a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y 2 and a launch handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31. The launcher 4 launches the game ball with a strength according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 (hereinafter referred to as "game ball launch strength").

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a jackpot 8 described later are arranged directly below the game ball The second start port 7 is provided with a guiding member 29D having a guiding path formed on the upper surface.

  The decorative frame 29A is fitted in a substantially central portion of the game board 2. Inside the decorative frame 29A, an image display device 14 formed of a liquid crystal display is fitted. Also, at the inner end portion of the decorative frame 29A, a presentation character device 17 is provided.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. The game balls fired with a predetermined game ball firing strength rise between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enter the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and a windmill are provided. The game ball entering the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and a windmill.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detection sensor 11a, and when the general winning opening detection sensor 11a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (The gaming value is given).

  In addition, on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A, a winning gate 10 through which the game ball can pass is provided. The winning gate 10 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. Under the condition that the winning gate detection sensor 10a detects the game ball, a normal symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not the auxiliary game advantageous to the player is to be executed. The details of the normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  At the lower part of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, there is provided a first starting opening 6 which is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first starting opening 6 is provided with a first starting opening detection sensor 6a that detects a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is to be performed on condition that the first starting opening detection sensor 6a detects the game ball. The details of the first special symbol lottery will be described later. In addition, when the first starting opening detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (a game value is awarded).

  A variable second starting port 7 is provided immediately below the first starting port 6. The second starting opening 7 is controlled by the second starting opening control device 70 either in the basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning or in the special mode (open mode) in which winning is possible. The second starting opening 7 is also provided with a second starting opening detection sensor 7a that detects a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not the jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is to be executed on condition that the second starting opening detection sensor 7a detects the game ball. The details of the second special symbol lottery will be described later. In addition, when the second starting opening detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (a game value is given).

  The second starting opening control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  Normally, the movable piece 70A is formed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except for a predetermined condition being met), stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting opening 7 is It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normally movable piece 70A is pivoted forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled in a special mode that can enter the ball. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the movable piece 70A opens the second starting opening 7, the movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can be guided to the second starting opening 7 by receiving the game balls flowing down.

  In addition, the predetermined condition about the 2nd starting opening control device 70 is that it is determined that auxiliary game will be performed in the above-mentioned normal symbol lottery.

  On the downstream side of the winning gate 10, a variable big winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 either in a basic mode incapable of winning or in a special mode in which a prize can be won. The special winning opening 8 is provided with a special winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the special winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (a game value is given).

  The special winning opening control device 80 is equipped with a special movable piece 80A that can turn and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit that turns the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is formed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except for a predetermined condition being met), the game is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the special winning opening 8 is played The ball is closed so that it can not enter the ball. The closing of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic mode of the special winning opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is pivoted forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the special winning opening 8 so that the gaming ball can enter. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. The special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A when the special winning opening 8 is opened, and can be guided to the special winning opening 8 by receiving the game balls flowing down.

  In addition, with the predetermined conditions about big winning a prize mouth control device 80, the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery mentioned above (hereinafter, the 1st special symbol lottery and the 2nd special symbol lottery are put together and the "special symbol lottery" In general, it is determined that a special game (jackpot game) is to be executed.

  A symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21 and a normal symbol display device 22 on the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A, and a first special symbol hold A hold display comprising a display 23, a second special symbol hold display 24 and a normal symbol hold display 25 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed under the condition that the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is The variable display device displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting opening 7.

  With the first special symbol lottery, we perform big hit judgment whether or not we win a big hit based on special figure judgment information acquired based on entering of game ball to the first start mouth 6 or in result of big hit judgment It refers to performing special symbol determination that determines the type of special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 based on the above. Also, with the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the special view determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 7, or the second special symbol display It means to determine the type of special symbol to be displayed on the device 21 or the like. That is, it can be said that each special symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 20, and the first special symbol of the first special symbol for notifying the result of the first special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed Stop display is performed. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 21 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner, and the second special symbol for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed. The stop display of the symbol is performed.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each have a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line. In the variable display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 moves and blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a special symbol, the specific LED showing the result of each special symbol lottery lights up.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the winning gate 10. In the normal symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the winning is made on the basis of the common drawing determination information acquired based on the passage of the gaming ball to the winning gate 10, or the normal symbol display device based on the result of the determination It means performing normal symbol determination which determines the kind of normal symbol to be displayed on 22 or the like. That is, it can be said that the normal symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the auxiliary game advantageous to the player.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in the normal symbol display device 22, and the stop display of the normal symbol for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, the normal symbol display device 22 has a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the normal symbol, a specific LED representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is turned on.

  By the way, even if the game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7 during variation display of the special symbol or during the big hit game (special game) in which the big winning opening control device 80 operates, the variation display of the special symbol is immediately It is not necessarily performed and the result of a special symbol lottery is notified. That is, the variable display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as the fixed condition, an upper limit value is provided for the number that can suspend the variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to "4" for each of the starting ports 6, 7. That is, the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol for each starting opening 6, 7 can be reserved up to four.

  The first special symbol holding display device 23 displays the number of holdings (U1: hereinafter referred to as "the first special drawing holding number") of the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the first special drawing fluctuation display") Do. The second special symbol holding display device 24 displays the number of holdings (U2: hereinafter referred to as the "second special view holding number") of the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the second special view variable display") Do. Each of the first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 has, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of holdings.

  In addition, the upper limit reserve number is set to 4 similarly about the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the common view fluctuation display"), and the number of reservations (G: hereinafter, the number of the common drawing suspension) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25). The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the common drawing reserve number.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for performing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect illumination device 16, and the effect service device 17. An image display device 14 and a rendering service object device 17 are provided on the game board 2, and a sound output device 15 and a rendering illumination device 16 are provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs effect display by an image by displaying various still images and moving images according to the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14. However, other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The presentation character object device 17 includes the movable portion 17A, and operates the movable portion 17A to perform an effect by operation. Specifically, the movable portion 17A is moved from the “initial position” (original position) above the image display device 14 to the “first operation position” above the center of the front surface of the image display device 14. Moving. In addition, the movable portion 17A moves from the “initial position” to the “second operation position” which is the center position of the front surface of the image display device 14 via the “first operation position”. The movable portion 17A moves from the “initial position” to the “first operation position” and then returns to the “initial position” or moves from the “initial position” to the “first operation position”. After moving to the "second operation position", a movement operation such as returning to the "initial position" via the "first operation position" is performed. Further, the audio output device 15 performs effects by audio by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect) and the like. In addition, the effect illuminating device 16 performs effects by illumination by changing the irradiation direction and light emission color of the light of each lamp.

  Further, the tray 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 which function as input devices for performing operations relating to various effects described later.

  The effect button device 18 projects the operation button 18A, the operation button detection switch 18a for detecting the operation to the operation button 18A, and the operation button 18A at the normal position (normal state) and above the normal position. An effect button drive motor 18b for moving (changing) to a position (projected state) is provided (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Moreover, the light emitting element (full color LED, lamp etc.) for light-emitting the effect button 18A in a predetermined | prescribed aspect is also provided.

  The selection button device 19 includes a selection button detection switch 19a for detecting an operation on the operable selection button 19A and the selection button 19A (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Moreover, the light emitting element (full color LED, lamp etc.) for making the selection button 19A emit light in a predetermined mode is also provided.

  The selection button 19A includes an upper button 191A, a left button 192A, a lower button 193A, and a right button 194A. Each of the buttons 191A to 194A is provided so as to be able to be pressed in a state of being protruded from the tray 50.

  The effect device executes various effects in accordance with the progress (state) of the game. As the effect, for example, there is a fluctuation effect (special figure lottery effect) performed by the image display device 14 based on the results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The change effect (special figure lottery effect) is performed with the change display of the effect pattern and the stop display of the effect pattern.

  The variable display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol changes for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, when the variable display of the effect symbol and the stop display are collectively referred to as "the effect symbol display"). In the stop display of the effect pattern, the effect pattern is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode that represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The effect symbols represent, for example, three lines of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (for example, numbers from "1" to "9") arranged in the left, center, and right regions of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, for example. And a special effect pattern TZ4 (effect pattern representing numbers from "1" to "9") arranged in an end-side area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14). In the variation display of the production symbols, the presentation symbols of each row move from the top to the bottom (variation display) as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of a production | presentation symbol is not restricted to this. In addition, during the variable display of the effect symbols, various effect images such as background images and object images such as characters, movies, etc. are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of the effect symbol, the above three lines of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the left region, center region and right region of the display unit 140 such as the image display device 14 etc. In the side area, the special effect pattern TZ4 of the above-mentioned three lines is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display unit 140) when the stop display of the effect symbols is performed. Further, the stop indication of the special effect pattern TZ4 informs that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 have been stopped and displayed.

  In addition, it does not report the result of the special symbol lottery by arrangement of the production design TZ1-TZ3 on the effective line, but the result of the special symbol drawing by arrangement of the production design TZ1-TZ3 on the effective line and arrangement of the special production design TZ4. May be notified. In addition, the special effect design TZ4 is not displayed (variation display and stop display) on the image display device 14, but may be displayed (variation display and stop display) on a dedicated display unit (such as an LED display). The special effect pattern TZ4 may be eliminated and only the effect pattern TZ1 to TZ3 may be removed.

  In the effect device, in addition to the change effect (special figure lottery effect), the special game effect to be performed when the big hit game is executed, and the change display of the special symbol or the special game is not performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as demonstration effects performed in the standby state (so-called, customer waiting state) are performed.

  On the back of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, a main control board 101 for performing various controls related to the game, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game An information output terminal board 108 is provided.

(Internal configuration of gaming machine Y)
Next, an internal configuration of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply substrate 107 generates a main power (operation power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and the main power is used as the gaming machine Y (main control board 101, effect control board 102, The sheet is supplied to the payout control board 103, the lamp control board 104, the image control board 105, and various electronic components. Also, the power supply voltage supplied from the outside is monitored, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, it is detected that a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and a low level power failure detection signal is sent to the main control board 101. Output.

  Further, the power supply substrate 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor which is stored by power supply from the outside, so that the backup power can be supplied to the main control substrate 101 even when the power is shut down (power failure). The backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control board 102 or the payout control board 103. Further, the backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or the capacitor and the battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the progress of the game (basic operation) in an integrated manner. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators), etc., and performs arithmetic processing related to gaming, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103 or the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, the first start opening detection sensor 6a, the second start opening detection sensor 7a, the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, and the winning gate detection sensor 10a via an input port (not shown). The general winning opening detection sensor 11a is connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when the game ball is detected.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the ordinary movable piece 70A of the second start opening controller 70 via an output port (not shown), and a special winning opening control A special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs control signals for controlling the respective solenoids to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  In addition, on the output side of the main control board 101, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol hold via the output port (not shown) The display 23, the second special symbol hold display 24 and the normal symbol hold display 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling the respective display devices to the respective display devices 20 to 25.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information on a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The gaming information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined gaming information based on the predetermined gaming information (external signal) described above.

  The effect control board 102 centrally controls the progression of the effect (rendering operation). The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102 a, a sub ROM 102 b, and a sub RAM 102 c. The effect control board 102 is communicably connected to the main control board 101 in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing relating to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  The effect button detection switch 18 a and the selection button detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 through the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is operated, the effect button detection switch 18a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs to the effect control board 102 an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed. That is, the lamp control board 104 plays the role of a relay board for relaying the effect button detection signal.

  When the selection button 19A is operated, the selection button detection switch 19a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the operation of the selection button 19A has been performed to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 plays the role of a relay board for relaying the selection button detection signal.

  The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A and detects the operated operation of the upper button 191A, and the left button detection switch 192a connected to the left button 192A and detects the operated operation of the left button 192A. And a lower button detection switch 193a connected to the lower button 193A to detect an operated operation of the lower button 193A, and a right button detection switch 194a connected to the right button 194A to detect an operated operation of the right button 194A.

  When each button detection switch 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a detects an operated object, the upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are transmitted via the lamp control board 104, respectively. Output to the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a "selection button detection signal".

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation (operation) input from the player is detected by the effect button detection switch 18a and the selection button detection switch 19a, but the present invention is not limited to this. An infrared sensor (motion sensor) for detecting an operation such as hand holding, and a detection element capable of detecting an input such as an operation or operation of the player such as a touch panel for detecting a predetermined operation of the player It is also good.

  The sub CPU 102a is a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator) Based on the above, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on the processing, a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The sub RAM 102c functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the gaming ball from the launcher 4 and payout control for delivering the gaming ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c, and is bidirectionally communicably connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107.

  The touch sensor 32 a and the knob 32 b of the firing volume are connected to the input side of the payout control board 103. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the launch handle 32 of the launch control device 3. When a player or a store clerk or the like touches the shooting handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the shooting handle 32, and transmits a shooting handle detection signal to the shooting control board 106. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The knob 32b of the firing volume rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32, and detects the rotation angle.

  Further, on the output side of the payout control substrate 103, the emission solenoid 41 of the emission device 4 is connected via the power supply substrate 107. The payout control board 103, when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, permits energization of the firing solenoid 41.

  Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 is rotated, and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear is rotated. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 detected by the knob 32 b of the launch volume is applied to the launch solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates in response to the applied voltage. As described above, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the firing solenoid 41 based on the information on the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the firing volume knob 32b to fire the gaming ball.

  In the present embodiment, the reciprocation speed of the emission solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the emission control substrate 106. Since one gaming ball is fired each time the firing solenoid 41 reciprocates, the number of gaming balls fired per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  In addition, on the output side of the payout control board 103, a payout device 5 for delivering gaming balls supplied from a storage tank (not shown) provided on the upper surface of the back surface of the gaming board mounting frame Y1 to the tray 50 (player). The payout drive unit 51 is connected. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the award ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101 and performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give the predetermined gaming ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a work area of data at the time of calculation processing of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 is provided with a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above-mentioned boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, the effect lighting device 16 and the effect product device 17 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104 a controls the light emission of the effect illumination device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”) and emits light of the effect illumination device 16. Perform drive control on the motor to change the direction. In addition, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect product device 17 based on the effect control command.

  Further, the lamp control board 104 is connected to the effect button detection switch 18 a of the effect button device 18 and the selection button detection switch 19 a of the selection button device 19, and the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18 and the selection button device 19. Relay between the effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal.

  The image control board 105 generates an image signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on at least the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14. The voice generation unit 105C generates a voice signal related to the voice to be output to the voice output unit 15, and outputs a voice output unit 15;

  The general control unit 105A of the image control board 105 is provided with a general CPU 105Aa, a general ROM 105Ab, and a general RAM 105Ac in order to perform image display control by the image display device 14.

  The central CPU 105Aa is connected to the central ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the central CPU 105Aa is read out. When the overall CPU 105Aa receives a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, it instructs the image generation unit 105B to display an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 based on the command, and causes the sound generation unit 105C to A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general control RAM 105 Ac functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the general control CPU 105 Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general control ROM 105 Ab.

  Further, the general control ROM 105Ab is configured by a mask ROM, and displays a control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and animation of effect patterns An animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for the purpose are stored.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method And various information such as a duty ratio as a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP 105 Ba (Video Display Processor) which is an image processor, a CGROM 105 Bb storing image data, and a VRAM 105 Bc having a frame buffer for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. ing.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as an origin of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the general CPU 105Aa. The image data is a material-like image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, an individual image representing a background image such as a scene, a character, and a speech constituting a background of a stage graphic image or stage pattern. It is data. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame configured by combining (superposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb comprises a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc. and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) etc. consisting of a set of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg 32 × 32 pixels) ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an alpha value indicating transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores, without compressing, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying a color. Note that the CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. Also, various known compression methods such as MPEG 4 can be used as the compression method of the movie.

  Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to VDP 105 Ba. The VDP 105 Ba divides this pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Jumping judgment table)
FIG. 4 (a-1) and FIG. 4 (a-2) are figures which show an example of the big hit determination table for performing a big hit determination. The jackpot determination is a part of the special symbol lottery described above, and is for determining whether or not a "jackpot" for executing a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A-1 is a table (hereinafter referred to as a “first jackpot determination table”) referred to in the first jackpot determination performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4A-2 is a table (hereinafter referred to as a "second jackpot determination table") referred to in the second jackpot determination performed based on the ball entering the second starting opening 7 of the gaming ball. is there.

  In any of the jackpot determination tables, a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a "low probability jackpot determination table") to be referred to when the jackpot probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value) And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “high probability jackpot determination table”) to be referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated with each other and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 on the jackpot determination table, "big hit" or "loss" It is judged (decided).

  After the stop display of the special symbol (special result) showing the result that the jackpot judgment result is "big hit", the jackpot game (special game) with the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed, and the prize ball is more than usual It is easy to get That is, the game value is given to the player.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. 4 (b). In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and the presence / absence of execution of reach effect are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, the reach effect is executed in the fluctuation effect by comparing the reach determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7 on the reach determination table. It is judged (decided) whether or not to.

  If the result of the reach determination is “reach presence” to execute reach effect, reach effect for enhancing the player's expectation for the jackpot win is performed in the fluctuation effect (special figure lottery effect). In the present embodiment, the probability that "reach" is determined in the reach determination table used in the reach determination to be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6 will be described later with respect to the first Although it is not divided by the number of special drawing reservations, the probability of being determined to be "reach" may be divided by the number of first special drawing reservations, and may be different depending on the number of first special drawing reservations. For example, the probability that "reach" is determined in the reach determination table used when the first special drawing reservation number is a first value (for example, the first special drawing reservation number = 0 to 1) is the first special Make it higher than the probability that "reach is determined" in the reach determination table used when the figure reserve number is a second value (for example, the first special figure reserve number 2 2) which is larger than the first value Can.

  In addition, similarly, the probability that it is determined that "reach is" in the reach determination table used in the reach determination to be executed based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 7 is the second special view reserve described later Although not divided by a number, the probability of being determined to be “reached” may be divided by the number of second special map reservations, and may be different according to the number of second special map reservations. For example, the probability that "reach" is determined in the reach determination table used when the second special drawing reservation number is a third value (for example, second special drawing reservation number = 0 to 1) is the second special Make it higher than the probability that "reach is determined" in the reach determination table used when the number of figure reservations is a fourth value (for example, the second special figure reservation number 2 2) that is larger than the third value Can.

  As reach effect, for example, during the fluctuation display of the production design, production design (for example, production design TZ1 and production in 2 areas of the left area, the central area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14) The symbol TZ3) is temporarily stopped, and if the predetermined effect pattern is stopped on the predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, it becomes a state (a so-called "reach state") that becomes an array of effect symbols representing a jackpot win Reach production is mentioned. In addition to this, there is a full rotation reach effect or the like which is variably displayed in the state where the same kind of effect design is arranged in the left side area, the center area and the right side area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  After reach condition occurs in reach production, specific effects (so-called "SP reach" and "SPSP reach") are developed to increase the expectation of winning a big hit (it is expected that the variation display of the special symbol will be a special result) There are cases where it takes place or not. In addition, in reach production, reach condition does not necessarily occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a specific effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for winning a jackpot without the occurrence of a reach state. In the present embodiment, reach effect is performed if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot". However, even in the case of the jackpot, reach determination may be performed, and reach effect may be performed only when it is determined that “reach is” in the reach determination.

(Special symbol judgment table)
Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (b) are figures which show an example of the special symbol determination table for performing special symbol determination. Special symbol determination is what constitutes the special symbol lottery mentioned above, and the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (stop display form of special symbol) is determined based on the result of the big hit determination It is to be.

  The special symbol determination table is roughly divided by the result of the big hit determination (big hit or loss). That is, FIG. 5 (a) is a special symbol judgment table for jackpot winning referred to in the special symbol judgment when the result of the jackpot judgment is "big hit", and FIG. 5 (b) is the result of the jackpot judgment " It is a special symbol determination table for a loss which is referred to in the special symbol determination in the case of "lost".

  Each of these tables is further divided by the type of the starting opening (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) in which the game ball serving as a trigger for the special symbol determination is entered. When the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the special symbol determination table is further divided by the presence or absence of the reach effect (reach determination result).

  In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the type (determination result) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number obtained based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 is checked against the special symbol determination table to display the special symbol that is stopped. The type of symbol is determined (decided). As information indicating the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, special figure stop symbol data and an effect symbol specification command are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in processing in the main control board 101, and the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in processing in the effect control board 102. The effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  The effect symbol designation command is a 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) in which the special symbol according to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. And 1-byte DATA data for identifying the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  As for the effect symbol specification command, if the MODE data is "E3H", it indicates that the stop display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is "E4H", the second special It represents that stop display of the special symbol is performed by the symbol display device 21. In addition, that the MODE data is "E1H", the production symbol designation command is called "1st production symbol specification command", and the MODE data is "E4H", production character designation command is called "2nd production symbol specification command".

(Big hit gaming control table)
FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot game control table used when controlling the jackpot game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the jackpot game, an opening time which is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the opening transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the opening start Designated command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, ending time which is a period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and ending An ending specification command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start time is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, at the time of the jackpot game, which control condition to use is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

(Big winning opening opening and closing control table)
6 (b) to 6 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the big winning opening / closing control table used when controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game. FIG. 6 (b) is a large winning opening / closing control table for long per game referred to in long per game constituting a big hit game, and FIG. 6 (c) is a short per game referred to in short per game constituting a big hit game. It is a large winning a prize opening opening and closing control table.

  The condition for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game is stored in the big winning opening and closing control table for the big hit game. As a condition for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, the round number (R) which is the number of the round game, the special electric power which is the opening of the big winning opening 8 in each round game (operation of the big winning opening control device 80) The operation number (K), and the opening time and closing time (operation time and non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

(Game condition data judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a view showing an example of a game condition data determination table for determining (determining) game condition data to be newly set after the end of the jackpot game. The game condition data determination table is divided according to the state (low probability gaming state / high probability gaming state) of the winning probability of the big hit, and in each of the divided tables, the type of special symbol (special figure stop symbol data) and the game Condition data is uniquely associated with and stored. The game condition data includes the state of the jackpot probability newly set by the jackpot and the state of the start probability winning state and the number of times of special symbol display that can be executed depending on the state of the game conditions (Xa, Ja: hereinafter, It represents “the number of executable times”, and three types “00H” to “02H” are set.

  FIG. 7B is a view showing an example of the game condition determination table for determining the game conditions from the game condition data. The game condition determination table includes game condition data, ON / OFF of flags (high probability flag and time reduction flag) indicating the state of each game condition, and the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed depending on the state of the game condition (Xa , Ja: Hereinafter, the “number of executables” is uniquely associated and stored. The number of times the special symbol variation display can be performed can be said to be the number of special symbol lotterys.

(Variation pattern judgment table of special symbol)
FIGS. 8-9 is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred when determining the aspect (henceforth "a special figure fluctuation pattern") of the fluctuation display of a special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the time required for the fluctuation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special drawing fluctuation time") and the effect type of the fluctuation effect (special drawing lottery effect) according to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. ing. The details of the fluctuation effect will be described later, but it is the effect that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed until the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the above-mentioned effect pattern is included. Other than the fluctuation display of the design, the image effect by the object image such as the character by the image display device 14 and the predetermined movie image, the sound effect by the sound output device 15, the illumination effect by the effect illumination device 16, the operation effect by the movable portion 17A, etc. It consists of

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern is displayed in the first special figure fluctuation pattern which is an aspect of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 It is distinguished by the 2nd special figure change pattern which is an aspect of the change display of 2 special symbols.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the non-time-saving gaming state described later, and FIG. 9 is the special figure fluctuation in the time-saving gaming state described later It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred when determining a pattern. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is roughly divided depending on the gaming state.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table further includes the special figure stop symbol data and the special figure reservation number that can identify the type of special symbol (the type of starting opening according to the variable display) and the special symbol determination result to be variably displayed. Divided by U1 or U2).

  In each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more special figure fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number acquired based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 is compared with the special drawing fluctuation pattern determination table. A figure variation pattern is determined.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is assigned with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern is expected to have a high probability of winning a big hit or a specific big hit (for example, a positive variation big hit, a long hit, etc.) The degree of expectation is associated.

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern is formally decided by the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment (step S313-3) at the time of the fluctuation indication start of the special symbol (at the time of the special symbol memory decision processing of step S310) It is tentatively determined by the first predetermination (step S236) or the second predetermination (step S246) at the time of entering balls 6 and 7 (during the input control process of step S200).

  In addition, the starting opening winning combination designation command and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The starting opening winning combination designation command corresponds to the special view fluctuation pattern determined by the first prior determination or the second prior determination described later, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the execution of the first prior determination or the second prior determination. The special figure variation pattern specification command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the special figure variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure variation pattern determination is performed.

  Special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, 1 byte for identifying the special symbol display device (the 1st special symbol display device 20 or the 2nd special symbol display device 21) where the fluctuation display of the special symbol which relates to the particular symbol decision concerned is done And the 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern. As for the special figure variation pattern specification command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is "E7H", the 1st special symbol display device 20 2 represents that the special symbol display is performed by the special symbol display device 21.

  Note that the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is "E6H" is the "first special figure fluctuation pattern specification command", and the special data fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is "E7H" is the "second special drawing It is called a fluctuation pattern specification command.

  The starting opening winning combination designation command is configured of 1 byte MODE data for identifying the type of starting opening, and 1 byte DATA data for identifying a special figure fluctuation pattern.

  As for the start opening winning combination designation command, if the MODE data is "E1H", it indicates that the gaming ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is "E2H", the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that the game ball has entered. In addition, the thing of the start opening winning combination designation command whose MODE data is "E1H" is the "1st start opening winning combination designation command", the thing of the start opening winning combination designation command whose MODE data is "E2H" is "2nd start opening winning combination designation command" "

  Further, in the rightmost column of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, as a reference, the effect type (rough classification) of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is described.

  Here, the effect type of the fluctuation effect according to the special figure fluctuation pattern described in the column of the effect type of FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described.

  The “normal fluctuation” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a normal fluctuation effect without the reach, and is a fluctuation effect which makes it difficult for the player to have a jackpot winning expectation. The “shortened fluctuation” is a fluctuation effect with a fluctuation time shorter than a normal fluctuation and not accompanied by a reach, and is a fluctuation effect which makes it difficult for a player to have a jackpot winning expectation. The "very short fluctuation" is a fluctuation effect which has a fluctuation time shorter than that of a shortening fluctuation and does not involve a reach, and is a fluctuation effect which makes it difficult for a player to have a jackpot winning expectation.

  In "reach", a part of the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 notifying the big hit is temporarily stopped, and the other effect symbols and the special effect symbol TZ4 change, the player feels the expectation of the big hit It means the fluctuation aspect to give. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 notifying a big hit, the two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 temporarily stop at "7" (false stop) ) And the remaining effect pattern TZ2 and the special effect pattern TZ4 are in a variation.

  In addition, with "temporary stop", the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 swing small, or the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 are deformed small to make it appear to the player as if the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped. Is called “pseudo-stop”. In addition, about special production design TZ4, because fluctuation display is started in synchronization with the start of fluctuation display of special design, fluctuation display is started, because it is stopped and displayed in synchronization with stop display of special symbol, it is effect design TZ1 The temporary stop is not performed as in TZ3 to TZ3, but the display may be synchronized (synchronized) with the variable display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the variable stop (including the temporary stop).

  8 and 9, two rendering symbols TZ1 and TZ3 temporarily stop in the left and right regions of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and one remaining rendering symbol TZ2 in the central region. Is a reach with a low degree of expectation (a special game is executed) in the jackpot winning of the special effect pattern TZ4 fluctuating in the end area.

  In the present embodiment, although "normal reach" is not selected as the special figure change pattern relating to the big hit, the "normal reach" is selected as the special figure change pattern relating to the big hit. You can also

  The “SP reach” described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a super reach having a high degree of expectation (a special game is executed) of a jackpot winning than the normal reach. For example, the effect pattern TZ2 of the central area not temporarily stopped may make a special change, or a special effect image or a movie may be displayed.

  The “SPSP reach” described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a special reach having a high degree of expectation (a special game is executed) that is a big hit than the super reach. For example, a special effect image, a movie or the like different from the super reach may be displayed after the super reach.

  In addition, although it is not described in the column of the effect classification of FIG.8 and FIG.9, in this Embodiment, a pseudo | simulation continuous effect may be performed also in any change production | presentation. The "simulated series effect" is a special effect of temporarily stopping the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and temporarily changing them once or several times during the fluctuation display of the special symbols corresponding to one special symbol lottery It means the advance notice effect by the fluctuation mode which simulates the fluctuation display of a plurality of times. In addition, about special production pattern TZ4, even during the execution of the pseudo connected effect, the special effect is not performed, and the fluctuation display is continued until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol.

  As a first feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the non-time-saving game state shown in FIG.

As a first feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the time reduction gaming state shown in FIG. 9, the point is that the rate at which the ultra-shortened fluctuation is selected and determined increases as the number of special drawing reservations increases.
A second feature is that an ultra-shortened fluctuation (2 seconds) having a variation time shorter than the shortened fluctuation (4 seconds) of FIG. 8 is set.
The third feature is that a normal variation (6 seconds) having a variation time shorter than the normal variation (8 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
A fourth feature is that a long variation (10 seconds) having a variation time shorter than that of the long variation (13.5 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.

  FIGS. 10A to 10F show an example of a table used when controlling an ordinary symbol-based game based on winning on the winning gate 10. FIG.

(Collision judgment table)
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a collision determination table for performing collision determination. The hit determination is to determine (determine) whether or not to execute the auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting opening 7.

  The hit determination table is divided by the starting opening prize winning ease. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table which is referred to in the non-time-short game state and a hit determination table which is referred to in the time-short game state.

  In each collision determination table, the collision determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, by collating the hit determination random number obtained based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 to the hit determination table, either “hit” or “loss” is determined. When the player wins the "hit", after the stop display of the normal symbol (specific result) indicating the result, the auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting opening 7 is executed, and the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 7 than usual. It is easy to hit the ball and it is easy to get the winning ball. That is, the game value is given to the player.

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG.10 (b) is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol determination table for performing a normal symbol determination. The normal symbol determination is to determine (determine) the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided by the result of the hit determination (hit and loss).

  In each normal symbol determination table, the normal symbol determination value and the normal symbol to be displayed in a stopped state are uniquely associated with each other and stored. As will be described later, by comparing the random number for normal symbol determination acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the normal symbol determination table, the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. As information indicating the type of normal symbols to be stopped and displayed, a common figure stop symbol data and a normal effect symbol specification command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control substrate 101, and the normal effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control substrate 102 at the start of the variation display of the normal symbol, and is used in the processing in the effect control substrate 102.

(Common map fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 10 (c) determines the variation pattern of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common variation pattern") associated with the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "general variation period"). It is a figure which shows the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table for. The common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a common drawing fluctuation pattern judgment table to be referred to in the non-time-saving game state and a common drawing fluctuation pattern judgment table referred to in the time-short playing state.

  In each table, the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more common drawing fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, the kind of common drawing fluctuation pattern is determined by checking the common drawing fluctuation pattern judging random number obtained based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 in the common drawing fluctuation pattern judging table. .

(Auxiliary game reference data judgment table)
FIG. 10D is a view showing an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table used when controlling the auxiliary game. In this table, data (auxiliary game reference data) to be referred to when performing the auxiliary game is stored. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current starting opening prize winning ease and the common drawing stop symbol data and the auxiliary game reference data are associated. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the starting opening winning possibility state when the normal symbol determination is performed and the result of the normal symbol determination.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 10E is a view showing an example of the auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game. The conditions for controlling the auxiliary game are stored in this table. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, it is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the opening start time which is a period from the start of the auxiliary game to the first opening of the second starting port 7 and the opening start Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second start opening 7, ending time which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second opening 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, Also, an ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of ending is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

(Second start port opening and closing control table)
FIG. 10 (f) is a view showing an example of a second starting opening opening / closing control table for auxiliary game used when controlling the opening / closing of the second starting opening 7. As shown in FIG. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting opening 7 in the auxiliary game are stored in the second starting opening and closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start opening 7, the general power operating number (D) which is the opening (the operation of the second start opening control device 70) number of the second start opening 7 in the auxiliary game, and (2) The opening time and closing time (operating time and non-operating time) of the starting port 7 are set.

(Description of the type of special game)
In the present embodiment, a "big hit game" to be executed when winning a "big hit" as a special game advantageous to the player, with the opening of the big winning opening 8 (activation of the big winning opening control device 80). Is provided. The big hit game is divided into "long play game" and "short hit game" mainly by the difference in opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game with one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times the big winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening number) and the total of the openable time (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. "Can be opened" is because the number of game balls that can enter the large winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, nine). Therefore, even if the special winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times open, the special winning opening 8 may be closed, and the round game may be ended. In addition, even if the maximum opening time has not passed, the special winning opening 8 is closed, and the round game may end. In addition, the maximum opening frequency and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified in each jackpot game.

(Description of gaming conditions)
Next, the game conditions which become the conditions when the game proceeds will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the starting opening winning possibility are set as the game conditions. The game proceeds under the low probability gaming state or the high probability gaming state for the winning probability of the jackpot, and the game progresses under the short time gaming state or the non-short time gaming state for the starting opening ability of the game ball Do. The initial (when the power is turned on) gaming conditions are set to the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, and are referred to as the normal gaming state based on the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state. Further, the low probability gaming state and the short time gaming state are referred to as a low probability short time gaming state, and the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state are referred to as a probability variation gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the low probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set relatively disadvantageously to the player as 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is set to be higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, 1/40 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is a high probability gaming state, winning of the jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of jackpot wins per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous for the player It can be said that

  The non-time-short game state is a state in which the start-up winning ability is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-short game state, the spread map fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time of the second starting opening control device 70 that operates when winning in "hit" in the hit determination (second start The total opening time of the mouth 7 is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning a hit in the determination of a normal symbol is set to 1/50. In addition, it is because "the sum total of open time" may open the 2nd starting opening 7 in multiple times with respect to one hit. In addition, since the number of times that the game ball can win a prize is limited for one winning, when the game ball wins the number, the game ball is closed without waiting for the opening time and the number of times of opening to elapse.

  On the other hand, the time saving game state (low probability / high probability) means that the opening time of the second starting opening 7 (operating time of the second starting opening control device 70) per unit time is smaller than the non time saving gaming state. It refers to the gaming state where the second starting opening 7 tends to be in the open mode for a long time. Due to the relatively high start-up winning ability and the relatively short variation time of the special pattern variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table, the ratio for which the variation time shorter than the non-time saving game state is selected is Many (the average value of fluctuation time becomes short), and the number of executable times of the second special symbol determination per unit time also increases. Therefore, under the same jackpot winning probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time, the greater the number of jackpot wins per unit time inevitably, so the time saving gaming state ( The low probability / high probability) can be said to be advantageous to the player over the non-time-saving gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the spread map fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total maximum opening time of the second starting opening 7 is set to 5.2 seconds. The probability of winning is set to 49/50. That is, all the components of the starting opening winning a prize ease are set to the player more advantageously than the non-time saving game state. In the time saving game state, the second starting opening 7 is opened twice through the 1.5 second closing (interval), but there is no such closing, and may be opened only once. Also, closure may be provided multiple times.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7, three balls can be obtained, but the player discharges the game ball by operating the appropriate release handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player is likely to decrease. However, when in the time saving game state, entering the second start opening 7 is easier than in the non-time saving game state, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, also from the viewpoint of the number of gaming balls possessed by the player, the time saving game state is advantageously set for the player as compared with the non-time saving game state.

  As described above, the type of jackpot game (long game / short game) and the game condition (low probability game state / high probability game state and non-time-short game state / non-short game state / newly set after the jackpot game by jackpot win) The combination with the time saving game state is determined. In view of this, the type of the substantial jackpot (the type of jackpot based on the degree of profit enjoyed by the player) is the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game condition (newly set after the jackpot game is over) It can be said that the combination with the gaming state). Therefore, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game led by the jackpot and the gaming conditions after the jackpot game separately from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, that is, based on the type of profit enjoyed by the player Type of jackpot can be classified.

  "Perform Probability Long Time Short / Long (1 for Probability Change Big Hits)" to make the jackpot run the long hit game by winning the jackpot, and then set the 50 high probability gaming state and 100 short time gaming state (probability changing gaming state) A big hit is made to execute a long hit game by winning a big hit, and then set 50 high probability gaming state and 80 short time gaming states "High probability middle time short / long length (probable variation big hit 2)", short by winning A jackpot that causes a hit game to be executed and then is set to a 50-time high probability gaming state and a 60-time short playing state is referred to as "a high probability short time short / short (3).

  When the jackpot is won, the normal gaming state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state will be.

(Control processing of main control board)
Next, control processing executed by the main CPU 101a in the main control board 101 will be described.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply substrate 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the boot program from the main ROM 101b in response to the power-on, and determines whether the RAM clear switch (not shown) is on or not, and the RAM clear switch is on. Then, the process of initializing each storage area of the main RAM 101c is performed, and when the RAM clear switch is not ON, the process of restoring (restoring) to the control state before the power failure (power failure) is performed.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the random number for reach determination and the special pattern fluctuation random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including a jackpot determination initial value random number, a special symbol determination initial value random number, and a collision determination initial value random number. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds), whereby the following timer interrupt processing is executed.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a in the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol change time update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an opening / closing time update process for the special winning opening 8, etc. And, time control processing is performed to update the auxiliary gaming timer counter that performs update processing of fluctuation time of normal symbol, update processing of stop time of normal symbol, and update processing of open / close time of second starting port 7 and the like.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the hit determination random number, and the normal symbol determination random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process of updating the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the collision determination initial value random number.

  In addition, about update of various random numbers, a random number is updated by adding "1" to the random number counter provided for every classification of random numbers. Various random numbers have random number ranges. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, when updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without adding "1" and the random number indicated by the random number counter has already been set once When the circulation initial value is reached, the initial value random number at that time is set as a new circulation initial value, and each random number value is newly updated.

  At step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process to determine whether or not a new valid signal has been transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a controls the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the special winning opening control device 80. Perform special pattern special power control processing (special symbol processing) for performing control of the special symbol system (control of special symbol system device). The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a controls the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting opening control device 70 (controls the normal symbol system device). Perform symbol system processing). The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the winning ball counter corresponding to the starting opening (first starting opening 6, second starting opening 7), the special winning opening 8, and the general winning opening 11 exceeds "0". If it exceeds "0", a winning ball request signal indicating the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when transmitting a winning ball signal, an updating process is performed in which the winning ball counter relating to the signal is decremented by "1".

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a controls external signal output control data for outputting information about a game as an external signal to an external device such as the gaming information display device 700, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid Drive control data (starting opening opening and closing solenoid driving data and big winning opening opening and closing solenoid driving data) for driving 80 B, and predetermined display symbols 20, 21, 22 and hold display devices 23, 24, 25 A data creation process of display control data (special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, special symbol suspension display data, ordinary symbol suspension display data) to be displayed is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this processing, first, port output processing for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to turn on the respective LEDs of the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25, a display device output process is performed to output a signal based on the display control data created in step S600. . Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not receive a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the process proceeds to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to a general winning opening winning ball counter used for a winning ball and updates the same.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a has been input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 8 or not. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the process proceeds to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates the winning combination. The counter value of the special winning opening defined winning counter (C) for counting the number of played balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 6a is input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the second starting opening detection sensor 7a is input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 7 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a has been input, that is, whether the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(First start port detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, the first starting opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the present first starting opening detection signal input processing is ended, and if there is a valid detection signal, “1” is added to the starting opening prize ball counter for paying out the winning balls in step S232. The first starting hole winning process is performed to turn on the first starting hole winning flag in the first starting hole winning flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S233, main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter that counts the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the present first starting opening detection signal input processing ends, and if it is determined that the first special view reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4, the step At S234, the counter value of the first special view hold number counter is updated by adding "1".

  In order to update the first special figure reservation number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol storage display device 23 in step S234, the main CPU 101a determines the special symbol storage display data indicating the number of storages in the main RAM 101c. Set in the area. Further, in step S235, the main CPU 101a sets a first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special drawing reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the first special view reservation number (U1) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a displays the jackpot judging random number indicated by the jackpot judging random number counter, the special symbol judgment random number indicated by the special symbol judgment random number counter, the reach judgment random number indicated by the reach judgment random number counter and the special figure fluctuation pattern The special figure variation pattern determination random number indicated by the determination random number counter is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. In the following, the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as "special figure determination information".

  The first special symbol hold storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special view determination information is a number in the storage unit in which no random number is stored. Are stored in order from the smallest storage unit. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a performs a first preliminary determination based on the ball entering the first starting opening 6 of the gaming ball. Here, the first prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first prior determination, the stop symbol data of the first special symbol and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern are determined based on the special view determination information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. That is, the main CPU 101a stops the first special symbol as the first prior determination before performing the jackpot determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312) and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313) described later. The symbol data and the first special figure variation pattern are determined.

  Then, in step S238, main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the first special symbol determined in the first prior determination and the first starting opening prize designation command corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation pattern to the transmission data for effect of main RAM 101c. It sets to a storage area (transmission buffer), and ends this 1st starting opening detection signal input processing.

(Second start port detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, the second starting opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second starting opening detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the second starting opening detection signal input processing ends, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S 242, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to update the starting opening prize ball counter for paying out the winning balls, updates the second starting opening winning provision counter by “1”, and updates the main A second starting opening winning process is performed to turn on the second starting opening winning flag in the second starting opening winning flag storage area of the RAM 101c. The second starting opening winning provision counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting opening 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the second starting opening 7 of the gaming ball for one auxiliary game is limited.

  At step S243, main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter that counts the second special view hold number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the present second start port detection signal input processing, and if determined that the second special view reserve number (U2) is smaller than 4, the step The process moves to S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special view hold number counter to update it. In addition, main CPU 101a, in step S244, in order to update the second special drawing reserve number (U2) displayed on second special symbol reserve display device 24, the main RAM 101c the special symbol reserve display data indicating the reserve number Set in the predetermined area of In step S245, the main CPU 101a sets a second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special view reservation number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. Thereby, the second special view reservation number (U2) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S246, the main CPU 101a displays the jackpot judging random number indicated by the jackpot judging random number counter, the special symbol judgment random number indicated by the special symbol judgment random number counter, the reach judgment random number indicated by the reach judgment random number counter and the special figure fluctuation pattern The special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number indicated by the determination random number counter is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area.

  In addition, the second special symbol suspension storage area is divided into the first storage to the fourth storage (see Fig. 11 (a)), and the special drawing determination information is a number in the storage where no random number is stored. Are stored in order from the smallest storage unit. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination based on the ball entering to the 2nd starting opening 7 in Step S247. Here, the second prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second prior determination, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol and the second special figure fluctuation pattern are determined based on the special view determination information stored in the second special symbol hold storage area. That is, the main CPU 101a performs stop symbol data of the second special symbol as a second prior determination before performing the jackpot determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312) and the special view fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313). And the second special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

  Then, in step S248, main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the second special symbol determined in the second prior determination and the second start opening prize designation command corresponding to the second special view fluctuation pattern to the transmission data for effect of main RAM 101c. It sets to a storage area (transmission buffer), and ends this 2nd starting opening detection signal input processing.

(Primary gate detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, winning gate detection signal input processing will be described using FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the present winning gate detection signal input process ends, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S252.

  In step S252, main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter that counts the common drawing holding number (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the present winning gate detection signal input processing ends, and if it is determined that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process moves to step S253.

  In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to update the counter value (G) of the common drawing reserve number counter. In addition, main CPU101a, in order to update the common drawing reservation number (G) which is indicated in normal design reservation indicatory device 25 in step S253, to the specified territory of main RAM101c set. In step S254, the main CPU 101a sets an ordinary symbol storage designation command corresponding to the common drawing reservation number (G) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the general drawing reserve number (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  The main CPU 101a determines the random number for collision judgment indicated by the random number counter for collision judgment at step S255, the random number for ordinary symbol judgment indicated by the random number counter for ordinary symbol judgment, and the random number for common pattern fluctuation pattern judgment indicated by the random number counter for common pattern fluctuation pattern judgment. Is stored in the normal symbol storage area, and the winning gate detection signal input process is terminated. Hereinafter, the hit determination random number, the normal symbol determination random number, and the common pattern change pattern determination random number will be collectively referred to as “common drawing determination information”.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage to the fourth storage (see FIG. 11C), and the common drawing determination information is a storage having a smaller number among the storages in which no random number is stored. It will be stored in order from the department. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 11D).

(Special drawing special power control processing of main control board)
Next, special drawing special power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special power processing data is loaded, the branch destination address is referenced from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302, and the special figure special processing data determination process is performed if special figure special power processing data = 0 (step S310) Move the process to), and if the special figure special power process data = 1, move the process to the special symbol variation process (step S320), and if the special figure special power process data = 2, execute the special symbol stop process (step S330) If the special figure special power process data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special power process data = 4, the process is transferred to the jackpot game end process (step S350). The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is in progress. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the main symbol storage determination process ends, and if it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step 310-2.

  At step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special view reservation number (U2) is one or more. If it is determined that the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is not one or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is one or more, the processing proceeds to step S310-3. Transfer the process.

  In step S310-3, main CPU 101a subtracts “1” from the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter and updates it, and corresponds to the second special view hold number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. The special symbol storage designation command to be set is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designating command corresponding to the current gaming state to the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area The shift processing is performed to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special view determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol storage area. Moreover, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted to the storage area (0th storage unit) that is the special symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special figure determination information stored in the zeroth storage unit is erased. As a result, the special view determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Furthermore, the special view stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special map reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. When the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special view reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S310-5.

  Main CPU 101a subtracts “1” and updates the counter value of the first special symbol holding number counter in step S310-5, and corresponds to the first special image holding number (U1) after subtraction in step S310-6. A special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designating command corresponding to the current gaming state to the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area The shift processing is performed to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special view determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol relevant storage area (the 0th storage unit) and stored in the 0th storage unit. The figure determination information is deleted. Thereby, the special view determination information used in the previous game is erased. Furthermore, the special view stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the first special drawing reservation number (U1) or the second special drawing reservation number (U2) along with the shift process of the special drawing determination information in step S310-8, specifically, the data In order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of starting opening according to the first and second special symbol hold display data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. The hold display data includes information on the type of special symbol hold display device and information on the number of special symbol hold (U1 or U2).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the second special symbol hold storage area is prioritized over the first special symbol hold storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second special figure hold number is the first special figure). Although it was decided to digest it in preference to the number of reservations, in the order in which the game balls entered the starting opening, shift the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area (first special view holding) The number and the second special drawing reserve number may be digested in the winning order), or the first special symbol hold storage area is prioritized over the second special symbol hold storage area and shifted (the first special figure hold number is the first 2) It may be made to digest prior to the number of special figure reservations.

  In step S310-4, when it is determined that the first special drawing reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1 to step S319-3, and a customer for setting a customer waiting state Perform wait state setting processing. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to the state in which the special symbol variation display and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement that the normal symbol variation display and the auxiliary game are not executed is included in the requirement May be

  As the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines in step S319-1 whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. When the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and the customer waiting state determination in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area If the flag "01H" is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area so that the customer waiting state is not repeatedly and set.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process. As a result, the effect control board 102 is notified that it is in the customer waiting state.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot determination process based on the data shifted in step S310-8 and newly stored in the zeroth storage unit.

(Jumping judgment processing of main control board)
Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol at this time is the variation display of the first special symbol based on the subtraction of the first special drawing reservation number (U1).

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is a variable display of the first special symbol, it selects the first special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-2. On the other hand, when determining that it is not the first starting opening 6 (the second starting opening 7) in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a selects the second special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that it is a high probability gaming state with respect to the current jackpot winning probability.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, then in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects one of the tables selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. The first high probability jackpot determination table or the second high probability jackpot determination table is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the first low probability is selected from the tables selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. The jackpot determination table for the jackpot or the jackpot determination table for the second low probability is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a selects the jackpot determination random number shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit, as the “high probability big hit selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. The "judgment table" or the "low probability jackpot judgment table" is collated to determine whether it is "big hit" or "loss", and the present jackpot determination process is ended.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit". Here, if it is determined that "big hit", the main CPU 101a selects the special symbol determination table for the big hit in step S312-4, and if it is not determined as "big hit", the step is performed. The process moves to S312-2.

  The main CPU 101a performs reach determination in step S312-2. Specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the zeroth storage unit is collated with the reach determination table.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether the result of the reach determination in step S312-2 is "reach". If it is determined that "reach" is performed, the process proceeds to step S312-5, and a special symbol determination table for reach with loss is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined that "not reachable", that is, it is determined that "no reach", the process proceeds to step S312-6 to select a special symbol determination table for no reach losing.

  In step S312-7, main CPU 101a confirms the starting opening related to the special symbol storage determination processing based on the flag turned on in the starting opening winning flag storage area (first starting opening 6 or second starting opening 7) In step S312-8, based on the type of starting opening, either the special symbol determination table for the first starting opening or the special symbol determination table for the second starting opening is selected.

  In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a performs special symbol determination in which the random symbol value for special symbol determination shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is collated with the selected special symbol determination table.

  Then, in step S312-10, a rendering symbol designating command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-9, and the determined rendering symbol designating command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, main CPU 101a, in step S312-11, based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol stop symbol data"), that is, the special symbol Is determined, and the determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  The special figure stop symbol data determined determines the "big hit special symbol" or the like in the special symbol stop process of Fig. 24 when determining the special pattern change pattern in the special figure change pattern determination process of Fig. 22 as described later. In this case, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game processing of FIG.

  In step S312-12, the main CPU 101a collates the special figure stop symbol data in the gaming condition data determination table to set the gaming condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks the high probability flag storage area, and selects a gaming condition data determination table according to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special pattern stop symbol data is collated with the selected gaming condition data determination table to determine gaming condition data, which is set in the gaming condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  As described above, when the special symbol determination process is completed, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19, and performs the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment process, based on the result of the big hit judgment, the result of the special symbol judgment and the result of the reach judgment, the special drawing fluctuation pattern including the information about special drawing fluctuation time and the effect type of fluctuation effect mentioned later decide.

(Special pattern change pattern judgment processing of main control board)
The special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described using FIG. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the ON / OFF of the time saving flag, which will be described later, to determine the current gaming state (high probability gaming state / low probability gaming state, and Check the time saving game state / non-time saving game state), and select the special view fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the game state.

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a confirms the special view stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c, and determines the special view fluctuation pattern determination table based on the special view stop symbol data. This is because in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table divided according to the gaming state is further divided by the special figure stop symbol data.

  In addition, when the special figure stop symbol data is "19" or "29", that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss without reach, the number of special figure reservations according to this special figure fluctuation pattern determination is further (U1 or The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined based on U2). This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table related to the no reach loss is also divided by the number of special figure reservations.

  When the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination in step S313-3. Specifically, the special drawing fluctuation pattern determination random number is collated with the determined special drawing fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the special drawing fluctuation pattern.

  When the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern, it returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19 and transmits the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern in step S310-9 for transmission of the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.

  Thereby, the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 receives the gaming state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, thereby displaying the special symbol fluctuation display. Recognizes that the game is to be started, and determines a change effect pattern associated with the contents of the change effect based on the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the special figure change pattern specification command. It is to be noted that the effect control board 102 may recognize that the variation display of the special symbol is started by receiving the rendering symbol designation command and / or the special view variation pattern designation command. In addition, the game state specification command may be transmitted after transmission of the rendering symbol specification command or the special figure variation pattern specification command.

  Then, at step S310-10, main CPU 101a sets the special game fluctuation time (see FIGS. 8 and 9) associated with the special drawing fluctuation pattern to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data in order to perform variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of special symbol display device to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

  In step S310-12, main CPU 101a sets flag "00H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area to end the customer waiting state, and step S310- At 13, special figure special power processing data = 1 is set, and this special symbol storage determination processing is ended.

(Special symbol variation processing of main control board)
Next, special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is ended, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation time set in step S310-10 has passed (special game timer Determine whether counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is not finished, the special symbol variation process is finished, and the next subroutine is executed.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, in order to convey to the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated, the special figure variation stop designation command is produced Set in the transmission data storage area for

  The main CPU 101a, based on the special figure stop symbol data set in the above step S312-11, in step S320-3, to display the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 in a stop manner, the special view stop display data Set As a result, the player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special power processing data in step S320-5, turns off the first starting opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag in step S320-6, and changes the special symbol variation processing. Finish.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, at step S330-1, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends, in other words, the special view stop time set in the special game timer counter at step S320-4 has elapsed It is determined whether it has been done. As a result, when it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is not ended, the present special symbol stop processing is ended, and when it is judged that the stop display of the special symbol is ended, the processing is shifted to step S330-2.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether the time saving flag is ON (set) in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area, it means that the time saving game is currently in progress. If the time saving flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the time saving flag is OFF in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7.

  In step S330-3, main CPU 101a indicates the remaining count of the time saving gaming state remaining count counter indicating the remaining count of variation display of special symbols due to the time saving gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as "time saving gaming state remaining count") The calculated value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "" is stored as the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a sets a time saving number specifying command corresponding to the time saving gaming state remaining number (J) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the time saving gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for causing the image display device 14 to display time shortening remaining number information (also referred to as remaining time shortening number information) is performed.

  At step S330-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0. If the time saving gaming state remaining number of times (J) = 0, the processing is transferred to step S330-6, and if the time saving gaming state remaining number of times (J) is not 0, the processing is transferred to step S330-7.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a turns off (clears) the time saving flag stored in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. In addition, that the time saving game state remaining number of times (J) becomes “0” means that the variation display of the special symbol is possible number of times (Ja) in the time reduction gaming state, and the variation display of the special symbol by the “time saving” state Means to end.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether the high probability flag is ON (set) in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that it is currently in the high probability gaming state. If the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-8. If the flag is turned off in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-12. Move.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a is a counter value of the high probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number (X: hereinafter referred to as “high probability gaming state remaining number of times”) of variation display of special symbols due to high probability gaming state The calculated value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from is stored as a new high probability game state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a sets a high probability number designation command corresponding to the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the high probability gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for causing the image display device 14 to display high probability remaining number information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number information) is performed.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the processing moves to step S330-11, and if the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the processing moves to step S330-12.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a turns off the high probability flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. It should be noted that that the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) becomes "0" means that the variable display of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state can be executed number of times (Xa), the special symbol by the "high probability" state Means the end of the variable display of.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command indicating the game state in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the current game state is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination according to the special symbol stop process is "jackpot". Specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the big hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). Do. Here, when it is not determined that the jackpot special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-14, and when it is determined that the jackpot special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-15.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the special figure special power process data, and performs a process to shift the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special power process data, and in step S330-16, the game condition flag storage area (time saving flag storage area and high probability flag storage area), high probability gaming state The remaining fluctuation number counter and the remaining fluctuation number counter of the time saving gaming state are reset (cleared). That is, it is controlled to the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special view stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area as a big hit game opening process. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time according to the special view stop symbol data to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(The jackpot game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether an opening is currently in progress. The opening referred to here is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether the special game timer counter = 0 or not, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, when the set opening time has not elapsed, the present jackpot game processing is ended, the next subroutine is executed, and when the opening time has elapsed, the processing is shifted to step S340-3. .

  At step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game start processing. Specifically, according to the special view stop symbol data, it is confirmed which jackpot it is, and while selecting the big winning a prize opening opening and closing control table according to the kind of jackpot, it sets to the specified territory of main RAM101c. Specifically, in accordance with the special view stop symbol data, the long winning game winning opening opening / closing control table or the short hitting gaming high winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R) stored in the number-of-round-games storage area and stores it. In addition, one round game is performed at the time of step S340-3. Since it is not executed, the main CPU 101a stores "1" in the number-of-round-games storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening open process. Specifically, the value stored in the special power operation number storage area (the special power operation number (K) is added with “1” and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a energizes the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B to In order to open the special winning opening 8, the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, where the main CPU 101a determines the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3. Referring to the special game timer counter, the opening time of the special winning opening 8 (operating time of the special winning opening controller 80) is set based on the round number (R) and the special power operating number (K). The gaming timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs round designation command transmission determination processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command indicating the current number of round games specified by the stored value of the number-of-round-games storage area is used. Set in the transmission data storage area for effects. This is for transmitting information to the effect that the round game starts to the effect control board 102. For example, at the first opening of the first round game of the long per game, “1” is set in the number-of-round game count storage area and “1” is set in the special power operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the special power operation number storage area, the present jackpot game processing is ended without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case of K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, for example, “ROUND 1” is displayed on the image display device 14 for effect.

  At step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether it is currently in the process of ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to a period from the end of all preset round games (when the last opening of the big winning opening 8 is ended) to the end of the main hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, and it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not in progress, step S340-7. Transfer the process to

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the special winning opening control device 80 is in operation. When the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning opening 8 is open, in step S340-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the "opening completion condition" for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. Do. As this "opening end condition", that the counter value of the special winning opening specified winning counter has reached the specified number (for example 9) in round game, or that the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0 ) Has been adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is established, the process proceeds to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not established, the present jackpot game processing is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. The special winning opening closing process sets the energization stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the special winning opening determined in step 340-3 above. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and the special electric power operating number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set to the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  At step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special power operating number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the special winning opening prescribed winning counter is the prescribed number ( For example, the process ends on the condition that the number 9) is reached, so it is determined whether such a condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that one round game is ended, the processing is shifted to step S340-12, and when it is determined that one round is not ended, the present jackpot game processing is ended.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the special winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether or not a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, when the closing time has not elapsed, the present jackpot game processing is ended, and when the closing time has elapsed, the processing is shifted to step S340-4.

  At step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special power operating number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the special winning opening defined winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot game is over, that is, the value stored in the number-of-round games storage area (the round number (R) is the number of round games played in the jackpot game If the main CPU 101a determines “Yes”, it shifts the process to step S340-15, and if it determines “No”, it shifts the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a updates and stores the current round number (R) stored in the number-of-round-games storage area by adding “1”.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  At step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special view stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and the ending specification command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time according to the type of jackpot to the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-18, and the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the jackpot is not determined, the jackpot game processing is ended.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special view special power process data, and shifts the process to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG.

(The jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded gaming condition data against the gaming condition determination table, and determines whether or not the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S350-5, and if it is determined that the high probability flag is turned on, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-3. While turning on (01H), high probability gaming state setting processing is performed to set the number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a sets a high probability number designation command corresponding to the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the high probability gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for causing the image display device 14 to display high probability remaining number information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number information) is performed.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded gaming condition data with the gaming condition determination table, and determines whether or not the short timer flag is turned on in the short timer flag storage area. When the main CPU 101a determines that the time saving flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S350-8, and when it is determined that the time saving flag is turned on, the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-6. The time saving game state setting process is performed to set the number of executable times (Ja) to the time saving game state remaining number counter.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 101a sets a time reduction designating command corresponding to the time saving game remaining count (J) set in the time saving gaming state remaining count counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the time saving gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for causing the image display device 14 to display time shortening remaining number information (also referred to as remaining time shortening number information) is performed.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming conditions, sets a gaming state designating command indicating the current state of gaming conditions in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S350-9, the special 0 is set to the figure special power process data, and the process moves to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a command indicating the number of remaining time game state (J) is transmitted as the time reduction number designation command, but it may be a command indicating the number of variable displays executed in the time reduction game state. In addition, although a command indicating the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) is transmitted as the high probability number designation command, it may be a command indicating the number of fluctuation displays executed in the high probability gaming state.

  Also, although the time reduction command and high probability number specification command are transmitted to the effect control board 102 separately from the game state specification command, the time reduction game state remaining number (J) and the high probability game state remaining number ( It is also possible to transmit X to the effect control board 102 by including it in the game state specification command. Further, the time reduction designation command or the high probability number designation command may not be transmitted to the effect control board 102.

(General control control processing of main control board)
The common drawing and common control processing will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 101a first loads the value of the data processing routine data in step S401, and refers to the branch destination address from the data processing routine data loaded in step S402, and For example, the normal symbol storage determination process including the normal symbol determination whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (open the second starting opening 7) based on the common drawing determination information acquired based on the winning on the winning gate 10 The process proceeds to (step S410), and if the ordinary figure generalization process data = 1, the process is performed for the normal symbol variation process (step S420) when the normal symbol display device 22 is varying based on the normal symbol determination. If it is transferred, the normal drawing general processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the normal symbol stopping process (step S430) when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped, and the general drawing common processing process Data = if 3 controls the opening and closing of the second start hole 7 (actuating the second start hole control device 70) and moves the process to the auxiliary game process (step S440).

(Normal symbol memory judgment processing of main control board)
Normal symbol storage determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, and if it is determined that the variation display is in progress, the normal symbol storage determination process is ended, and the variation display is in progress. If it is determined that there is not, the process moves to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the common drawing reservation number counter that counts the common drawing reservation number (G) is 1 or more. In the case where the common drawing reservation number (G) is “0”, the variation display of the normal symbol is not performed, so the normal symbol variation processing is ended.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the common drawing reserve number (G) is “1” or more, in step S410-3, from the counter value (G) of the normal symbol reserve number counter Subtract 1 "and update, set a new common drawing reservation number (G), and transmit the normal symbol memory specification command corresponding to the common drawing reservation number (G) after subtraction in step S410-4 Set in the data storage area. As a result, the general drawing reserve number (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a performs shift processing of common drawing determination information stored in the normal symbol storage area. Specifically, the common drawing determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit of the immediately preceding number. At this time, the common drawing determination information stored in the immediately preceding storage unit is written to a predetermined processing area and erased from the normal symbol storage area. Here, in order to change the display contents of the normal symbol hold display device 25 in accordance with the shift of the common view determination information, specifically, the normal symbol hold display data for displaying the current number of general view hold (G) Are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs a collision determination, that is, a determination of a collision determination random number stored in the normal symbol storage area. Specifically, main CPU 101a checks whether or not the random number for collision determination shifted in step S410-5 and stored in the 0th storage unit against the collision determination table for a normal symbol stored in main ROM 101b. Make a decision on In the present embodiment, since the hit determination table is associated with the state (non-time game state / time short game state) of starting opening winning a prize ease (refer to FIG. 10A), the time saving flag storage area Is selected, and the hit determination table for the normal symbol according to the current state of the starting opening winning a prize is selected.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a performs the regular symbol determination by checking the regular symbol determination random number shifted in step S410-5 and stored in the zero storage unit with the regular symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 101b. As described above, since this normal symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (hit / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the normal symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is select.

  Then, in step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data (hereinafter referred to as "normal stop symbol data") related to the normal symbol based on the result of the normal symbol determination, that is, determines the type of the normal symbol, The determined common drawing stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, and in step S410-9, a normal rendering symbol specification command corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol data is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the regular drawing stop data is notified to the effect control board 102.

  When determining whether the determined common drawing stop symbol data is a common drawing stop pattern in FIG. 30 when determining the common drawing fluctuation pattern in the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination, when determining whether or not it is a hit normal symbol in the normal symbol stop processing in FIG. Is also used to determine the opening and closing mode of the second starting port 7.

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a performs common drawing fluctuation pattern determination. Specifically, since the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table for performing the common drawing fluctuation pattern judgment is classified according to the state of starting opening winning a prize ease, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time saving flag storage area, A common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table according to the current state of the starting opening winning a prize is selected. Then, the main CPU 101a checks the random number for common drawing variation pattern determination shifted in step S410-5 and stored in the 0th storage unit against the selected common drawing variation pattern judgment table and sets the common drawing variation pattern (general drawing Determine the fluctuation time).

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets a common drawing variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined common drawing variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and by receiving this command, the effect control board 102 can recognize that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, and can execute the roulette effect described later.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets a common drawing fluctuation time corresponding to the determined common drawing fluctuation pattern to the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-13, main CPU 101a sets normal symbol variation display data to perform normal symbol variation display in normal symbol display device 22. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, then in step S410-14. The common game stop symbol data is collated with the auxiliary game reference data determination table to determine the auxiliary game reference data, and is set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 101a sets “1” to the common-use generalization processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation processing. The data for normal symbol variation display includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

(Normal pattern change processing of main control board)
Next, normal symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 101a ends the variation display of the normal symbol, or in other words, whether or not the general drawing variation time set in step S410-12 has elapsed (the auxiliary gaming timer counter ? = 0? As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not ended, the normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S420-2, main CPU 101a sets a normal effect design stop designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S420-3, based on the common view stop symbol data set in step S410-8. Data for ordinary drawing stop display for stopping display on the symbol display device 22 is set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the normal symbol lottery. At step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) to the auxiliary gaming counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the data for general-purpose general-purpose processing, and ends the normal symbol change processing.

(Normal pattern stop processing of main control board)
Next, normal symbol stop processing will be described using FIG. In step S430-1, main CPU 101a first determines whether the stop display of the normal symbol ends, in other words, whether the normal symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter in step S420-4 has elapsed It is determined whether or not (auxiliary gaming timer counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the stop display of the normal symbol is not ended, the normal symbol stop processing is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the normal symbol is finished, the main CPU 101a determines in step S430-2 whether or not the determination of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop processing is “hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the common drawing stop symbol data stored in the common drawing stop symbol data storage area relates to a hit normal symbol. Here, when it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, the processing is transferred to step S430-4, and when it is not determined that the hit is a normal symbol, the processing is transferred to step S430-3.

  At step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the common-use general processing data. Then, in step S430-5, main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command according to the common drawing stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area of main RAM 101c, and according to the common drawing stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. An auxiliary game opening process of setting the opening time to the auxiliary game timer counter is performed. The auxiliary game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is ended, the normal symbol stop process is ended.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the data for general-purpose fueling process, and ends the normal symbol stopping process.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
The auxiliary game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S440-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the opening is currently in progress. If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S440-2. If it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S440-5.

  In step S440-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, when the opening time has not passed, the present auxiliary game processing is ended, and when the opening time has passed, the processing shifts to step S440-3.

  At step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects the second start opening / closing control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and sets it to the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a performs a second start opening process. In the second start opening process, first, the value stored in the common power operation number storage area (general power operation number (D) is stored by adding “1”. Then, the normal movable piece 70A is operated. Data for the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set, and the second start port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3 is referred to based on the current general The opening time of the second starting opening 7 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter.

  At step S440-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is in the process of ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to the period from the end of the last opening of the second starting opening 7 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, when the main CPU 101a determines that the process is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S440-12. When the main CPU 101a determines that the process is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S440-6.

  At step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second starting port 7 is open. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port 7 is open, whether or not the “open end condition” for ending the open of the second start port 7 is satisfied in step S440-7. Determine As this "opening end condition", the counter value of the starting opening specified winning counter has reached the specified (maximum) number (for example 10) or that one opening time of the second starting port 7 has elapsed ( Auxiliary gaming timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, when the main CPU 101a determines that the "opening completion condition" is satisfied, the processing proceeds to step S440-8, and when it is determined that the "opening completion condition" is not satisfied, the main game processing is ended. .

  At step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs second start port closing processing. In the second start opening closing process, the energization stop data of the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B is set to close the second start opening 7, and the second start opening opening / closing control table set in step S440-3. Referring to, the closing time of the second start port 7 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current power operating number (D). As a result, the second start port 7 is closed.

  In step S440-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied and the auxiliary game is ended. The auxiliary game end condition means that the common use operating number (D) is the number of times of opening of the second starting opening 7 set in advance, or the counter value of the second starting opening specified winning counter is the maximum number (for example 10) It has reached). Then, when the main CPU 101a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is established, the process proceeds to step S440-10, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not established, the present auxiliary game process is ended. .

  In step S440-10, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game end process of setting “0” in the power operating number storage area and setting “0” in the second starting opening winning provision counter. That is, the common charge operating number storage area and the second starting opening specified winning counter are cleared.

  In step S440-11, the main CPU 101a sets an ending specification command according to the common drawing stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect, and an ending time according to the common drawing stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set to the auxiliary game timer counter.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-6 that the second starting port 7 is not open, in step S440-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether the closing time set in step S440-8 has elapsed. Do. The closing time is also determined based on whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, as in the opening time. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game processing, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S440-4.

  In step S440-12, main CPU 101a determines whether the set ending time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S440-14, and the ending time elapses. If it is determined that the game is not being performed, the auxiliary game process is ended.

  At step S440-14, the main CPU 101a sets the program general processing process data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game process.

(Control processing of effect control board)
Next, control processing executed by the sub CPU 102 a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

(Main processing of effect control board)
First, the main processing of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. This main processing is executed when the power is supplied from the power supply substrate 107 to the sub CPU 102a, and a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a.

  First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102 b and initialization processing is performed to initialize the sub RAM 102 c in which flags, commands, etc. are stored.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display mode determination random number, effect pattern stop display pattern determination random number, prefetch zone effect scenario determination random number, final number determination random number, precursor effect scenario determination random number, variation effect pattern, which will be described later. The effect random number updating process is performed to update the effect random number which is made of the determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like and is used for the determination for controlling the effect.

  A random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of the various random numbers that make up the effect random number. In the process of updating the effect random number, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the effect random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, when updating the random number, when the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random numbers from being completely synchronized, the maximum values of the various random number ranges are not made different, and different initial value random numbers are provided for the various effect random numbers. When updating the random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the respective random number values may be newly updated from the initial value random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control board)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control board 102.

  First, in step S1100, sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of sub CPU 102a in the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing of updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  When the effect control board 102 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interruption process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, a process of analyzing the command received in the command analysis process is performed.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs customer waiting effect control processing for controlling customer waiting effects performed in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol or the special game (big hit game) is not performed.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a checks an input signal from the effect button detection switch 18a or the selection button detection switch 19a, and executes an operation effect or the like based on an operation on the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A. Perform effect input control processing. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a is able to execute the game information relating to the game to be notified (displayed) in the current game state (right-handed information prompting the game ball to be fired to the right area of the game area 2A, probability variation game state) The high probability remaining number information which is the remaining number of the variable display which becomes, the time remaining number information which is the remaining number of the variable display which can be executed in the low probability time short game state, the jackpot which occurred while the time short game state continues A game information display control process is performed to display on the image display device 14 the jackpot number of times information which is the number of times, left hitting information prompting to shoot the game ball in the left area of the game area 2A, etc.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing to transmit various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing of effect control board)
The command analysis process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command, and determines whether a command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, it ends this command analysis, and if it determines that the command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if it is not determined to be a customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a performs customer waiting effect preparation processing, and ends this command analysis processing. In the customer waiting effect preparation process, the sub CPU 102a turns on the customer waiting effect waiting flag in the customer waiting effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and waits for the customer waiting effect to start (the customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 30 seconds) is set to the customer waiting effect timer counter.

  In addition, in the customer waiting effect control process of step S1400, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect waiting time set in the customer waiting effect timer counter has elapsed, and determines that the customer waiting effect waiting time has elapsed Then, the customer waiting effect waiting flag is turned off and the customer waiting effect executing flag is turned on, and a customer waiting effect control command indicating the effect information of the customer waiting effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  Thus, the customer waiting effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 wait for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds). The presentation is repeatedly performed. In addition, execution and standby of customer waiting effect are ended based on the fact that the game state specification command, the special symbol specification command, the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command and the like are transmitted from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step S1305, and if it is not determined to be a special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of special drawing reservations stored in the presentation information storage area of the sub RAM 102c described later according to the special symbol storage specification command, or various items stored in the presentation information storage area A hold information update process is performed to shift the effect information or to cause the image display device 14 to display the hold icons corresponding to the number of the special map hold number, and the command analysis process is ended. The pending information update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a starting opening winning combination designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting opening prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if it is determined that the command is not the starting opening prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1308.

  The sub CPU 102a performs so-called advance notice such as advance reading zone effect (continuous advance notice effect) and pending icon change notice etc. which are executed over one or a plurality of special symbols (variable effect) based on the prior determination result in step S1307. The processing at the time of starting opening winning is performed to perform the determination on (representation) and the setting of the information on the advance notice (rectification), and the command analysis processing is ended. The process of starting opening winning will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

  In addition, as a continuous advance notice effect, a countdown advance notice effect in which the image display device 14 performs countdown display for each change effect for the change effect of the advance object, an advance notice for each change effect for the change effect of the advance object Continuous cut-in notice effect that performs cut-in display of image, continuous step-up notice effect that performs step-up display of notice image on the image display device 14 for each change effect for the change effect of the notice object A chance eye preview effect or the like may be executed to stop and display the rendering symbols (rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3) in an array having predetermined regularity for each of the fluctuation effects of.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if it is not determined to be a gaming state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1309, sub CPU102a performs a game state update process for updating the game state stored in the predetermined storage area of sub RAM 102c to the game state specified by the game state specification command, and changes in step S1310 An effect mode setting process for setting any of a plurality of effect modes relating to execution of effects is performed, and this command analysis process is ended. The effect mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, with the effect mode, in the present embodiment, the classification mode (category of the change effect performed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 corresponding to the change display of the special symbol executed based on the result of the big hit determination , And in the present embodiment, three types of effect modes of effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C are provided.

  The effect mode A is a normal effect mode representing that the game state is disadvantageous to the player set corresponding to the normal gaming state which is the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state. The effect mode B is an effect mode representing that the gaming state is most advantageous to the player set corresponding to the probability variation gaming state which is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The effect mode C is an effect mode representing a second advantageous game state set corresponding to the low probability time short game state which is the low probability gaming state and the time saving game state.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a rendering symbol designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a rendering symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step S1312, and if it is determined that the command is not a rendering symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step S1313.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a is stopped on the predetermined effective line, that is, the effect pattern to be displayed on the image display device 14 as a result of the change effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during the change display of the special symbol. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process is performed to determine the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1313, sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. If sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1314, and if it is not a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1318. .

  In step S 1314, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not to start prefetch zone effect, which is a type of preview advance notice (rendering) based on the prior determination result, and performs a process to start prefetch zone effect start determination Do the processing. The prefetch zone effect start determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a performs a fluctuation effect pattern determination process for determining a fluctuation effect pattern that is an effect content (aspect) of a fluctuation effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during fluctuation display of a special symbol. The change effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S 1316, the sub CPU 102 a performs an operation effect to be executed in addition to whether or not to execute the operation effect during the fluctuation effect based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process or the fluctuation effect pattern determined in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process. An operation effect determination process is performed to determine the type and the like. The operation effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to change the hold icon displayed on the image display device 14 or the changing icon (hereinafter simply referred to as "icon" when pointing to both the hold icon and the changing icon). The icon change notice determination process is performed, and this command analysis process is ended. The icon change advance notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1318, sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation stop designation command. If sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1319. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop designation command is not present, the process proceeds to step S1321. .

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a performs performance symbol fluctuation stop processing for setting a production symbol stop control command indicating the termination of the fluctuation production by performing stop display of the production symbol in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The effect symbol variation stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize the end of the fluctuation effect by receiving the effect symbol stop control command, and cause the stop display of the effect pattern to be performed to end the fluctuation effect.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs a pre-reading zone effect end process for ending the pre-reading zone effect, triggered by the end of the variation display of the special symbol, and ends the command analysis process. The pre-reading zone effect end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a high probability frequency designation command or a time reduction frequency designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the high probability frequency designation command or the time reduction designation command, it transfers the process to step S1322 and determines that it is not the high probability frequency designation command or the time reduction designation command. Then, the process moves to step S1323.

  In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a updates the high probability remaining number which is the remaining number of fluctuation display (variation effect) which can be executed in the probability variation gaming state based on the received high probability number designation command, or designates the received time number Based on the command, a remaining number updating process is performed to update the number of short remaining times, which is the remaining number of the variable display (variation effect) that can be executed in the low probability time short game state, and the command analysis process is ended.

  In step S1323, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command, the process proceeds to step S1324. If it is determined that the jackpot game opening designation command is not present, the process proceeds to step S1326.

  In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a determines an opening effect pattern which is an effect mode of the opening effect to be performed during the opening of the big hit game, and sets an opening effect pattern specification command corresponding to the determined opening effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Perform an opening effect pattern determination process.

  The opening effect pattern specification command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the opening effect of the big hit game.

  In step S1325, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of consecutive villas updating, which is the number of jackpot games generated while the short time gaming state (including the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state) continues. To complete this command analysis process.

  Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state, "1" is set to the number of consecutive loafers, and the jackpot game is in the short time gaming state (including the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state) When executed, processing is performed to add "1" to the number of consecutive units.

  In step S1326, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1327, and if it is determined that there is no round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1328.

  In step S1327, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern which is an aspect of a round effect to be performed during a big hit game round, and sets a round effect pattern specification command corresponding to the determined round effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. A round effect pattern determination process is performed, and this command analysis process is ended. The round effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute a round effect of the big hit game.

  In step S1328, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game ending designation command (a jackpot game ending designation command). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game ending designation command, the process proceeds to step S1329. If it is determined that the command is not a jackpot gaming ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1329, the sub CPU 102a determines an ending effect pattern that is an effect aspect of the ending effect to be performed during the big hit game ending, and sets an ending effect pattern specification command corresponding to the determined ending effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. A jackpot game ending effect pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process ends. The ending effect pattern specification command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the ending effect of the big hit game.

(Pending control information update process of effect control board)
The pending information update processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1305-1, sub CPU102a confirms the current number of special drawing reservations stored in the effect information suspension storage area of sub RAM 102c, and in step S1305-2, in response to the special symbol storage specification command, the first special The figure holding number (U1) or the second special drawing holding number (U2) is updated.

  In the effect information holding storage area, as shown in FIG. 49A, the first special drawing holding count storage area where the first special drawing holding count (U1) is stored and the second special drawing holding count (U2) A second special drawing reserve number storage area to be stored, a first effect information storage area for storing effect information relating to pre-reading advance notice (rendering) based on the result of the first prior determination, and a result of the second prior determination The second effect information suspension storage area in which the effect information related to the advance notice (rendering) based on is stored, and the effect information in which the first effect information suspension storage area or the second effect information suspension storage area is shifted Information is configured with the storage area.

  The first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, like the first special view hold storage area and the second special view hold storage area of the main RAM 101c. It is done. In addition, the effect information corresponding storage area corresponds to the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the special symbol currently being performed, and is a storage area common to the first effect information holding storage area and the second effect information holding storage area Therefore, for convenience, the 0th storage unit is used.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (b), each storage unit has, as a storage area for effect information relating to preview advance notice (production), a starting opening winning combination designation command area where a starting opening winning combination designation command is stored, and a prefetching zone to be described later Pre-Reading Zone Representing a Scenario for Reproduction Zone Pre-Reading Zone Reproduction Scenario Data for Storing Scenario Data, a Prophetic Reproduction Scenario Region for Reprecating Reproduction Effect Scenario Data for Representing a Scenario for Prophetic Reproduction to be Described Below An icon display mode scenario area storing icon display mode scenario data.

  In step S1305-3, sub CPU 102a determines whether the number of reserved special views (U1, U2) has decreased, and when it is determined that the number of reserved special views has decreased, transfers processing to step S1305-4. If it is determined that the number of to-be- reserved special map reservations has not decreased, the process proceeds to step S1305-8, assuming that the number of to-be- reserved special drawings has increased.

  In step S1305-4, the sub CPU 102a stores various types of storage information of the effect information hold storage area corresponding to the type of the reduced number of special view hold numbers (starting ports) in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Shift the presentation information of.

  Specifically, the effect information (data) stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit. For example, various types of effect information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information suspension storage area are shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information suspension storage area. In addition, the effect information stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information pending storage area is shared with the first effect information pending storage area and the second effect information pending storage area. Shift to the As a result, the effect information stored in the storage area is deleted.

  In step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a performs a pending icon shift control command (first pending display shift control command or second pending display shift control command) indicating the type of the reduced number of special views pending (starting opening) in the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer.

  The pending icon shift control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon shift control command, the image control board 105 performs a shift process of shifting the hold icon associated with the starting opening indicated by the received hold icon shift control command toward the fluctuating icon display area described later.

  In step S1305-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data (details will be described later) stored in the effect information suspension storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the icon already displayed is the icon for suspension to be performed If it is determined whether or not there is an icon for changing the display mode (for performing a pending icon change advance notice) in accordance with the shift (execution of change effect), it is determined that there is an icon for changing the display mode, step S1305- If it is determined that the process shifts to 7 and there is no icon for changing the display mode, this pending information update process is ended.

  In step S1305-7, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, an icon change control command indicating the contents of change according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display mode scenario data related to the icon whose display mode is changed. Here, the “change contents according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display mode scenario data” includes an icon of an object whose display mode is to be changed and a display mode to be changed.

  The icon change control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When receiving the icon shift control command, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of the icon according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received icon change control command together with the shift of the hold icon related to the hold icon shift process.

  In step S1305-8, the sub CPU 102a adds the suspension icon based on the increase in the number of special map reservations, and adds the suspension icon addition control command indicating the type of the increased number of special diagrams reservations (starting opening) to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set and complete this pending information update process.

  The pending icon addition control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon addition control command, the image control board 105 additionally displays a hold icon corresponding to the starting opening indicated by the received hold addition control command.

(Pre-reading zone effect, icon display, explanation of icon display area)
Before describing the starting opening winning process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, first, pre-reading zone effect performed on the basis of the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning specifying command and the like, pending icon display, fluctuating icon display and the like will be described. Keep it.

(Pre-reading zone effect)
First, the prefetch zone effect will be described. The pre-reading zone effect implies that the expectation (expected value) of winning the jackpot is high over one or more fluctuation effects (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) (performing execution of the special game) Pre-read advance notice effect, and in this embodiment, it can be executed in effect mode A set in the normal gaming state, and is performed based on the pre-judgment result indicated by the start opening winning combination designation command.

  While the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, a zone background image dedicated to pre-reading zone effect is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 (there is a portion not shown), and the zone BGM exclusively for pre-reading zone effect is voice output A zone illumination dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect is executed in the effect illumination device 16, which is output from the device 15. The zone background image, the zone BGM, and the zone illumination can be collectively referred to as zone effect.

  In addition, a zone turning effect is provided as an effect associated with the pre-reading zone effect. Zone turning effect is effect to tell whether or not pre-reading zone effect is executed, and special effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol") dedicated to zone turning effect in fluctuation display and stop display of the effect design. It is done using. In the present embodiment, the zone turning effect is performed using a special symbol, but it is not a dedicated effect pattern for zone turning effect, but can be performed using a special effect pattern different from usual. In addition, it is also possible to stop and display the chance eyes (combination of predetermined effect symbols) with the normal effect symbols. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform zone turning effects using other effect images (characters etc.) instead of the effect pattern, and other effect devices that are not the image display device 14 (for example, the voice output device 15 or effects It is also possible to perform the effect of the predetermined mode on the lighting device 16 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the types of zone turning effects, zone turning success effects and zone turning failure effects are provided. The zone-turn success effect includes an effect for asking whether or not a pre-reading zone effect is to be performed, and an effect for notifying that a pre-reading zone effect is to be performed after the effect. In the zone turning success effect, it is informed that the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed by stopping display or temporarily stopping a plurality of special symbols set in advance and aligning all of the special symbols set in advance. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is executed from the start of the variation display of the effect design (including the re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect) which is started after the zone turning success effect is executed.

  On the other hand, the zone turning failure rendition is constituted by rendition whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed, and an effect notifying that the pre-reading zone effect after the effect is not executed. In the zone turning failure effect, only a part of the plurality of special symbols set in advance is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the pre-reading zone effect is not performed because all the predetermined special symbols are not aligned. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is not performed in the variable display (including the re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect) of the effect design started after the zone turning failure effect is executed. However, in the variation display of the effect pattern (including the re-variation display in the pseudo series effect) started after the zone turning failure effect is executed, it is possible for the zone turning success effect to be executed, in this case, The pre-reading zone effect is executed from the start time of the fluctuation display (including the re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect) of the effect design that is started after the zone turning success effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as a special symbol used for zone turning effect, a special symbol (referred to as a “prefetched symbol”) including the characters “pre-read”, a special symbol (“zones”) is included. The symbol ") and the special symbol including the character" Push "(referred to as" Push "symbol) are set. A zone turning effect in which all special symbols of these "pre-reading" symbols, "zone" symbols and "piercing" symbols are stopped and displayed is "zone turning success effect", and these "pre-reading" symbols, "zone" symbols And the zone turning effect in which a part of the special symbols of the "Push" symbol is stopped and displayed is "Zone turning failure effect". The zone turning failure effect is a zone turning failure effect 1 in which the "pre-reading" symbol and the "zone" symbol are stopped and displayed as a part of special symbols, and a zone in which only the "pre-reading" symbol is stopped and displayed as a part of special symbols. It consists of a misstep production 2.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the special symbols are stopped one by one. For example, in the zone turn success direction, the "pre-reading" symbol is stopped first, then the "zone" symbol is stopped, and finally it is asked whether the "rush" symbol stops while decelerating or not. All special symbols are aligned by stopping the symbol at a preset stop position. And between this "pre-reading" symbol stops first, and until "stop" symbol stops at last constitutes an effect whether pre-reading zone effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the zone turning failure effect, for example, the "pre-read" symbol first stops, then the "zone" symbol stops, and finally it is asked whether the "rush" symbol stops while decelerating or not Slipping past a preset stop position results in alignment of only some special symbols. And from this "pre-reading" symbol stops to the time until the "plunging" symbol slips, the effect of whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed is configured.

  In the present embodiment, as the "all special symbols are aligned" mode, "prefetched" symbols, "zone" symbols and "rush" symbols gradually stop, but all these special symbols are aligned at the same time, In other words, it is also possible to make all the special symbols coincide with each other without performing the effect of whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed.

(Display icon)
Next, the pending icon display and the changing icon display will be described. The hold icon display is to display a hold icon in a first hold icon display area 141 and a second hold icon display area 143 described later. The special icon determination information is stored in the main RAM 101c in the first start opening detection signal input process in step S230 or the second start opening detection signal input process in step S240, and the special symbol variation display (or the special symbol lottery) ) Has acquired the right to carry out), but since it is in a holding state where the variable display of the special symbol can not be started immediately, the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol in the holding state (hereinafter referred to as "special figure holding") ) Is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The hold icon is a first hold icon representing the right to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning on the first starting opening 6, and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning on the second starting opening 7. And a second holding icon representing the right to execute (hereinafter, when both the first holding icon and the second holding icon point, they are simply referred to as a "holding icon").

  The displaying of the changing icon is to display the changing icon in the changing icon display area 142 described later. The fluctuating icon is an icon (image) representing a fluctuating display of the special symbol under execution corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol related storage area of the main RAM 101c, and the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 Is displayed on. In other words, when the start condition of the variable display of the symbol is satisfied with respect to the special view hold indicated by the hold icon while the hold icon is displayed, this corresponds to the variable display of the symbol according to the start condition. The hold icon is displayed as a floating icon.

  Note that, in the following, when pointing to both the hold icon and the floating icon, it is simply referred to as an "icon".

  In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a special mode are set as the icon display mode. The normal mode is a standard display mode for icons, and the special mode is a special display mode for suggesting or notifying a preset predetermined item. In the present embodiment, one type of normal mode is set, and the special modes are classified into a plurality of types according to the content to be suggested or notified. In this embodiment, the special modes are classified into the first special mode, the second special mode, the third special mode and the fourth special mode, and the holding icon is displayed in a special mode, or the type of the special mode is specified. By changing it, a pending icon change notice is executed as a pre-read notice effect, and a changing icon is displayed in a special mode or a special mode is changed to execute a changing icon change notice. The display mode of the icon is not limited to the normal mode, the first special mode, the second special mode, the third special mode, and the fourth special mode, and can be set as appropriate.

  The normal mode is a standard display mode, and is a standard for predetermined items set in advance. As shown in FIG. 61, the shape of the icon of the normal mode is circular, and the color of the icon of the normal mode is white.

  The first special mode is a display mode that indicates the possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the expectation of winning a jackpot, and may also be a display mode that suggests that the special mode may be changed to another special mode. In the present embodiment, only one type is set. As shown in FIG. 61, the shape of the icon of the first special aspect is circular, and the color of the icon of the first special aspect blinks in white. That is, it can be said that the first special mode is a state in which the normal mode is blinking. As for the jackpot winning expectation suggested by the first special aspect, the normal aspect <the first special aspect.

  The second special mode is a display mode that indicates the possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the expectation of winning a jackpot, and in the present embodiment, the expected jackpot winning degree suggested as a type of the second special mode. There are five types of second special aspect 21 to second special aspect 25 different from one another.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the shapes of the icons of the second special aspect 11 to the second special aspect 15 are the same in the silhouette of one person regardless of the type, and the second special aspect 11 to the second special aspect The color of the 15 icons varies depending on the type. Specifically, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 11 is white, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 12 is green, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 13 is red, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 14 Is the zebra pattern, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 15 is rainbow.

  Regarding the jackpot winning expectation according to the second special aspect, the normal aspect <first special aspect <second special aspect 11 <second special aspect 12 <second special aspect 13 <second special aspect 14 <second special aspect 15 The order is higher. In addition, the second special mode 15 indicates that the jackpot winning expectation is 100%, that is, reports a jackpot winning.

  Also, while the second special aspect 11 to the second special aspect 14 can occur for any of the hold icon and the floating icon, the second special aspect 15 occurs only for the floating icon. This is because when the stop icon representing the special figure hold is displayed in the second special mode 15 and the jackpot is notified at a stage where the variable display of the special symbol pertaining to the special view hold is not started, the interest of the game decreases. Since there is a risk, the second special aspect 15 is not generated for the hold icon. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special mode 15.

  The third special mode implies the degree of expectation for the execution of the look-ahead zone effect (hereinafter referred to as "the degree of expectation for execution of the look-ahead zone"). As types of the third special mode, six types of third special mode 1 to third special mode 6 are set, which are different from each other in the expected degree of expectation for performing the prefetching effect execution.

  Here, the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3 are icons corresponding to the start opening winning combination designation command for which the pre-reading zone effect or the zone turning effect is to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "zone effect object icon") The third special mode 4 to the third special mode 6 are not icons corresponding to the start opening prize winning designation command for which the pre-reading zone effect or the zone turning effect is to be executed (hereinafter referred to as “zone It is a display mode of "is not a presentation non-target icon". In other words, the zone effect non-target icon is an icon (previous to or after the start opening prize winning command) corresponding to the icon for the start opening prize winning designation command for which the pre-reading zone effect or zone turning effect is to be executed. Or it is an icon on which a variable presentation is performed later).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the shapes of the icons in the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3 are shapes including the shape of the icon according to the second special mode. Specifically, the shapes of the icons in the third special aspect 1 (11 to 15) are such that the silhouette of one person is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect At the same time, substantially in the center, characters indicating “pre-reading zone effect execution” are attached with “? Zone?”. In the third special aspect 2 (21 to 25), the shapes of the icons according to the second special aspect are similar to that in which the silhouettes of two persons are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect It is composed of an execution of the pre-reading zone effect called “Δ zone Δ” and a letter indicating that the expectation of the execution is higher than the “? Zone?” Of the third special aspect 1. In the third special aspect 3 (31 to 35), the shapes of the icons of the third special aspect are the same as that of the second special aspect in which the silhouettes of four persons are arranged on the left and right sides of one person and The character which announces execution of the pre-reading zone effect called "(circle) zone (circle)] is attached to and is comprised.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the shapes of the icons in the third to fourth special modes 4 to 6 also have shapes including the shapes of the icons according to the second special mode. Specifically, the shapes of the icons in the third special mode 4 (41 to 45) are such that the silhouettes of one person are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. It is a structure. The shape of the icon of the third special mode 5 (51 to 55) is configured such that the silhouettes of two people are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. . The shape of the icon of the third special aspect 6 (61 to 65) is configured such that the silhouettes of three persons are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. . In the third to third special aspects 4 to 6, as in the third to third special aspects 1 to 3, characters such as "? Zone?" Are not attached. In other words, it is also suggested that the “? Zone?” Of the third special mode 1, the “Δ zone Δ” of the third special mode 2, and the “の zone ○” of the third special mode 3 are zone effect target icons, respectively. ing.

  About the read-ahead zone execution expectation concerning the zone effect object icon, it is high in the order of (normal mode <) second special mode <third special mode 1 <third special mode 2 <third special mode 3. On the other hand, the pre-reading zone execution expectation concerning the zone effect non-target icon is higher in the order of (normal mode <) second special mode <third special mode 4 <third special mode 5 <third special mode 6 There is.

  Here, the second special aspect is included with respect to the prefetching zone execution expectation degree relating to the zone effect object icon and the zone effect non-target icon, by setting the icon display mode to the second special aspect and the third special aspect This is because the zone precursor effect is executed to suggest or notify the execution of the prefetch zone effect described later, and the second special mode also suggests the prefetch zone execution expectation.

  As described above, the shapes of the icons in the second and third special modes include the silhouette of a person, and the number of silhouettes of the icons in the second special mode is “1”, and the third special mode 1 , The number of silhouettes of the icon of 4 is "3", the number of silhouettes of the icon of the third special mode 2, 5 is "5", and the number of the silhouettes of icon of the third special mode 3, 6 Has become "7" people. And, the larger the number of silhouettes of icons, the higher the expectation of execution of the prefetch zone.

  Further, in the present embodiment, each of the third special aspect 1 and the third special aspect 4, the third special aspect 2 and the third special aspect 5, the third special aspect 3 and the third special aspect 6 is the display aspect concerned. It is assumed that the attributes of the icons to be targets of (zone effect target icon and zone effect non-target icon) are different but are in the correspondence relationship, and the same prefetch zone execution expectation is set. That is, the prefetch zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 1 and the prefetch zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 4 are the same, and the prefetch zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 2 The look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by 3 special modes 5 is the same, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special mode 3 and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special mode 6 are the same .

  In addition, the third special modes 3 and 6 indicate that the prefetch zone execution expectation is 100%, that is, it is informed that the prefetch zone effect is to be executed. Further, although details will be described later, the icons are displayed in the third special modes 3 and 6 also when the pre-reading zone effect is performed. Therefore, the third special modes 3 and 6 may notify that pre-reading zone effect is being performed.

  In the following, the third special mode 1 and 4 are referred to as "pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 1", and the third special mode 2 and 5 are referred to as "pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 2", the third special mode Aspects 3 and 6 are referred to as "pre-reading zone effect notification mode". Moreover, when referring to any of the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 and the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2, it is simply referred to as “prefetch zone effect suggestion mode”.

  In addition, as described above, the shape of the icon according to the third special aspect is constituted by the silhouette of a person, and the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect is included, but this second special aspect The part of the silhouette of one person in question is the main silhouette part, and the part of the person's silhouette on the left and right sides of the main silhouette part is the secondary silhouette part.

  And about the main silhouette part of the icon which concerns on each of the 3rd special aspect 1-the 3rd special aspect 6, several kinds of colors are set like a 2nd special aspect. Third special aspect 1 is divided into third special aspect 11 to third special aspect 15, and third special aspect 2 is divided into third special aspect 21 to third special aspect 25 according to the color of the main silhouette portion. The third special aspect 3 is divided into the third special aspect 31 to the third special aspect 35, the third special aspect 4 is divided into the third special aspect 41 to the third special aspect 45, and the third special aspect 5 is the third special aspect The third special embodiment 51 is divided into third special embodiment 51 through third special embodiment 55, and the third special embodiment 6 is divided into third special embodiment 61 through third special embodiment 65.

  The color of the main silhouette part according to the third special aspect 11, the third special aspect 21, the third special aspect 31, the third special aspect 41, the third special aspect 51 and the third special aspect 61 is white. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 12, the third special aspect 22, the third special aspect 32, the third special aspect 42, the third special aspect 52 and the third special aspect 62 is green. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 13, the third special aspect 33, the third special aspect 43, the third special aspect 53 and the third special aspect 63 is red. The color of the main silhouette part according to the third special aspect 14, the third special aspect 24, the third special aspect 34, the third special aspect 44, the third special aspect 54 and the third special aspect 64 is a zebra pattern. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 35 and the third special aspect 65 is iridescent. And, as in the second special aspect, the color of the main silhouette part of the third special aspect suggests the jackpot winning expectation, and is higher in the order of white <green <red <zebra pattern <rainbow color.

  On the other hand, the fourth special mode suggests or notifies predetermined matters related to a handshake meeting advance notice. The handshake event advance notice is an effect that suggests the jackpot winning expectation using a fluctuating icon, and in the present embodiment, it can be performed in the effect mode A, and is based on the pre-judgment result indicated by the start opening prize designation command. However, it may be performed based on the determination result at the start of the fluctuation effect. The specific effect contents of the handshake meeting advance notice will be described later.

  As types of the fourth special mode, four types of fourth special mode 1 to fourth special mode 4 are set. Here, the fourth special mode 1 (11 to 15) is a fluctuating icon corresponding to the start opening prize winning designation command which is to execute the handshake meeting advance notice (hereinafter referred to as "the handshake meeting notice subject fluctuating icon") The fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24) is a display icon corresponding to the start opening prize winning designation command for which the handshake meeting advance notice is to be executed (hereinafter referred to as the The fourth special mode 3 (31) is a changing icon corresponding to a starting opening prize designation command which is not a starting opening prize winning designation command which is to cause a handshake meeting advance notice to be executed (hereinafter referred to as “handshake start” The fourth special mode 4 (41) is a display mode of "notice that is not subject to a target Hold icon corresponding to the command (hereinafter, referred to as a "handshake meeting notice non-target Hold icon") is a display mode of.

  In other words, the handshake meeting advance non-target pending icon is an icon corresponding to the start opening win specification command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize specification command for which the handshake meeting advance notification is to be executed. It is an icon for which a variable presentation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the shape of the fluctuating icon of the fourth special aspect 1 (11 to 15) is a silhouette of a person who is shaking hands, viewed from the side, and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. And consists of. The form of the holding icon in the fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24) is composed of a silhouette of a person who has given a predetermined pose, as viewed from the front, and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. The “heart” attached commonly to the icons of the fourth special aspect 1 and the fourth special aspect 2 indicates that it is the object of the handshake meeting advance notice.

  Also, the shape of the during-changing icon in the fourth special mode 3 (31) is configured by the silhouette of the same person as the during-changing icon according to the fourth special mode 1, and as in the fourth special mode 1, the heart is Not attached. The form of the holding icon in the fourth special mode 4 (41) is also composed of the silhouette of the same person as the holding icon according to the fourth special mode 2, and the heart is not attached as in the fourth special mode 2. .

  Moreover, about the part of the person's silhouette contained in the icon of the 4th special aspect 1-the 4th special aspect 2, several types of color are set similarly to the 2nd special aspect. The fourth special aspect 1 is divided into five types of the fourth special aspect 11 to the fourth special aspect 15 according to the color of the silhouette portion, and the fourth special aspect 2 is the fourth special aspect 21 to the fourth special aspect 24. Are divided into four types.

  The color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 11 and the fourth special aspect 21 is white, and the color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 12 and the fourth special aspect 22 is green The color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the special aspect 13 and the fourth special aspect 23 is red, and the color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 14 and the fourth special aspect 24 is a zebra pattern The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to aspect 15 is iridescent.

  The rainbow color is set only in the fourth special aspect 1 because the handshake meeting notice object pending icon is displayed in rainbow color, and the variation display of the special symbol related to the special view pending corresponding to the icon is not started If the jackpot is notified at the stage, the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and it is possible to provide a rainbow-colored display mode also for the handshake meeting notice target holding icon.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the color relating to the handshake event non-target fluctuating icon and the handshake party asymmetric asymmetry pending icon is one type of white, a plurality of types are set, and the handshake event non-target object fluctuating icon And, as in the case of the handshake event advance notice pending icon, the color can indicate the jackpot expectation.

  As described above, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the display mode of the icon, and during the game, the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode and from a special mode to a different special mode. Is improving the interest of the game. The change pattern of the display mode of the icon will be described later.

(Icon display area)
Next, the pending icon display areas 141 and 143 for displaying the pending icon and the changing icon display area 142 for displaying the changing icon will be described. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the pending icon display areas 141 and 143 and the changing icon display area 142 are formed in the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The first hold icon display area 141 where the first hold icon is displayed is formed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and the second hold icon display area 143 where the second hold icon is displayed is the lower right side of the display unit 140. The floating icon display area 142 is formed between the first hold icon display area 141 and the second hold icon display area 143 so as not to overlap each other.

  The first reserved icon display area 141 is divided into a first display unit 141a, a second display unit 141b, a third display unit 141c, and a fourth display unit 141d from the side of the fluctuating icon display area 142. Each display part 141a-141d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 141a represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the second display unit 141b. The first hold icon displayed on the screen represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the second storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold displayed on the third display unit 141c The icon represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the third storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 141d is the first special symbol A special map reservation based on the special map determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the storage area is displayed.

  The second reserved icon display area 143 is divided into a first display unit 143a, a second display unit 143b, a third display unit 143c, and a fourth display unit 143d from the changing icon display area 142 side. Each display part 143a-143d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 143a represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second display unit 143b The second holding icon displayed on the second symbol represents the special view holding based on the special view determination information stored in the second storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area, and the second holding displayed on the third display unit 143c The icon represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the third storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 143d is the second special symbol A special map reservation based on the special map determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the storage area is displayed.

  In addition, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 represents the change display of the special symbol currently being executed based on the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol relevant storage area (the zero storage unit). .

  In addition, the changing icon display area 142 in which the changing icon is displayed is provided on the pedestal image D in order to be clearly distinguished from the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143. The broken line portion in FIG. 78 (a) is for showing each display portion and display area, and may not be actually displayed, but may be displayed.

(Process at the time of starting opening winning by the production control board)
The processing for winning opening winning by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

  In step S1307-1, sub CPU 102a stores the starting opening winning combination designation command determined to be received in step S1304 in the effect information storage area of sub RAM 102c.

  Specifically, if the received start opening winning combination designation command is a first start opening winning combination designation command, the first special view holding number among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first effect information holding storage area ( It is stored in the storage unit corresponding to U1). In addition, if the received start opening winning combination designation command is the second start opening winning combination designation command, the second special drawing reservation number (U2) among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second effect information storage storage area It is stored in the corresponding storage unit.

  In step S1307-2, the sub CPU 102a acquires the icon display mode scenario determination random number indicated by the icon display mode scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and stores it in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1307-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the effect mode A, which is the normal effect mode, is currently set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is not set in step S1307-3, the process proceeds to step S1307-4, and if it is determined in step S1307-3 that the effect mode A is set, the process proceeds to step S1307-5. Transfer the process.

  In step S1307-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is the pre-reading zone effect notification mode or the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode, in other words, the zone precursor effect is executed. It is determined whether the

  The zone precursor effect is an effect for suggesting or notifying execution of the pre-reading zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in the above-described pre-reading zone effect notifying mode or the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode. It is determined whether or not the zone precursor effect is to be executed based on the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning combination designation command, and when the starting opening winning combination designation command is stored, in other words, the starting opening winning combination designation command It is possible to perform from the time of corresponding special figure reservation to the end of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure reservation.

  In addition, even if the zone precursor effect is executed, the prefetch zone effect may not be executed. In the following, the zone precursor production in this case is referred to as "the gasse zone precursor production". In addition, as the Gasse Zone precursor effect, the zone turning failure effect is executed after the Zone precursor effect is executed, but there may be cases where the pre-reading zone effect is not executed. Furthermore, although the zone precursor presentation is executed as the Gasse Zone precursor presentation, there are also cases where neither zone turning presentation nor prefetch zone presentation is performed.

  In step S1307-5, to determine whether the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is the prefetch zone effect notification mode or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode, the icon is already the prefetch zone effect notification mode or If a new hold icon is displayed when the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode is displayed and a zone precursor effect is being executed, the new hold icon is displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode or This is for displaying in the pre-reading zone effect indication mode.

  The new reserved icon is displayed in the same display mode as the previously displayed prefetch zone effect notification mode or the previously read zone effect suggestion mode, thereby allowing the player to surely recognize the notification or suggestion of the execution of the prefetch zone effect be able to. In addition, as to whether or not the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time is the pre-reading zone effect notification mode or the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode, the pre-production scenario indicated by the pre-production scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c It can be determined based on

  If it is determined in step S1307-5 that the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode in step S1307-5, the sub CPU 102a transfers the process to step S1307-6. If it is determined that the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time is not the pre-reading zone effect notification mode or the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode, the process proceeds to step S1307-7.

  In step S1307-6, the sub CPU 102a displays the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start opening winning combination designation command related to the processing of this start opening winning at the same type as the display mode of the icon already displayed at the current time. A zone precursor effect icon effect control command indicating setting to (pre-reading zone effect notification mode, pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 1 or pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 2) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The zone precursor effect icon effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the zone effect effect icon effect control command, the display mode of the icon currently displayed at this point on the hold icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command according to the start opening prize winning process is displayed. The zone precursor effect is displayed by displaying the same type of display mode as (pre-reading zone effect notification mode or pre-reading zone effect indication mode) (pre-reading zone effect notification mode, pre-reading zone effect indication mode 1 or pre-reading zone effect indication mode 2) Do.

  In addition, the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the starting opening winning a prize designation command which becomes the trigger of execution of zone precursor production ends, zone effect object icon (variation displayed in pre-reading zone effect notification mode or pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) When the middle icon is deleted, the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon displayed in the pre-reading zone effect notification mode or the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode becomes the normal mode.

  In step S1307-10, sub-CPU 102a sets the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start opening winning combination designation command according to the processing of this start opening winning combination to the normal mode and thereafter, basically does not change it to the special mode. The normal icon display mode scenario data indicating the normal icon display mode scenario is stored in the effect information suspension storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting opening winning a prize designation command in step S1305-1.

  Here, the "basically" is that, as described above, when the zone precursor effect is executed when the icon is displayed in the normal mode, it is normally determined according to the execution. This is because the mode changes to the prefetch zone effect execution suggestion mode or the prefetch zone effect execution notification mode.

  Further, for the same starting opening winning combination designation command, in other words, in the same starting opening winning processing, an icon effect control command indicating a normal icon display mode scenario described later is set (step S1307-22). When the zone precursor effect icon effect control command is set (step S1307-6), the icon display control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 and the lamp control board 104 first. Therefore, in this case, after the holding icon of the normal mode is displayed, the display mode of the holding icon immediately changes to the prefetch zone effect execution suggestion mode or the prefetch zone effect execution notification mode.

  In step S1307-7, the sub CPU 102a performs the pre-reading zone effect, the zone turning effect, or the pre-zone effect, based on the pre-reading zone effect scenario data and the pro-event effect scenario data stored in the effect information pending storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not one of them (hereinafter referred to as “pre-reading zone effect etc.”) is not currently executed, but is already scheduled to be executed. The determination is made in order to prevent the prefetch zone effect and the like from being redundantly executed.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the pre-reading zone effect etc. is scheduled to be executed, it transfers the process to step S1307-10, and if it determines that the pre-reading zone effect etc. is not scheduled to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1307-8 Move.

  In step S1307-8, the sub CPU 102a determines that the determination result of the jackpot determination relating to the fluctuation effect currently being executed is "big hit" based on the fluctuation effect data stored in the fluctuation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c described later. It is determined whether the Although the fluctuation effect data is identification information indicating the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation effect data also includes a jackpot determination result as an opportunity for the fluctuation effect to be executed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a "big hit", it transfers the process to step S1307-10, and if it determines that it is not a "big hit", it transfers the process to step S1307-9.

  Sub CPU102a, in step S1307-9, among the starting opening winning a specified command currently stored in the first effect information pending storage area of the sub RAM 102c, from the starting opening winning specified command according to the processing at the time of this starting opening winning It is determined whether or not all the preliminary determination results pertaining to the first special view reservation (hereinafter referred to as "preceding suspension") corresponding to the starting opening winning combination designation command stored previously are all "no reach lost". The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-11 if it determines that all is "no reach loss", and shifts the processing to step S1307-10 if it determines that they are not all "reach no loss".

  In step S1307-11, the sub CPU 102a acquires a pre-reading zone effect scenario determination random number indicated by the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1307-12, the sub CPU 102a selects the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination table (refer to FIG. 50) for performing pre-reading zone effect scenario determination, and the pre-reading acquired in step S1307-11 in the selected determination table. Pre-reading zone effect scenario determination which determines pre-reading zone effect scenario by collating the random number for zone production scenario decision is done.

  The pre-reading zone effect scenario means effect contents of zone turning effect and pre-reading zone effect. The effect contents of the zone turning effect and the pre-reading zone effect include whether or not the turning effect is executable, the timing when the turning effect is executed when the turning effect is executed, the type of the turning effect to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading zone effect Whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed when the pre-reading zone is executed is included.

  The prefetch zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 50 is associated with the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning combination designation command which is the target of the processing at the time of starting opening winning and the current first special drawing reserve number (U1). Therefore, when sub CPU 102a selects the pre-reading zone effect determination table, the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning combination designation command, which is the target of the processing of main starting opening winning, stored in sub RAM 102c The number of the first starting opening winning a prize specified command which is remembered in 1 production information retention storage territory (the 1st storage section-the 4th storage section), namely, it refers to the 1st special figure reservation number (U1).

  Also, in each prefetch zone rendering scenario determination table associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special map reservation number (U1), the prefetch zone rendering scenario determination value and the selection rate (%) for each scenario, The pre-reading zone effect scenario is correlated and stored.

  In addition, “relevant fluctuation”, “1 fluctuation before”, “2 fluctuation before” and “3 fluctuation before” described in the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination table are pre-reading zone effect, turning success effect, turning failure effect 1 or It represents the timing at which the insult failure effect 2 is executed. Here, "the variation" represents a variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the variation") of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening winning combination designation command according to the processing at the time of starting opening winning, and "1 change before" is the concerned "2 before fluctuation" represents the fluctuation display of the special symbol before 2 years when the fluctuation is performed, and "3 fluctuation before" is the fluctuation when the fluctuation is displayed. It represents the variation display of the previous three special symbols to be performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a performs the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12, the pre-reading zone effect scenario data indicating the pre-reading zone effect scenario that is the determination result is stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102 c. . The pre-reading zone effect scenario data is stored in the pre-reading zone effect scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning a prize designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-13, the sub CPU 102a is a pre-reading zone effect scenario in which the result of the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12 is not limited to the presence or absence of pre-reading zone effect execution, but includes the zone turning effect execution. In other words, it is determined whether or not zone turning effect is to be executed based on the starting opening winning combination designation command according to the starting opening winning combination process. The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1307-14 when it is determined that the zone turning effect is to be executed, and moves the process to step S1307-4 when it is determined that the zone turning effect is not to be performed.

  In step S1307-14, the sub CPU 102a determines the final number of persons associated with the zone precursor effect icon (hereinafter simply referred to as "the final number of people"), the final number determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. Obtain the final number determination random number indicated by.

  In step S1307-15, the sub CPU 102a selects the final number determination table for determining the final number, and collates the random number for final number determination acquired in step S1305-14 with the selected table. Determine the final number of people to determine

  The final number is the number of people constituting the icon used for zone precursor effect, and means the number of people finally reached. The reason is "final" because the effect mode of the zone precursor effect, in other words, the number of people configuring the icon used for the zone precursor effect (display mode of the icon) may change in the middle is there. In the present embodiment, the final number of persons is set to four types of one, three, five and seven, and this "one" corresponds to the second special mode, and "three" is the third. "3" corresponds to the third special mode 1, "5" corresponds to the third special mode 2, and "7" corresponds to the third special mode 3. That is, determining the final number of people can also determine the final icon display mode of the zone precursor effect.

  The final number determination table shown in FIG. 51 is associated with the pre-reading zone effect scenario determined in the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination. In each final number determination table associated with the pre-reading zone effect scenario, the final number determination value and the final number are stored in association with each other such that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 51 is obtained. Therefore, when selecting the final number determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the pre-reading zone effect scenario indicated by the pre-reading zone effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102 c.

  In addition, “precursor effect scenario determination TBL. No” described in the final number determination table is identification information of the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination described later, and is performed in the process of starting opening prize winning The determination result of the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination are associated with each other. Therefore, the final number of people is determined by the final number of people determination, and a precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone predictive effects scenario determination is also determined.

  In step S1307-16, the sub CPU 102a acquires a zone precursor presentation scenario determination random number indicated by the zone precursor presentation scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c in order to determine the zone precursor presentation scenario.

  The zone precursor presentation scenario means the contents of the zone precursor presentation. Whether the zone precursor effect is performed or not, and the icon display mode in the case where the zone precursor effect is performed is one of the second special mode or the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3 in the effect contents of the zone predictive effect The timing of change, and the icon display mode after change (the number of persons configuring the icon) in the case of change are included.

  In step S1307-17, the sub CPU 102a selects the zone precursor presentation scenario determination table (refer to FIG. 52) for performing zone precursor presentation scenario determination, and in the selected determination table, the zone acquired in step S1307-16. A zone precursor presentation scenario determination is performed to determine a zone precursor presentation scenario by collating the precursor presentation scenario determination random numbers.

  As described above, in the zone precursor rendering scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52, the precursor rendering scenario determination TBL.L in which the determination result of the pre-reading zone rendering scenario determination in the starting opening winning process and the determination result of the final number of people determination are associated. It is associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the zone precursor rendering scenario determination table, the precursor rendering scenario determination TBL.S derived as the determination result of the final number determination of step S1307-15. See No.

  The timing at which the number of people constituting the icon pertaining to the zone precursor effect will be the “at winning”, “3 before fluctuation → 2 before fluctuation” and “2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation” described in the zone precursor effect scenario determination table Represents Here, "at the time of winning" indicates the time of occurrence of the special view reserve corresponding to the starting opening winning combination designation command according to the processing at the time of starting opening winning, "3 before change → 2 before change", the change is performed It represents the period until the variation display of the last three special symbols is finished and the variation display of the last two special symbols is started (during the shift of the reserve icon), “2 variation before → 1 variation before” is It represents a period between the time when the variable display of the second special symbol on which the fluctuation is performed and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol (when the hold icon is shifted).

  In FIG. 52, “when winning”, “3 before fluctuation → 2 before fluctuation” and “2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation” are provided as the timing of becoming the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect. In this embodiment, the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon concerning zone precursor effect changes is "when winning", "4 before fluctuation → 3 before fluctuation" and "3 before fluctuation → 2 before fluctuation" And the zone precursor effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is used when the number of first special view reservations is “3”, which is set to any of “2 before change → 1 before change”. Because, it is because only "when winning a prize", "3 before fluctuation → 2 before fluctuation" and "2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation" can occur.

  In the zone precursor rendering scenario determination table used in the case of the first special drawing reserve number “4”, “when winning”, “4 before fluctuation” as the timing at which the number of people configuring the icon pertaining to the zone precursor rendering changes In the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the case of “3 change before”, “3 change before → 2 change before” and “2 change before → 1 change before”, and used in the case of the first special view reservation number “2” "When winning a prize" and "2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation" are set as the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the precursor effect changes, and the precursor effect scenario used in the case of the first special view reservation number "1". In the determination table, "at the time of winning" is set as the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes.

  In addition, the numbers “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” described in the lower part of the column of the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon pertaining to the zone precursor effect changes in FIG. It shows that it changes to the icon of the display mode constituted by the person of the number of people.

  Therefore, for example, in the precursor effect scenario 17-1, the display mode (second special mode) in which the display mode of the suspension icon generated at the time of winning and the icon displayed at that time is the number "one person" is In "before change → 2 before change", the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is the display mode (third special mode 1) consisting of the number "3 persons", and in "2 before change → 1 before change", The display mode of the icon displayed at that time represents the effect contents of the zone precursor effect that is the display mode (third special mode 2) in which the number of people is "5".

  When the sub CPU 102a performs zone precursor effect scenario determination in step S1307-17, it stores zone precursor effect scenario data indicating the zone precursor effect scenario that is the determination result in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c. . The storage of the zone precursor rendering scenario data is performed in the zone precursor rendering scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting opening prize designation command in step S1307-1.

  The sub CPU 102a, in step S1307-18, the pre-reading zone effect scenario which is the judgment result of the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12 and the zone precursor effect scenario which is the judgment result of the zone precursor effect scenario judgment in step S1307-17. The prefetch zone effect control command indicating the effect content is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The prefetch zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the pre-reading zone effect control command, the pre-reading zone effect control command indicates the pre-reading zone effect scenario, and the pre-reading zone effect scenario indicates the pre-reading zone effect scenario. Control production and pre-reading zone production.

  In step S1307-19, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the result of the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12 is the pre-reading zone effect scenario including the execution of pre-reading zone effect, in other words, the starting opening Whether or not to execute the pre-reading zone effect is determined based on the starting opening winning combination designating command according to the winning processing. If it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect is to be performed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-20 and does not execute the pre-reading zone effect, but executes the zone turning effect (hereinafter, the pre-reading zone effect is not performed but the zone turning effect is If it is determined that the execution is "Gasse zone turning effect", the process moves to step S1307-21.

  In step S1307-20, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (refer to FIG. 53) for executing preread zone effect execution to determine an icon display mode scenario for executing the preread zone effect, and the selection is performed. The icon display mode scenario determination that determines the icon display mode scenario is performed by collating the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1307-2 with the determination table.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for the preliminary read zone effect execution shown in FIG. 53 is a precursor effect scenario in which the determination result of the preliminary read zone effect scenario determination in the starting opening winning process and the determination result of the final number of people determination are associated. It is provided for each. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table for performing pre-reading zone effect execution, it refers to the precursor effect scenario indicated by the precursor effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

  A plurality of icon display mode scenarios are provided in each icon display mode scenario determination table provided for each precursor presentation scenario, and an icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately allocated to each icon display mode scenario. ing.

  In addition, “when winning”, “2 before fluctuation”, “1 before fluctuation” and “the above fluctuation” described in the icon display mode scenario determination table for the pre-reading zone effect execution are the timing at which the icon display mode changes. It represents. As described above, when the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the display mode of the displayed zone effect object icon is the third special mode 3, and the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon is the third special mode 6. .

  In addition, even if the pre-reading zone effect is not executed, before the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the zone effect target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 1 or 2 as the zone pre-event effect, and the zone effect The non-target icon is the second special mode or the third special mode 4 or 5. And, when the icon of the second special aspect or the third special aspect including the silhouette of a person is displayed in this way, the silhouette of the person who composes the icon (the main silhouette portion for the third special aspect) Colors can change.

  For example, “white → green” of “2 before change” of the icon display mode scenario “5” in FIG. 53 is a silhouette of a person configuring an icon displayed in white (a main silhouette portion for the third special mode) Represents that the color of changes to green.

  Similarly, “white → green → red → zebra → rainbow” of “the relevant variation” of the icon display mode scenario “15” in FIG. 53 is the silhouette of the person who configures the icon displayed in white (third The special mode represents that the color of the main silhouette portion changes stepwise from green to red to zebra pattern to iridescent colors.

  The change in color of the silhouette of the person configuring the icon (the main silhouette portion in the third special mode) is appropriately performed in accordance with the contents of the change effect being performed at that time. As the contents of the change production for changing the color of the silhouette of the person, one or more stages during the change production depending on the temporary stop or re-change of the pseudo-series production or the expectation of the jackpot win At the time of the so-called step-up notice to step up the effect (effect image, effect sound, etc.), a predetermined cut-in notice to cause the image display device 14 to display a cut-in image according to the expectation of the big hit A speech state notice is output from the speech output device 15 while displaying a speech image according to the degree of expectation of the speech, a notice of speech to be output from the speech output device 15, appearance of a character, or execution of a development effect that develops into super reach At this time, a predetermined operation effect by the effect-use character apparatus 17 or the like is appropriately set according to the change effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the color of the silhouette (the main silhouette portion in the third special mode) of the person configuring the icon according to the icon display mode scenario for executing the prefetch zone effect changes is the present embodiment. It is possible to appropriately set, for example, when the icon shifts, when the predetermined fluctuation presentation ends and the next fluctuation presentation is started.

  When the sub CPU 102a performs icon display mode scenario determination in step S1307-20, it stores icon display mode scenario data indicating an icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result in the effect information suspension storage area of the sub RAM 102c. . The storage of the icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting opening winning combination designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-21, sub CPU102a shows the same normal icon display mode scenario as step S1307-10 as the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the starting opening winning combination designation command that is the trigger to execute the gasse zone turning effect. The normal icon display mode scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, basically, the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the start opening winning combination designation command which is a trigger for executing the gasse zone turning effect is a normal mode, but the trigger for executing the gasse zone turning effect and Also for the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the starting opening winning combination designation command, the same judgment table as the icon display mode scenario judgment table for the prefetch zone effect execution is provided, and based on the table, step S1307-20 It is also possible to perform the determination in the same manner as the icon display mode scenario determination for the pre-reading zone effect of.

  Here, the "basically" is that, as described above, when the zone precursor effect is executed when the icon is displayed in the normal mode, it is normally determined according to the execution. This is because the mode changes to the prefetch zone effect execution suggestion mode or the prefetch zone effect execution notification mode. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting opening winning a prize designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-22, sub CPU 102a sets in the transmission buffer the icon display control command indicated by the icon display mode scenario set in the icon display mode scenario area of sub RAM 102c in the processing for starting starting hole winning, and starts this starting opening winning When the process ends.

  The icon display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the icon display control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 display icons according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display control command.

  In step S1307-4, the sub CPU 102a performs an icon display mode scenario determination process (icon display mode scenario determination process for non-rolling effect non-execution) in the case where the zone turning effect is not performed.

(Icon display mode scenario determination processing for turning effect non-execution by the effect control board)
Here, the icon display mode scenario determination process for non-execution of turning effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1307-4-1, the sub CPU 102a currently makes the icon display mode a special mode, and the icon change advance notice prohibited period, which is a period during which the icon change advance notice is prohibited, specifically, during the jackpot game, SPSP. During reach effects such as during reach and SP reach, the period from when the variable display of the special symbol is started until the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, a predetermined time before the stop display of the special symbol is performed (for example, It is determined whether a period of 10 seconds) or an effect of changing the display mode of the icon has already been performed or is scheduled to be performed. The sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307-4-16 if it determines that it is an icon change advance notice period, and moves the process to step S1307-4-2 if it determines that it is not an icon change advance notice period.

  In step S1307-4-16, sub CPU 102a stores the same normal icon display mode scenario data as the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in step S1307-10 in the effect information storage area of sub RAM 102c. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting opening prize designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-4-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the effect mode A, which is the normal effect mode, is currently set. This is because, in the present embodiment, a handshake meeting advance notice to be described later is performed only in the effect mode A. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is set, the process proceeds to step S1307-4-3. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is not set, the process proceeds to step S1307-4-12.

  In step S1307-4-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not all the preliminary determination results relating to the preliminary suspension are "loss without reach". The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-4-4 if it determines that all is "no reach loss", and shifts the processing to step S1307-4-12 if it determines that not all is "no reach loss".

  In step S1307-4-4, the sub CPU 102a indicates a handshake meeting notice execution random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c in order to make a handshake meeting announcement determination to determine whether to execute a handshake meeting announcement. Acquire a random number for handshake execution notice execution judgment.

  The handshake event advance notice is a kind of advance notice effect that indicates the possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the expectation of winning a jackpot, and is performed using a fluctuating icon. In the handshake meeting advance notice, a changing icon to be subject to the notice is displayed in the fourth special mode 1, and a person who composes the change in progress icon of the fourth special mode 1 (hereinafter referred to as a "shake meeting main character") A predetermined handshake character appearing in the vicinity of the fluctuating icon display area 142 shakes hands along with the execution of the handshake meeting advance notice. Then, when the handshake party main character and the handshake character shake hands, the color of the handshake party main character gradually changes in response to the appearance of a predetermined line from the handshake character on the display unit 140. If the color of this handshake party protagonist gradually changes, then the handshake party protagonist's color completely changes and the color change succeeds, and the original color is returned in the middle of the color change. Sometimes the color change fails.

  A plurality of times of appearance of a line (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of speech") in one notice of a handshake meeting is set. In the present embodiment, the number of speech times is set to one of four times.

  In addition, in conjunction with the notice of a handshake meeting, a handshake notice notification suggestion effect is provided. The handshake meeting advance notice suggestive effect is an effect that suggests that a handshake meeting advance notice is to be executed. The handshake meeting notice suggestion effect, the decision to execute the handshake meeting notice, until the handshake meeting notice is started, for the execution of the handshake meeting notice, the pending icon for the handshake meeting notice target fourth special It is executed by displaying the handshake meeting advance notice non-target changing in motion icon in the fourth special mode 3 and displaying the handshake start notice non-target pending icon in the fourth special mode 4 while displaying it in the second mode.

  In step S1307-4-5, the sub CPU 102a selects the handshake meeting advance execution determination table (see FIG. 54) for determining execution of the handshake start, and acquires the selected table in step S1307-4-4. A handshake meeting notice execution judgment random number is collated, and a handshake meeting notice execution determination is performed to determine whether to execute the handshake meeting.

  The handshake meeting notice execution determination table shown in FIG. 54 is associated with the preliminary determination result of the starting opening winning combination designation command which is the target of the processing of the starting opening winning combination. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the handshake meeting advance notice execution determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning combination designation command which is the target of the processing of this start opening winning combination stored in the sub RAM 102c.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in each handshake meeting notice execution determination table associated with the preliminary determination result, the handshake meeting notice execution is performed to determine whether or not the handshake meeting notice is performed so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 54 is obtained. The determination values are stored in association with each other.

  In step S1307-4-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the determination result of the handshake notification execution execution determination in step S1307-4-5 is "execute handshake notification." The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-4-7 if it decides to execute the handshake conference advance notice, and shifts the process to step S1307-4-12 if it decides not to execute the handshake conference advance notice.

  In step S1307-4-7, the sub CPU 102a determines the final display mode of the icon in the case of executing the handshake meeting advance notice, specifically, the final color of the handshake meeting advance notice main character constituting the handshake meeting advance target changing icon In order to determine the final display mode of the icon, the random number for the final notice of the handshake meeting indicated by the random number counter for icon final display mode determination provided in the sub RAM 102c is acquired.

  In step S1307-4-8, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon final display mode determination table (refer to FIG. 55) for handshake party notice for performing icon final display mode determination for handshake party advance notice. The icon final display mode determination for handshake meeting notice is performed to determine the icon final display mode for handshake meeting advance notice by collating the icon final display mode determination random number acquired in step S1307-4-7 in the table.

  The icon final display mode determination table for handshake party notice shown in FIG. 55 is associated with the pre-judgment result of the start opening prize winning designation command which is the target of the present start opening prize winning process and the current first special view pending number (U1) It is done. Therefore, when sub CPU 102a selects the icon final display mode determination table for handshake party advance notice, the prior determination indicated by the start opening winning combination designation command which is the target of the processing of this start opening winning combination stored in sub RAM 102c. The result and the number of first starting opening winning combination designation commands stored in the first effect information suspension storage area of the sub RAM 102c are referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a plurality of icon final display modes are provided in the icon final display mode determination table for handshake party notices associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special view reservation number (U1), An icon final display mode determination value is stored in association with each icon final display mode so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 55 is obtained.

  In addition, the "final color pattern" described in the icon final display mode determination table for handshake party advance notice is used when selecting the speech frequency determination table used in the speech frequency determination to be described later, and when the starting opening prize is won It is identification information in which the number of first special view reservations and the icon final display mode are associated with each other as a result of the preliminary determination indicated by the starting opening winning combination designation command according to the process. Therefore, the icon final display mode is determined by the icon final display mode determination for the handshake meeting advance notice.

  In step S1307-4-9, the sub CPU 102a determines the number of lines to determine the number of lines appearing in the handshake meeting advance notice, the number of lines indicated by the line number determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. Get the judgment random number.

  In step S1307-4-10, the sub CPU 102a selects the dialog number determination table (see FIG. 56) for notifying the handshake meeting for determining the number of segments, and sets the selected table in step S1307-4-9. The number of speeches for determining the number of speeches for notifying the handshake meeting is determined by collating the acquired speech number judgment random numbers.

  The speech frequency determination table shown in FIG. 56 is a table for determining the speech frequency, and is associated with the final color pattern associated with the icon final display mode. Therefore, when selecting the speech number determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the final color pattern derived as the determination result of the icon final display mode determination for the handshake party notice in step S1307-4-8.

  Each speech frequency determination table associated with the final color pattern is provided with the speech frequency, and the speech frequency judgment value appropriately corresponds to each speech frequency so that the selectivity (%) shown in FIG. 56 is obtained. It is attached and stored. Therefore, the number of words is determined by the determination of the number of words for notifying the handshake meeting.

  In step S1307-4-11, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table (see FIG. 57) for handshake party notice, and collates the final color pattern and the number of words in the selected table. The icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the icon display mode when the handshake meeting advance notice is executed is determined.

  “Icon display mode scenario judgment TBL. No for handshake party notice in advance” described in the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table shown in FIG. 57 is a handshake used in icon presentation mode scenario judgment for handshake party notice described later. It is identification information of the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for the meeting advance notice, and the final color pattern and the number of speeches related to the number of speech times determination are associated with each other. Therefore, by comparing the final color pattern and the number of speeches, the icon display mode scenario determination table for notice of handshake meeting is determined.

  In step S1307-4-12, sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for handshake meeting advance notice for determining an icon display mode scenario when a handshake meeting advance is executed. By collating the random number for icon display mode scenario determination acquired in step S1307-2 with the selected determination table, the icon display mode scenario for handshake party notice for determining the icon display mode scenario for handshake party notice is performed.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for notice of handshake meeting shown in FIG. 58 is a table for judging the icon display mode scenario when the notice of handshake meeting is executed, and icon display mode scenario judgment for notice of handshake meeting TBL. It is associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake party advance notice, the icon display manner scenario decision TBL. For handshake party advance notice determined in step S1307-4-11. See No.

  As shown in FIG. 58, icon display mode scenario determination TBL. In the icon display mode scenario determination table for notice of each handshake meeting associated with No, an icon display mode scenario for notice of the handshake meeting is provided, and each handshake meeting notice so as to have a preset selection rate. The icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately stored in association with the icon display mode scenario for the user. In the present embodiment, the number of icon display mode scenarios provided in the icon display mode scenario determination table for notice of each handshake meeting varies, and in the icon display mode scenario determination table for notice of each handshake meeting, The icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately associated with the icon display mode scenario for notice of each handshake meeting so that the selection rate of each icon display mode scenario provided in the icon display mode scenario determination table becomes uniform. It is assumed that

  FIG. 58 is an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for a handshake meeting advance notice. "At the time of winning" described in the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting advance notice, "1 before change → the change" and "the first (corresponding (line))", "the second (corresponding) (line)" The words “the third time” and “the fourth (fourth)” indicate the timing at which the icon display mode changes due to the handshake meeting advance notice.

  As described above, the number of lines that can appear from a predetermined character in one handshake meeting advance notice is 1 to 4 times, and "the first (corresponding line)" indicates the appearance of the first speech in the handshake meeting advance notice. Represents the second appearance of the line in the handshake meeting advance notice, and the third related to the speech form indicates the third appearance of the speech in the handshake meeting advance, The (4th line) indicates the appearance of the 4th line in the notice of the handshake meeting.

  "White" for "at the time of winning" described in FIG. 58 represents that it is displayed in the fourth special aspect 21 of white suddenly when the handshake meeting advance notice target holding icon is displayed at the time of winning. . On the other hand, “white” for “1 before change → that change” is that during the winning, the handshake meeting notice target pending icon displayed in the normal mode is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the shake meeting notice target changing When becoming an icon, it indicates that the icon during the handshake event advance notice changing is displayed in the fourth special aspect 11 in white.

  In addition, “̃Successful success” described in FIG. 58 indicates that the change to the color applicable to “̃” of “Successful success” is successful, and “Failure failure” refers to the “Successive success” The change to the color that applies to "~" of "煽 successfully" fails, specifically, it tries to change to the color that applies to "〜", but represents that it returns to the color before the change in the middle of the change . In the present embodiment, the color change is performed from the lower end to the upper end of the handshake party notice main character.

  For example, in the icon display mode scenario "120" for notice of handshake meeting, the handshake meeting advance notice target pending icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the part of the person is white) is displayed at the time of winning, When it is shifted to the fluctuating icon display area 142 and becomes a handshake meeting notice target fluctuating icon, it becomes a handshake meeting notice subject fluctuating icon of the fourth special mode 11 (the handshake meeting main character is white), Triggered by the appearance of the first line, the color of the handshake meeting protagonist changes to green after the hail presentation of whether or not the color of the handshake meeting protagonist of the icon of the handshake meeting preview object is changing to green is performed, Triggered by the appearance of the second line, the handshake party protagonist's color changes to red after the pitching effect of whether or not the color of the handshake party main body changes to red, and is triggered by the appearance of the third line To the handshake partner The color of the handshake meeting main character changes to the zebra pattern after the turn production of whether or not the color of the color changes to the zebra pattern, and the color of the handshake meeting main character becomes iridescent triggered by the appearance of the fourth dialog It represents the contents of the presentation in which the color of the handshake meeting main character changes to iridescent after the change production of whether it changes or not is performed.

  In addition, the icon display scenario “122” for notice of handshake meeting notices that the handshake meeting notice target pending icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the part of the person is white) is displayed at the time of winning, the said handshake meeting notice target pending icon When it is shifted to the fluctuating icon display area 142 and becomes a handshake meeting notice target fluctuating icon, it becomes a handshake meeting notice target fluctuating icon of the fourth special mode 12 (the handshake meeting protagonist is green), Triggered by the appearance of the first dialogue, the handshake party protagonist's color changes to red after the pitching effect of whether or not the color of the handshake meeting hero changes to red, and the second appearance of the dialogue is triggered Then, after the pitching production of whether or not the color of the handshake party main character changes to the zebra pattern is performed, the color of the handshake association main character returns to red without changing to the zebra pattern, triggered by the appearance of the third line , The color of the handshake party main character After being turned to a bra pattern, it turns red without changing to a zebra pattern, and the color of the main character of the handshake event changes to iridescent, triggered by the appearance of the fourth dialogue. It represents the contents of the presentation in which the color of the handshake meeting main character changes to rainbow after the ghost production is performed.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 102a performs the handshake event notification icon display mode scenario determination in step S1307-4-12, the handshake event notification icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result is displayed. The data is stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The storage of the handshake event preview icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting opening winning combination designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-4-13, the sub CPU 102a does not execute the pre-reading zone effect and the like, and further displays the final display mode of the icon (hereinafter referred to as "the icon final display mode for normal use") when the handshake meeting advance notice is not performed. In order to perform the normal icon final display mode determination for determination, the normal icon final display mode determination random number indicated by the normal icon final display mode determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c is acquired.

  In step S1307-4-14, the sub CPU 102a selects the normal icon final display mode determination table for performing the normal icon final display mode determination, and sets the selected table to the selected table in step S1307-4-13. The icon final display mode determination for normal use for determining the icon final display mode for normal use is performed by collating the acquired random number for icon final display mode determination for use in normal mode.

  The icon final display mode determination table for normal use is associated with the pre-judgment result of the starting opening winning combination designation command which is the target of the processing at the time of starting opening winning and the current first special drawing reservation number (U1) reference). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102 a selects the icon final display mode determination table for normal use, the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning combination designation command, which is the target of the processing of this start opening winning, stored in the sub RAM 102 c The number of first starting opening winning combination designation commands stored in the first effect information suspension storage area of the sub RAM 102c is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of icon final display modes are provided in the normal icon final display mode determination table associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special view reserve number (U1). An icon final display mode determination value is stored in association with each icon final display mode so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG.

  In addition, “Normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No.” described in the normal icon final display mode determination table of FIG. 59 is used when selecting the normal icon display mode scenario determination table described later. Used for Therefore, the icon final display mode is determined by the icon final display mode determination for normal use, and the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use is determined.

  In the step S1307-4-15, the sub CPU 102a does not execute the pre-reading zone effect or the like, and further performs the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal mode for performing the icon display mode scenario determination when the handshake meeting advance notice is not performed. 60) is selected, and the icon display mode scenario for ordinary use is determined by collating the random number for icon display mode scenario determination acquired in step S1307-2 with the selected table and determining the icon display mode scenario for normal use. Do.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use shown in FIG. 60 is a table for determining an icon display mode scenario when the pre-reading zone effect or the like is not executed and the handshake meeting advance notice is not executed, and is stored in the sub RAM 102c. The number of first starting opening winning specified commands stored in the first effect information pending storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning specified command that is the target of the starting opening winning processing, , Normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL.1 associated with the normal icon final display mode. It is associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use, the icon display mode for normal use derived as the determination result of the icon final display mode determination for normal use in step S1307-4-13. Determination scenario determination TBL. See No.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. Each normal icon display mode scenario determination table associated with No is provided with a normal icon display mode scenario, and each normal icon display mode scenario is set to have a preset selection rate. The icon display mode scenario determination values are appropriately stored in association with each other. In the present embodiment, the number of icon display mode scenarios provided in each normal icon display mode scenario determination table is various, and in each normal icon display mode scenario determination table, the icon display mode scenario It is assumed that an icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately associated with each normal icon display mode scenario so that the selection rate of each icon display mode scenario provided in the determination table becomes uniform.

  FIG. 60 is an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use. “When winning”, “2 before change → 1 before change”, “1 before change”, “1 before change → the change” and “the change” are described in the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use. It represents the timing at which the icon display mode changes.

  “Throwing kiss notice success” described in FIG. 60 indicates that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon is changed when a throwing kiss notice described later is performed. Further, “Tossing Kiss Notice Failure 1” indicates that a tossing kiss notice to be described later is performed, but the display mode of the hold icon or the variation icon does not change. Furthermore, “Tossing Kiss Notice 2” indicates that a tossing kiss notice to be described later is to be made, but the tossing kiss notice is not executed.

  In addition, in the parenthesis following “Tossing Kiss Notice Success” described in FIG. 60, the display mode of the holding icon or the changing icon that changes according to the throwing kiss notice is shown.

  For example, the icon display mode scenario "70" for normal use is displayed when the winning icon of the second special mode is displayed at the time of winning, and the special symbol one special symbol after the end of the variation display of the special symbol of the second preceding variation. When the variable display of is started, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second special mode 11, and the display mode of the hold icon is the second special mode in the throwing kiss preview in the change display of the special symbol one before. It is effect content that changes to 12 and the display mode of the holding icon changes to the second special mode 13 when the change is started after the fluctuation display of the previous special symbol is ended.

  In the icon display mode scenario “73” for normal use, the hold icon of the normal mode is displayed at the time of winning, and in the fluctuation display of the special symbol one before the change, the display mode of the hold icon is 2 While trying to change to special mode 11, when the change ends in failure, the normal mode remains, and the fluctuation is started after the fluctuation display of the previous special symbol is ended, The display mode is changed to the second special mode 12, and in the variation, the display mode of the changing icon is changed to the second special mode 13 at the notice of throwing kiss.

  When the sub CPU 102 a performs the normal icon display mode scenario determination in step S 1307-4-15, the normal icon display mode scenario data indicating the normal icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result is displayed in the sub RAM 102 c. It stores in the effect information pending storage area. The storage of the icon display mode scenario data for normal use is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting opening winning a prize designation command in step S1307-1.

  In the present embodiment, the first special mode is set as a display mode of the icon for normal use when neither pre-reading zone effect nor handshake meeting advance is given. As the first special mode, one type of display mode in which the shape is circular and the color blinks white is set, but in addition to this, as in the second special mode 11 to the second special mode 15, the color is A plurality of types of changing first special modes can also be set.

  In this case, for example, the first special aspect 11 is a display mode in which the shape is a circle and the color is white and the display mode is circular and the display is a first color in a first color. A mode is a first special mode 13, a display mode of a circular shape and a color is a zebra pattern, a first special mode 14, and a display mode of a circular shape and an iridescent color is a first special mode 15. The first special mode in which the icon is to be displayed can be determined based on whether or not the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning a prize designation command related to the icon is a jackpot.

  In this case, the jackpot winning expectation according to the first special aspect 11 to the first special aspect 15 is the same as the second special aspect, the first special aspect 11 <first special aspect 12 <first special aspect 13 <first It can also be made to become higher in the order of special aspect 14 <first special aspect 15. Then, when changing the display mode of the icon to the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15, it is in the stage (so-called "prefetching stage") in which the icon is displayed as a hold icon before it becomes a fluctuating icon When the icon is displayed as the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 141), it can be easily changed to the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15.

(Processing process setting process of production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1310-1, sub CPU 102a selects the effect mode determination table (see FIG. 65) for setting the effect mode, and in step S1310-2, the gaming state stored in sub RAM 102 c, the number of remaining time saving, high Check the number of remaining probabilities.

  The effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 65 is a table for determining the effect mode, and gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state, non time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state), time remaining count, high probability The remaining number, presentation mode, presentation mode flag are associated.

  In step 1310-3, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode by collating the gaming state, the number of time remaining, and the high probability remaining number in the selected effect mode setting table, and determines the effect mode determined in step S1310-4. The corresponding effect mode flag (00H to 02H) is set (stored) in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process is ended.

(Process of determining the display pattern stop of the presentation control board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c to confirm the current effect mode, and is associated with the current effect mode. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination table is selected. This is because the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern representing the combination (arrangement) of the effect symbols on the predetermined effective line in the stop display of the effect symbols is divided by the effect mode It is.

  In step S1312-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the effect symbol specification command stored in the effect symbol specification command region of the effect data area of the sub RAM 102c. This is because each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table divided by the effect mode is further divided by the effect symbol designation command. In step S1312-3, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 66-1) associated with the effect symbol specification command analyzed in step S1307-2 is selected. Sub CPU102a acquires the random number value which the random number counter which relates to the random number for production design stop indicatory pattern decision in step S1312-4 shows.

  In each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table, one or more effect symbol stop display patterns are stored in association with the effect symbol stop display pattern determination value, for example, as shown in FIG. 66-1 (a) As described above, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination value is appropriately allocated to the effect symbol stop display pattern so as to achieve a preset selection rate.

  In step S1312-5, the sub CPU 102a checks the random number for effect pattern stop display pattern determination acquired in step S1312-4 against the effect pattern stop display pattern determination table selected in step S1312-3 and stops the effect symbol pattern. The effect pattern stop display pattern determination for determining the display pattern is performed, and the effect pattern stop display pattern is determined.

  In step S1312-6, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern determined in step S1312-5 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312-7, the effect symbol The effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the stop display pattern is set in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. And when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the stop indication of the effect symbol based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command is displayed. It is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the effect information information storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1312-8, and the variation effect corresponding to the stop display of the effect design according to the main effect symbol stop display pattern determination process in step S1312-9 In the variation effect to be performed, it is confirmed whether or not zone turning effect is performed. If it is determined that the zone turning effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1312-10, and if it is determined that the zone turning effect is not to be executed, the present symbol design stop display pattern determination process is ended.

  In step S1312-10, the sub CPU 102a uses the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 66-1) for zone effect effects stored in the sub ROM 102b to produce effect symbol stop display patterns for zone effect effects. Make a decision. As shown in FIG. 66-1 (b), in the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for zone effect, the type (type) of zone effect effects corresponds to the special symbol used for the stop indication of the effect symbol. It is attached and stored.

  In step S1312-11, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop display control command for zone turning effect corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern determined in 1312-10 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  Note that the effect symbol stop display control command for zone turning effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command for the zone turning effect, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the effect based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command The stop display of the symbol (special symbol) is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 prior to the stop display of the effect symbol based on the above normal effect symbol stop display control command.

  Therefore, the special symbol related to the turning effect is stopped and displayed in the turning success effect with respect to the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140. On the other hand, the special symbol relating to the turning effect is stopped and displayed for the left side area and the right side area of the display unit 140 in the turning failure effect 1, and the normal area determined in step S1312-5 for the center area. The effect pattern will be stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the failure-in-reproduction 2, the special symbol relating to the rotation-reproduction is stopped and displayed on the left side area of the display unit 140, and the normal effect determined in step S1312-5 for the center area and the right-side area. The symbol will be stopped and displayed.

(Pre-reading zone effect start judgment processing of effect control board)
The pre-reading zone effect start determination processing by the effect control board 102 will be described using FIG.

  In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the prefetch zone effect scenario indicated by the prefetch zone effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c in the step S1314-1, and executes the real prefetch zone effect execution in step S1314-2. It is determined whether or not the prefetch zone effect is to be executed by the (current) change effect corresponding to the special image change pattern designating command according to the determination process. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1314-3 if it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed, and ends the real pre-reading zone effect start determination processing if it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect is not to be performed.

  In step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the prefetch zone effect control command corresponding to the prefetch zone effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-4, performs the icon effect control command for prefetch zone effect in the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer of

  The prefetch zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the pre-reading zone effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the pre-reading zone effect to be executed in the current fluctuation effect and when the pre-reading zone effect control command is not received The pre-reading zone effect is not executed in the fluctuation effect of.

  In addition, the icon effect control command for prefetch zone effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When receiving the icon effect control command for the pre-reading zone effect, the image control board 105 changes the pre-reading zone effect notification mode to the pre-reading zone effect notification mode when the display mode of the icon currently displayed is not the pre-reading zone effect notification mode. The image control board 105 continues the pre-reading zone effect notification mode if the icon is already displayed in the pre-reading zone effect notification mode when the pre-reading zone effect icon effect control command is received.

(Variation effect pattern determination process of effect control board)
The fluctuation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1315-1, the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect information of the sub RAM 102c are referred to the pre-read zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area, and the current effect mode and Confirm the read ahead zone presentation scenario.

  In step S 1315-2, a variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 67 to 72) associated with the current effect mode and the prefetch zone effect scenario is selected. This is because the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for determining the effect content of the fluctuation effect is set in association with the effect mode (rendering modes A to C) and the pre-reading zone effect scenario.

  As shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. 72, in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with each effect mode, the selection result by the determination result of the big hit determination, the special figure variation pattern specification command, the random number for variation effect pattern determination %), The type of the selected fluctuation effect pattern, the fluctuation effect control command corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern, the time of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern, and the contents of the fluctuation effect.

  The fluctuation effect pattern is an effect aspect of the fluctuation effect, and the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the illumination device 16 for effect, the role device 17 for effect, and the feature device for movement are determined by determining the fluctuation effect pattern. The specific effect contents (aspect) of the fluctuation effect performed by the effect button device 18 will also be determined. For example, in the effect contents of the change production in the image display device 14, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the production design (presence or absence of pseudo continuous production), the presence or absence of reach production, the contents of reach production, component elements of fluctuation production such as presentation development configuration Are associated. The details of the variation production pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1315-3, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special view fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-4, the random number counter related to the fluctuation effect pattern determination random number The random number value to be shown is acquired, and in step S1315-5, the variation presentation pattern determination table selected in step S1315-2 is compared with the determination result of the big hit determination, the special figure variation pattern specification command, and the variation presentation pattern determination random number. Determine the fluctuation presentation pattern.

  In step S1315-6, the sub CPU 102a sets a change effect control command corresponding to the determined change effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-7, the change effect time which is the effect time of the change effect The variation representation timer counter of the sub RAM 102c is set, and in step S1315-8, variation representation data corresponding to the variation representation pattern is set in the variation representation data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the fluctuation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect device such as the image display device 14 to execute the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the command.

  In addition, the fluctuation effect timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in the above-mentioned step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed after the variation effect is started, by the variation effect timer counter.

(Variation production pattern judgment table)
FIG. 67 to FIG. 72 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variation effect pattern. 67 to FIG. 70 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode A, FIG. 71 is a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode B, and FIG. 72 is a variation for effect mode C It is a figure which shows a presentation pattern determination table.

  67 is a table selected at the time of non-execution of zone precursor effect and pre-reading zone effect among the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for effect mode A, and FIG. FIG. 68 (b) is a table selected at the time of execution, and FIG. 68 (b) is a table selected at the time of execution of zone turning failure effect 2; FIG. 69 is at the time of execution of zone turning success effect (entry to prefetch zone effect) FIG. 70 is a table to be selected, and FIG. 70 is a table to be selected during execution of the pre-reading zone effect.

  Here, each of the terms described in the effect content of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 67 to 72 will be described.

  "No simulated resemblance" is a simulated resemblance (whether the occurrence of a simulated rendering is expected) as to whether or not the combination of the rendering symbols (hereinafter referred to as a "simulated rendering") indicating the occurrence of the simulated rendering is temporarily stopped. It means not performing the rendition. "Pseudo snarl failure" means that the pseudo stern effect is executed but the pseudo run is not temporarily stopped. The "simulation resemblance success" means that a simulation resemblance is temporarily stopped by execution of a simulation resemblance effect. "Pseudo reunion" means that re-variation of the temporary stopped production pattern is executed.

Here, the pseudo run is a combination of effect symbols that are temporarily stopped when the pseudo run effect occurs.
In the present embodiment, a pseudo run such as a combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 “1” “1” “7” or a combination “3” “3” “7” is set (FIG. a), (b)).
In addition, these pseudo run is not displayed as a stop (including a temporary stop display) except when a pseudo run effect occurs. For example, in the variation effect when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, it is not displayed as a stop in the pseudo run as a combination of effect design symbols that are finally displayed as a stop.

  "Leach beat failure" means that reach beat production is performed whether reach production is performed or not, but reach production is not performed without reach being established. The "reach reach success" means that reach reach production is executed, reach is established, and reach production is executed.

  The “shortened fluctuation” means that a shortened fluctuation presentation is performed in which the presentation time (variation time) is shorter than the normal fluctuation (6 seconds or 8 seconds) and no reach occurs. The "ultra-shortening fluctuation" means that the ultra-shortening fluctuation presentation in which the rendering time (the fluctuation time) is shorter than the shortening fluctuation presentation (2 seconds or 4 seconds) and the reach is not generated.

  "N reach" means that normal reach production is performed. “N reach (transition effect)” indicates development to normal reach effect and SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect (executed in the process of developing to SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect) transition effect (development effect) Means to be performed. “N reach (transition / return effect)” means that normal reach effect and transition effect are executed but return effect is not executed to develop SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect.

  "SP reach 1" means that the first SP reach effect which is a kind of dedicated (unique) SP reach effect in the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. “SP reach 2” means that a second SP reach effect, which is a type of dedicated (unique) SP reach effect in the effect mode A (normal game state), is executed. Note that the second SP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the first SP reach effect.

  “SP reach 3” means that the third SP reach effect, which is a type of dedicated (unique) SP reach effect in the effect mode B (probable variation gaming state), is executed. "SP reach 4" means that the 4th SP reach production which is a kind of exclusive (unique) SP reach production in production mode B (probability change gaming state) is performed. Note that the fourth SP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the third SP reach effect.

  "SP reach 5" means that the 5th SP reach production which is 1 type of exclusive (unique) SP reach production in production mode C (low probability time short game state) is performed. "SP reach 6" means that the sixth SP reach effect which is a kind of dedicated (unique) SP reach effect in the effect mode C (low probability time short game state) is executed. Note that the sixth SP reach effect is set so that the expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the fifth SP reach effect.

  “SPSP reach 1” means that the first SPSP reach effect, which is a type of dedicated (unique) SPSP reach effect in the effect mode A (normal game state), is executed. “SPSP reach 2” means that the second SPSP reach effect, which is a type of dedicated (unique) SPSP reach effect in the effect mode A (normal game state), is executed. In addition, the second SPSP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) becomes higher than the first SPSP reach effect.

  “SPSP reach 3” means that the third SPSP reach effect, which is a type of dedicated (unique) SPSP reach effect in the effect mode B (probability change gaming state), is executed. “SPSP reach 4” means that the fourth SPSP reach effect, which is a type of dedicated (unique) SPSP reach effect in the effect mode B (probability change gaming state), is executed. Note that the fourth SPSP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the third SPSP reach effect.

  "SPSP reach 5" means that the 5th SPSP reach production which is 1 type of SPSP reach production for exclusive use (specificity) in production mode C (low probability time short game state) is performed. “SPSP reach 6” means that the sixth SPSP reach effect, which is a type of dedicated (specific) SPSP reach effect in the effect mode C (low probability time short game state), is executed. Note that the sixth SPSP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the fifth SPSP reach effect.

  In “ST effect 1”, a first step effect (first indication effect), which is the first step of a story effect (indication effect) consisting of a plurality of steps (steps), is performed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 Means The "ST effect 2" means that the second step effect (the second indication effect), which is the second step of the story effect, is performed. "ST effect 3" means that the third step effect (third indication effect), which is the final step of the story effect, is performed.

  In addition, the story production has a high expectation that the jackpot is won by the step production progressing to the next and subsequent step production along with the temporary stop and re-variation (special production) of the production pattern in the pseudo-series production Suggestive (expecting the execution of a special game) It is an advance notice, and suggests that the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than when the story effect is not executed (expecting the execution of the special game) It is a kind. In addition, the degree of expectation for winning the special game when each step effect of the story effect is executed, 1st step effect (ST effect 1) <second step effect (ST effect 2) <third step effect ( It is ST production 3).

  In addition, during ST effect 1 execution, the illumination effect that each lamp emits blue light is performed by the effect illumination device 16, and during ST effect 2 the illumination effect that each lamp emits green light by the effect illumination device 16 While the ST effect 3 is being performed, the effect illumination device 16 performs an illumination effect in which each lamp emits red light. The expectation for winning the special game based on the light emission color of the light effect during the story effect is blue <green <red. That is, according to the number of steps of the story effect, the light emission color of each lamp by the effect lighting device 16 is gradually changed to the light emission color having a high degree of expectation of winning the special game. With this configuration, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be effectively enhanced by the progress of the story presentation (step-up), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The "ST effect 1 dedicated reach" is a dedicated (specific) reach effect executed when developing to reach after the execution of ST effect 1. The “ST effect 2 dedicated reach” is a dedicated (specific) reach effect executed when developing to reach after the execution of ST effect 2. The “ST effect 3 dedicated reach” is a dedicated (specific) reach effect executed when developing to reach after the execution of ST effect 3. In other words, the degree of expectation of being selected for the special game when each reach of the ST effects 1 to 3 dedicated reach is executed is the ST effect 1 dedicated reach <ST effect 2 dedicated reach <ST effect 3 dedicated reach .

  In “CD effect 1”, the first step effect (first indication effect), which is the first step of the countdown effect (indication effect) consisting of a plurality of steps (steps), is performed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 Means “CD effect 2” means that a second step effect (second predictive effect), which is the second step of the countdown effect, is performed. “CD effect 3” means that the third step effect (third indication effect), which is the final step of the countdown effect, is performed.

  In addition, countdown production is that the expectation that the jackpot is won is high by the step production progressing to the next and subsequent step production along with the temporary stop and re-variation (special production) of the production pattern in the pseudo-series production Suggestive (expecting the execution of a special game) is a notice effect, and suggests that the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than when the countdown effect is not executed (it is expected to execute the special game) It is a kind. In addition, the degree of expectation that has been won in the special game when each step effect of the countdown effect is executed, (first step effect (CD effect 1) <) second step effect (CD effect 2) <third step It is a production (CD production 3).

In addition, during the execution of the CD effect 1, an illumination effect in which each lamp emits blue light is performed by the effect illumination device 16, and an illumination effect in which each lamp emits green light by the effect illumination device 16 while the CD effect 2 is performed. While the CD effect 3 is being performed, the effect illumination device 16 performs an illumination effect in which each lamp emits red light. Note that the degree of expectation of winning the special game based on the light emission color of the light effect during the countdown effect is (blue <) green <red. That is, according to the number of steps of the countdown effect, the light emission color of each lamp by the effect lighting device 16 is gradually changed to the light emission color having a high degree of expectation of winning the special game. By doing this, it is possible to effectively boost the player's expectation for the jackpot by progress (step-up) of the countdown effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the first step effect (CD effect 1) and the fact that () is attached to blue do not end in the first step effect (CD effect 1) when the countdown effect is executed, and must , And the second step effect (CD effect 2) is to be performed.

  “Zone turning failure 1” means that a zone turning failure effect 1 is executed asking whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed. “Zone turning failure 2” means that a zone turning failure effect 2 is performed to ask whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is to be performed. The “zone-turn success” means that a zone-turn success effect for notifying (presence) that a pre-reading zone effect is to be performed is performed.

  The “zone effect” means that the first zone effect of the prefetch zone effect is performed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The “thermal zone effect” means that the second zone effect of the pre-reading zone effect is performed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  In addition, pre-reading zone production is pre-reading announcement production which expects big hit winning by executing zone production over 1 or multiple fluctuation production (the fluctuation indication of the special symbol), expectation degree where special game is executed is It is a kind of indication effect that suggests high. Further, the expectation for winning the special game when each pre-reading zone effect is executed is the first zone effect <the second zone effect.

  As described above, the image display apparatus 14 is executed by setting a dedicated variation effect pattern in each variation effect pattern determination table or setting various effects to be performed at different rates. The effect mode of the variable effect is different for each effect mode (playing state). It should be noted that the types of the variation effect patterns executed in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state may be the same, and the types of the variation effect patterns executed in the normal gaming state and the low probability time short gaming state may be the same. Alternatively, the types of variation effect patterns executed in the probability variation gaming state and the low probability time minor gaming state may be the same.

  As a first feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, if the presentation time (variation time) is the same variation presentation pattern, the simulation is more simulated than the fluctuation presentation pattern The point is that the variation presentation pattern in which the series presentation is executed has a higher expectation (a special game is executed) in which the jackpot is won. By doing this, it is possible to boost the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-series effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, if the presentation time (variation time) is the same variation presentation pattern, the pseudo-series rendering is executed without the story presentation. The point is that the expectation level of the jackpot (special game is executed) is higher in the fluctuation effect pattern in which the pseudo-series effect is executed with the story effect than the fluctuation effect pattern. By doing this, the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not the pseudo-series effect involves a story effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a third feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, if the presentation time (variation time) is the same variation presentation pattern, the pseudo-series production is executed without the countdown performance. The point is that the expectation level of the jackpot (special game is executed) is higher in the fluctuation effect pattern in which the pseudo connected effect is executed with the countdown effect than the fluctuation effect pattern. By doing this, it is possible to boost the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-series effect involves a countdown effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a fourth feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, if the presentation time (variation time) is the same variation presentation pattern, the pseudo-series rendering is executed with the story presentation The point is that the expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher in the change effect pattern in which the pseudo connected effect is executed with the countdown effect than the change effect pattern. By doing this, it is possible to boost the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not the pseudo-series effect involves either a story effect or a countdown effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  As a fifth feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, as the variation presentation pattern, the transition presentation is executed after the story presentation is executed, and the specific reach presentation (ST production 1 to Transition presentation is executed after the first story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern developing to 3 dedicated reach presentation) and story presentation is executed, but transition presentation is executed after returning to story presentation by execution of return presentation And the second story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern that is developed to the specific reach presentation is set. By doing this, it is possible to execute a novel fluctuation effect unlike before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a sixth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, as the fluctuation production pattern, the transition effect is executed after the countdown effect is executed, and the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach) After the countdown effect is executed, the transition effect is executed, but after the return effect is executed, the transition effect is executed and then the transition effect is executed and specified. The point in which the 2nd countdown false change production pattern which develops to reach production is set is mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to execute a novel fluctuation effect unlike before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a seventh feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, the second story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern is larger than the first story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern and the special game is executed High expectations). By doing this, it is possible to stimulate the player's expectation for whether it is the first story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern or the second story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern when the story production is executed, and the fun of the game It is possible to improve the

  As an eighth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, the second countdown pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern is larger than the first countdown pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern and the special game is executed High expectations). By doing this, when the countdown effect is executed, the player's expectation for whether it is the first countdown simulated fluctuation effect pattern or the second countdown simulated fluctuation effect pattern can be heightened, and the fun of the game It is possible to improve the

  As a ninth feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, the more stage of step production in the story production, the higher the reach effect (the special game is executed) the high degree of expectation Is being implemented. By doing this, it is possible to boost the player's expectation of how many times the step effect is performed when the story effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a tenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, in the countdown effect, the countdown effect does not end in the first step effect (CD effect 1), and always the second step There is a point that the effect (CD effect 2) is to be executed. By doing this, the countdown does not end in one time, so it is easy for the player to recognize what kind of effect is being performed, and the effect of the countdown effect can be improved. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a first feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, as a variation presentation pattern, transition presentation is performed after zone presentation is performed, and thus specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation) is performed. The transition zone production is executed after the zone zone effect is executed, and the transition zone presentation is executed by the return zone effect being executed, and then the transition zone effect is executed and the specific reach stage effect is executed. After the transition effect is executed after the transition effect is executed after the transition effect is executed after the zone effect is executed, but the transition effect is executed after the transition effect is executed, and further, After the return effect is executed, the transition effect is executed after returning to the zone effect, and a third zone simulated change effect pattern is established that develops into a specific reach effect. It includes that it is. By doing this, it is possible to execute a novel fluctuation effect unlike before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the second zone pseudo variation presentation pattern is larger than the above-described first zone pseudo variation presentation pattern and the special game is executed (the special game is executed The expectation is high, and the third zone simulated fluctuation presentation pattern has a higher expectation for a jackpot win than the second zone simulated fluctuation presentation pattern. By doing this, when the pre-reading zone effect is executed, it is the player for the first zone pseudo change effect pattern, the second zone pseudo change effect pattern or the third zone pseudo change effect pattern. It is possible to boost the sense of expectation and to improve the interest of the game.

  As a third feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the second zone pseudo variation presentation pattern is expected to win a big hit (special game is executed) than the first zone pseudo variation presentation pattern The degree is high, and the third zone simulated fluctuation presentation pattern has a higher expectation for a jackpot win than the second zone simulated fluctuation presentation pattern. By doing this, the player's expectation for whether it is the first zone simulated fluctuation presentation pattern, the second zone simulated fluctuation presentation pattern, or the third zone simulated fluctuation presentation pattern when zone effects are executed. The feeling can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a fourth feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, transition effect is executed after the first zone effect is executed, but return effect is executed to return to the second zone effect. After the transition effect is executed and the fourth zone simulated change effect pattern develops to the specific reach effect and the first zone effect is executed, the transition effect is executed, but the return effect is executed and the first zone After the transition effect is executed after returning to the effect, the return effect is further executed, and then the transition effect is executed after returning to the second zone effect There is a point that a rendering pattern is set. By doing this, it is possible to boost the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the zone effect promotion is performed with the return effect interposed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in each zone false fluctuation production pattern, it is supposed that it shifts to SP reach production after transition production (development) and then transitions to SPSP reach production (development), but it does not go through SP reach production after transition production The transition to SPSP reach production may be made to In addition, although zone effects (indication effects) are performed in the change effect pattern involving the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, the zone effect (indication effect) may be performed in the variable effect pattern without the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

  Also, although the zone precursor effect and the prefetch zone effect are not executed in the effect mode B (probability change gaming state) and the effect mode C (low probability time short game state), they are executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C Alternatively, it may be executed in the effect mode B or the effect mode C.

  In addition, the execution probability of zone precursor effect and prefetch zone effect may be made different in each effect mode, for example, zone precursor effect and the effect mode for the player in order to eliminate the annoyance of the player. In order to lower the execution probability of the pre-reading zone effect (effect mode A> effect mode B, effect mode A> effect mode C, effect mode A> effect mode C> effect mode B, etc.), or vice versa In order to further increase the player's sense of expectation, the execution probability of zone precursor effect and prefetch zone effect increases as the effect mode becomes more advantageous to the player (effect mode A <effect mode B, effect mode A <effect Mode C, effect mode A <effect mode C <effect mode B, etc.).

  Furthermore, only the pre-read zone effect may be performed without performing the zone precursor effect in each effect mode, or the zone precursor effect and the pre-read zone effect may be performed in some of the effect modes, but in the other effect modes Only the pre-reading zone effect may be performed. Even in this case, the execution probability of the prefetch zone effect in each effect mode may be different as described above.

(Effective design temporary stop display scenario table for pseudo-sequence effect)
66-2 is a figure which shows the production | presentation pattern temporary stop display scenario table for pseudo continuation effect. 66-2 (a) is a diagram showing a production symbol temporary stop display scenario table for pseudo-series effect in the zone effect and countdown effect, FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram for pseudo-sequence effect in the story effect It is a figure which shows a production | presentation symbol temporary stop display scenario table.

  In the effect pattern temporary stop display scenario table for the pseudo series effect, the number of times of pseudo fluctuation, the effect pattern temporary stop display scenario for the pseudo series effect (the effect pattern temporary stop display scenario contents for the pseudo series effect), and the big hit winning expectation Degrees are associated.

  As a first feature of the effect pattern temporary stop display scenario table for the pseudo continuous effect in the zone effect and the countdown effect shown in FIG. 66-2 (a), in the zone effect and the countdown effect, the effect pattern is temporarily stop displayed a plurality of times When it is done (scenarios 05 to 13), there is a point that the same pseudo sequence effect symbols are displayed temporarily for stop each time. For example, in the case of scenario 13, in the first temporary stop display, the effect symbols of the combination of "3", "3" and "7" are displayed temporarily stop, and similarly in the second and third temporary stop displays. "The effect design of the combination of" 3 "" 7 "is displayed temporarily stop. By doing this, the countdown effect becomes an effect with a sense of unity, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the effect symbol temporary stop display scenario table for the pseudo continuous effect in the zone effect and the countdown effect shown in FIG. 66-2 (a), the jackpot expectation is different depending on the color of the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2 There is a point that In detail, in the same number of times of pseudo fluctuation, the colors of the rendering symbols TZ1 and TZ2 are in the order of blue <green <red, and the jackpot winning expectation is high. For example, scenario 03 (“1 (green)” “1 (green)” “7 (red)”) is better than scenario 02 (“4 (blue)” “4 (blue)” “7 (red)”) Also the jackpot winning expectation is high. By doing this, it becomes possible for the player to focus not only on the display of the pseudo run but on the type of the pseudo run, and to improve the interest of the game.

  As a first feature of the effect symbol temporary stop display scenario table for the pseudo continuous effect in the story effect shown in FIG. 66-2 (b), in the case of the story effect, when the effect symbol is temporarily displayed for a plurality of times (scenario 05 to 22) There is a point that a pseudo-sequence effect symbol that is different each time is temporarily stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of scenario 13, in the first temporary stop display, the effect symbols of the combination of "2", "2" and "7" are displayed temporarily stop, and in the second temporary stop display, "6" "6" The effect symbol of the combination of "7" is displayed temporarily for a temporary stop, and in the third temporary stop display, the effect symbol for the combination of "8", "8" and "7" is displayed for a temporary stop. By doing this, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pseudo-sequence effect in the story effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the effect symbol temporary stop display scenario table for the pseudo continuous effect in the story effect shown in FIG. 66-2 (b), the jackpot expected degree is expected by the color of the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2 displayed temporarily stop There are different points. In detail, in the same number of times of pseudo fluctuation, the colors of the rendering symbols TZ1 and TZ2 are in the order of blue <green <red, and the jackpot winning expectation is high. For example, scenario 03 (“1 (green)” “1 (green)” “7 (red)”) is better than scenario 02 (“4 (blue)” “4 (blue)” “7 (red)”) Also the jackpot winning expectation is high. By doing this, it becomes possible for the player to focus not only on the display of the pseudo run but on the type of the pseudo run, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo-sequence to be displayed for temporary stop is determined according to the scenario, but the first temporary stop display, the second temporary stop display, and the third temporary stop display May be determined independently of each other.

  In addition, in the zone effect and countdown effect of the present embodiment, when the effect pattern is temporarily displayed a plurality of times, the same pseudo-sequence effect pattern is displayed temporarily in each time when the effect pattern is displayed temporarily. It may be made to display temporary stop production symbols of different pseudo-sequences, or be random each time (sometime the same pseudo-sequence may be in the first and second times, sometimes it may be different pseudo-sequences) It may be determined.

  In addition, in the story effect of this embodiment, when the effect pattern is temporarily displayed a plurality of times, the pseudo random effect effect pattern which is different each time is displayed temporarily, but as in zone effect and countdown effect, every time The same pseudo-sequence effect pattern may be displayed as a temporary stop, or it may be randomly selected each time (the first and second times, the same pseudo-sequence may be present, and the different pseudo-sequence may be presented). It may be determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation is made to differ depending on the color of the rendering symbol, but it may be made to differ depending on the type of the rendering symbol. For example, when odd symbols are temporarily displayed as the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the even symbols are temporarily stopped, or a special pseudo-sequence symbol is tentatively displayed. When the stop display is performed, the jackpot probability may be higher than when the pseudo run display is temporarily stopped.

(Operation production decision processing of production control board)
Next, the operation presentation determination process will be described using FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the fluctuation effect data stored in the fluctuation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1316- 1 and, in step S1316-2, the effects stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102 c An operation effect determination table (see FIG. 73) corresponding to the current effect mode specified by the mode flag is selected. This is because the operation effect pattern for determining the presence or absence of the execution of the operation effect and the contents of the effect is set in association with the effect mode (effect mode A to C).

  As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c), in the operation effect determination table associated with each effect mode, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate by the operation effect pattern determination random number, the selected operation The type of effect pattern and the effect content of the operation effect are associated with each other.

  The operation rendition pattern is the execution mode of the operation rendition, and by determining the operation rendition pattern, whether or not to perform the operation rendition or the operation rendition in the fluctuation rendition or at any timing (at the time) It is determined whether or not to execute the operation effect and the operation effect. Details of the operation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a acquires the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for operation effect pattern determination in step S1316-3, and changes the operation effect pattern in the operation effect pattern judgment table selected in step S1316-2 in step S1316-4. The operation effect pattern is determined by collating the operation effect pattern determination random numbers, and in step S1316-5, the determined operation effect pattern is set in the operation effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1316-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the determined operation effect pattern is an operation effect pattern for executing an operation effect (including operation effect resemblance) and that the operation effect pattern is to be executed. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S1316-7, and if it is determined that the operation effect pattern is not the one for executing the operation effect, the present operation effect determining process is ended.

  In step S1316-7, the sub CPU 102a selects an operation effect scenario determination table (see FIGS. 74 to 76) corresponding to the determined operation effect pattern. This is because the operation effect scenario for determining the scenario of the operation effect is set in association with the operation effect pattern.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in each operation effect scenario determination table, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the selection rate (%) by the operation effect scenario determination random number, the operation effect scenario to be selected, and the contents of the operation effect Are associated.

  The operation effect scenario is an effect mode of the operation effect, and the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect illumination device 16, the effect service device 17, and the operation product scenario are determined by the operation effect scenario being determined. The specific effect contents (aspect) of the operation effect turning and the operation effect performed by the effect button device 18 are also determined.

  For example, in the effect contents of the operation effect, the type of the operation effect is displayed on the image display device 14 to indicate (prediction) that the operation effect may be executed and / or the type of the operation effect to be executed. The type of promotion image for prompting the user to operate the operation button 18A (operation input), the light emission mode of the effect button 18A during display of the promotion image, and the operation mode of the operation effect executed by the operation of the operation button 18A are associated ing. The details of the operation effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76.

  In step S1316-8, sub CPU 102a acquires a random number value indicated by the random number counter relating to the random number for operation effect scenario determination, and in step S1316-9, the determination of the jackpot in the operation effect scenario determination table selected in step S1316-7. As a result, the operation effect scenario is determined by collating the operation effect scenario determination random numbers, and in step S1316-10, the determined operation effect scenario is set in the operation effect scenario storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The operation effect pattern set in the operation effect pattern storage area and the operation effect scenario set in the operation effect scenario storage area are referred to in the effect input control process of step S1500, and the operation effect and manipulation based on the operation effect scenario are performed. The effect is to be executed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 or the like.

(Operation presentation judgment table)
FIG. 73A to FIG. 73C are diagrams showing an operation effect pattern determination table to be referred to when determining an operation effect pattern. FIG. 73 (a) is an operation effect determination table for effect mode A, FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing an operation effect determination table for effect mode B, and FIG. 73 (c) is an effect mode It is a figure which shows the operation presentation determination table for C. FIG.

  In the effect contents of the operation effect determination table shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c), “N reach” means normal reach effect. “△” means that the operation effect lingering of the caste in which the operation effect is not performed is performed. "(Circle)" means that operation production turning and operation production in which operation production is performed are performed.

  As a first feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode A shown in FIG. 73 (a), the point is that the rate at which the operation effect resemblance of caste is executed decreases as the fluctuation effect pattern with a higher expectation of the big hit wins Be By doing this, the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot game is executed is less likely to be attenuated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a second feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode A shown in FIG. 73 (a), during the second normal reach effect, during SP reach effect, and during SPSP reach effect, operation effect turning of the cassette is not performed The point set to is mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without giving the player a sense of loss after the progression of the fluctuation has progressed to a certain extent.

  As a first feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode B shown in FIG. 73 (b), there is a point that the operation effect turning of the cassette is not performed. By doing this, it is possible to play the game without impairing the player's mood in the effect mode B (probability change gaming state) most advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

  As a first feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c), the point is that the rate at which the operation effect fluctuation of the caste is executed decreases as the fluctuation effect pattern with a higher expectation of the big hit wins Be By doing this, the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot game is executed is less likely to be attenuated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a second feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c), during the second normal reach effect, during SP reach effect, and during SPSP reach effect, operation effect turning of the cassette is not performed. The point set to is mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without giving the player a sense of loss after the progression of the fluctuation has progressed to a certain extent.

  As a third feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c), there is a point where the execution probability of operation effect circling with caste is lower than that of the operation effect determination table for effect mode A. By doing this, in the effect mode C (low probability time short game state) more advantageous to the player than the effect mode A, it is possible to play the game without impairing the player's mood, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to

  In addition, in production mode A and production mode C, the operation production roar of the gusset is not executed except during the first normal reach production, but after that (during the second normal reach production, during the SP reach production, In the SPSP reach effect), the operation effect may be performed. In such a case, the rate at which the operation production shift is performed may decrease as the time when the change production progresses, or the operation production shift may not be performed only during SPSP reach production. .

  In addition, in production mode B, there is no case where the operation production turning of gusset is executed, but the operation production turning of the gusset may be executed only during the first normal reach production, or the operation production turning of the gusset at each timing It may be made to perform, and it may be made not to carry out operation production resemblance of a cassette only during SPSP reach production. In such a case, it is preferable that the rate at which the operation effect on the caste in each timing is performed is lower than that in the other effect modes.

  In addition, when performing operation production roaring of caste at the timing after the first normal reach production in each staging mode, the direction of operation production roaring of the second normal reach production is better than during the first normal reach production. The ratio to be executed may be higher, and the ratio at which the operation production derangement of the gusset is performed is higher in the first normal reach presentation than in the SP reach production and the SPSP reach production It is also good.

(Operation presentation scenario determination table)
FIGS. 74 to 76 are operation effect scenario determination tables that are referred to when the operation effect scenario is determined. FIG. 74 is an operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern A6 determined in the effect mode A. FIG. 75 is an operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern B4 determined in the effect mode B. Reference numeral 76 denotes an operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern C4 determined in the effect mode C.

  In the effect contents of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item of “operation effect return” indicates that the operation effect may be executed and / or the type of the operation effect to be executed (notice) The type is defined.

  The "Gaze roaring effect" in the item "Operation roaring roar" is the operation deduction roaring of the gusset selected when the operation roaring is not executed, and "Roaring roaring A" and "Roaring roaring B" execute the operation roaring When it is done, it is the operation effect around. The specific example of each turning effect is later mentioned using FIGS. 83-84.

  In the effect contents of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item “promotional image” is defined by the type of the promotion image (see FIG. 77) displayed on the image display device 14 to urge the operation (operation input) of the effect button 18A. It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 77, “promotional image 1A” in the item “promotional image” imitates the base image AG of the first form (shape) having predetermined decorativeness and the effect button 18A in the normal state (shown ) A button image BG and a gauge image CG showing the remaining time of the effective period. The promotion image 1A has two types of display modes, and when the color of the button image BG is white, it becomes the promotion image 1A-1, and when the color of the button image BG is yellow, it becomes the promotion image 1A-2.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 1B” is composed of a base image AG of the first form (shape), a button image BG (shown) imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in the projecting state, and a gauge image There is. The promotion image 1B has two types of display modes, and when the color of the button image BG is white, it becomes the promotion image 1B-1, and when the color of the button image is yellow, it becomes the promotion image 1B-2.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 2A” has a base image AG of a second form (shape) with higher decorativeness than the first form and a button image BG that simulates (shows) the effect button 18A in the normal state. And the gauge image. The promotion image 2A has three types of display modes, and when the color of the button image BG is blue, it becomes the promotion image 2A-1, when the color of the button image is green, it becomes the promotion image 2A-2, and the color of the button image is red Then, it becomes promotion image 2A-3.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 2B” is composed of a base image AG of the second form (shape), a button image BG (representatively shown) that mimics the effect button 18A in the projecting state, and a gauge image. There is. The promotion image 2B has three types of display modes, and when the color of the button image BG is blue, it becomes the promotion image 2B-1, when the color of the button image is green, it becomes the promotion image 2B-2, and the color of the button image is red Then, it becomes promotion image 2B-3.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 3A” is a button image BG that shows (shows) the base image AG of the third form (shape) having higher decorativeness than the second form and the effect button 18A in the normal state. And the gauge image. The promotion image 3A has three types of display modes, and when the color of the button image BG is blue, it becomes the promotion image 3A-1, when the color of the button image is green, it becomes the promotion image 3A-2, and the color of the button image is red Then, it becomes promotion image 3A-3.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 3B” is composed of a base image AG of the third form (shape), a button image BG (representatively shown) that mimics the effect button 18A in the projecting state, and a gauge image. There is. The promotion image 3B has three types of display modes, and when the color of the button image BG is blue, it becomes the promotion image 3B-1, when the color of the button image is green, it becomes the promotion image 3B-2, and the color of the button image is red Then, it becomes promotion image 3B-3.

  The degree of expectation of the big hit (corresponding to the special game being executed) corresponding to the type of the promotion image is: promotion image 1A <promotion image 1B (more specifically, promotion image 1A-1 <promotion image 1A-2, promotion image 1B-1 <Promotion image 1B-2), promotion image 2 <promotion image 3, promotion image 2A <promotion image 2B (specifically, promotion image 2A-1 <promotion image 2A-2 <promotion image 2A-3, promotion image 2B -1 <promotion image 2B-2, promotion image 2B-3), promotion image 3A <promotion image 3B (specifically, promotion image 3A-1 <promotion image 3A-2 <promotion image 3A-3, promotion image 3B-1 <promotion image 3B-2 <promotion image 3B-3). That is, the degree of expectation of the big hit (corresponding to the special game being executed) corresponding to the color of the button image BG of the promotion image is white <yellow, blue <green <red.

  In the effect contents of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item "effect button" defines the operation state and the light emission mode of the effect button 18A during the effective period when the operation of the effect button 18A is effective.

  "Normal" in the item "effect button" means that the effect button 18A is disposed at the normal position (normal state), and "protrusion" is disposed at the protruding position (projection state). It means that. Also, “o light emission” means a light emission mode of the effect button 18A.

  The degree of expectation of the big hit (special game being executed) corresponding to the arrangement (state) of the effect button 18A is in the normal state (normal position) <protruding position (protruding state). Further, the degree of expectation of the big hit (corresponding to the special game being executed) corresponding to the light emission mode of the effect button 18A is white light emission <yellow light emission <yellow light blink, blue light emission <green light emission <red light emission <red light blink ing.

  In the effect contents of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item “operation effect” defines the type of operation effect to be executed when the effect button 18A is operated during the effective period.

  "Flower blowing 1" in the item of "Operation effect" means that an operation effect image in which a small amount of petals scatters is displayed on the image display device 14, and "Flower blowing 2" is in the image display device 14. "Flower blowing 3" means that an operation effect image in which a large amount of petals scatter is displayed on the image display device 14, which means that an operation effect image in which a quantity of petals scatters is displayed. The degree of expectation of the big hit (corresponding to the special game being executed) corresponding to each flower snowfall is flower snow 1 <flower snow 2 <flower snow 3.

  "Green cut-in 1" means that the image display device 14 has a green background and / or edge and a cut-in image by the character 1 is displayed, and "green cut-in 2" is a background image on the image display device 14. "Red cut-in 2" means that the cut-in image by character 2 is displayed with the background and / or the edge is red, which means that the cut-in image by character 2 is displayed with the green and / or the edge displayed. “Rainbow cut-in 2” means that a cut-in image by character 2 is displayed with the background and / or edges being iridescent.

  The degree of expectation of the big hit (corresponding to the special game being executed) corresponding to each cut-in image is green cut-in 1 <green cut-in 2 <red cut-in 2 <rainbow cut-in 2 (big hit confirmed). The rainbow cut-in 2 may be an effect that determines that the special game most advantageous to the player is executed.

  As a first feature of the operation presentation scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, types of promotion images selected and determined in the production mode A, and promotion images selected and determined in the production mode B and the production mode C There is a point that differs from the type. By doing this, it is possible to change the promotion image displayed on the image display device 14 according to the change of the gaming state (rendering mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, while being able to suppress a player's boredom, it becomes possible to make it easy for a player to recognize (acknowledge) a change in gaming state.

  The types of promotion images selected and determined in all the production modes may be made different, and the types of promotion images selected and determined in the production mode A and the production mode B are the same, and selection is made in the production mode C The type of promotion image to be determined may be different, or the type of promotion image selected and determined in the rendering mode A and the rendering mode C may be the same, and the promotion image selected and determined in the rendering mode B You may make it differ from the kind of.

  Further, the types of promotion images selected and determined in the rendering mode A may be larger than the types of promotion images selected and determined in the rendering mode B and the rendering mode C. By doing this, the number of types of promotion images displayed on the image display device 14 in the effect mode A, which has a longer stay period than the effect mode B and the effect mode C, can be increased, and the player can be prevented from being bored It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, the types of promotion images selected and determined in the production mode B may be more than the types of promotion images selected and determined in the production mode A and the production mode C, or selected and determined in the production mode C. The type of the promotion image may be larger than the type of the promotion image selected and determined in the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B.

  As a second feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, the promotion image selected and determined in the effect mode B (high probability gaming state) and the effect mode C (low probability time short gaming state) The decorativeness (attention to the player) is higher than the promotion image selected and determined in presentation mode A (normal game state), in other words, the promotion image selected and determined in presentation mode A is simpler Can be mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the jackpot winning of the player in the gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the decorativeness (the appeal to the player) of the promotion image selected and determined in all the production modes may be made different, or the decoration of the promotion image selected and determined in the production mode B and the production mode C. More than the decoration of the promotion image selected and determined in the production mode A may be made higher than in the presentation mode B than the decoration of the promotion image selected and determined in the production mode A and the production mode C. The decoration of the selected promotion image may be made higher, or the decoration of the promotion image selected and determined in the production mode A and the production mode B may be selected and determined in the production mode C You may increase the decorativeness of the

  As a third feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, a plurality of types of promotion images selected and determined in the production mode B and the production mode C (promotion image 2A, promotion image 2B, promotion image 3A, There are promotion images 3B), and the degree of expectation of the big hit (corresponding to the special game being executed) corresponding to each promotion image is different, and the appearance rate of each promotion image is in production mode B (high probability gaming state) and production mode C There are different points in (the low probability time short game state). By doing this, it is possible to change the promotion image that is likely to be displayed on the image display device 14 according to the change in the gaming state (rendering mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, although the appearance rate of the promotion image 2 is production mode B <production mode C, and the promotion image 3 is production mode B> production mode C, the appearance rate of promotion image 2 is production mode B> production The mode C may be set, and the appearance rate of the promotion image 3 may be set as the rendering mode B <the rendering mode C. Alternatively, the appearance rate of the promotion image 2A, the promotion image 2B, the promotion image 3A, and the promotion image 3B in the effect mode B and the appearance rate in the effect mode C may be individually set.

  As a fourth feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the light emission mode (emission color, lighting mode) of the effect button 18A selected and determined in the effect mode A and the effect button for effect mode B and C The point which makes the light emission mode selected and determined in 18A different is mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the effect button 18A according to the change of the gaming state (rendering mode), and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, while being able to suppress a player's boredom, it becomes possible to make it easy for a player to recognize (acknowledge) a change in gaming state.

  In addition, the light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected and determined in all the effect modes may be made different, and the light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected and determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode B may be the same. The light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected and determined in mode C may be different, or the light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected and determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode C may be the same. The light emission mode may be different from the light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected and determined in the above.

  As a fifth feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the display color of the button image BG of the promotion image to be selected and determined and the effect to be selected and determined in any of the effect modes. There is a point that the light emission color of the button 18A is the same color. By doing this, contradiction does not occur between the display color of the button image BG displayed on the image display device 14 and the light emission color of the effect button 18A, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  In addition, it is contradictory with the display color of the button image BG of the promotion image selected and determined and the luminescent color of the effect button 18A selected and determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10% etc.) when the jackpot is won. May be set to occur. In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot has been won before operating the effect button 18A, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a sixth feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the form (usually, protrusion) of the button image BG of the promotion image to be selected and determined in any of the effect modes; There is a point that the form (usually, the protrusion) of the effect button 18A to be determined is the same form. By doing this, a clear contradiction does not occur between the form of the button image BG displayed on the image display device 14 and the form of the effect button 18A, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  It should be noted that there is a clear contradiction between the form of the button image BG of the promotion image to be selected and determined and the form of the effect button 18A to be selected and determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10% etc.) when the jackpot is won. May be set to occur. In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot has been won before operating the effect button 18A, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the promotion image selected and determined in each effect mode is different, but the type of the promotion image selected and determined in each effect mode is displayed on the image display device 14 as the same type. Only the display size of the promotion image to be displayed may be made different. For example, the promotion image is displayed in the first display size in the presentation mode A, the promotion image is displayed in the second display size in the presentation mode B, and the promotion image is displayed in the third display size in the presentation mode B, etc. It is.

  In this case, which one of the first display size to the third display size is to be set as the largest display size may be arbitrarily set, but the first display size <the third display size <the second display size, etc. As described above, if the display size of the promotion image is set to be larger as the effect mode more advantageous to the player, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be easily enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

  Further, the promotion image may be displayed in the first display size in any two presentation modes of the presentation modes A to C, and the promotion image may be displayed in the second display size in the other one presentation mode. . Furthermore, a plurality of display sizes of the promotion image in each effect mode may be set.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the form of the effect button 18A in each of the effect modes A to C is the same, but the form (protruding state) of the effect button 18A in each of the effect modes A to C is set to be different. In each of the effect modes A to C, a promotion image corresponding to the form of the effect button 18A may be displayed. For example, in the effect mode A, an effect image imitating the effect button 18A in the normal state is displayed with the effect button 18A in the normal state, and in the effect mode B, the effect button 18A in the first projecting state is the effect button in the first projecting state. The promotion image imitating 18A is displayed, and in the effect mode C, the presentation button 18A is set to the second projecting state, and the promotion image imitating the presentation button 18A in the second projecting state is displayed.

  In this case, which one of the first and second projecting states is the one where the projecting amount of the effect button 18A is larger may be arbitrarily set, but an effect advantageous to the player, such as the first projecting state> the second projecting state. If the amount of protrusion of the effect button 18A is set to be larger as the mode is set, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be easily enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in any two effect modes A to C, an effect image imitating the effect button 18A in the normal state is displayed with the effect button 18A in the normal state, and in the other one effect mode, the effect button 18A is projected A promotion image imitating the effect button 18A in the projecting state may be displayed as the state. Furthermore, the difference in the arrangement of the effect buttons 18A in each of the effect modes A to C may be limited to the effective period.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, although one effect button operated during the effective period is not provided, a plurality of effect buttons having different shapes are provided and the types of effect buttons to be operated in effect modes A to C are made different. It may be made to display the promotion picture which imitated the production button used as operation object in each production mode AC. For example, in the effect mode A, an operation target is a first effect button, and a promotion image imitating the first effect button is displayed. In the effect mode B, an operation target is a second effect button, and the promotion image imitating the second effect button. In the effect mode C, the operation target is the third effect button, and a promotion image imitating the third effect button is displayed.

  Further, in any two effect modes A to C, an operation target is the first effect button, and a promotion image imitating the first effect button is displayed, and in the remaining one effect mode, the operation target is the second effect A promotion image imitating the second effect button may be displayed as a button. Furthermore, a number of effect buttons greater than the number of effect modes may be provided, and a plurality of effect buttons to be operated in each effect mode may be set. Further, the operation target is not limited to the effect button, and may be a touch panel as long as it can receive an input from the player, and may be a motion of an infrared sensor or the like without an operation unit. It may be a sensor.

(Icon change notice judgment processing of effect control board)
Next, the icon change advance notice determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario stored in the storage area of the effect information of the sub RAM 102c in step S1317-1, and in step S1317-2, the special view fluctuation pattern according to the icon change advance notice determination processing. It is determined whether or not to execute the throwing kiss notice in the (current) fluctuation effect corresponding to the designated command.

  The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1317-3 if it decides to execute the throwing kiss announcement, and shifts the processing to step S1317-4 if it decides not to execute the throwing kiss announcement.

  In step S1317-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a throwing kiss announcement presentation control command indicating the contents of the presentation according to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1317-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and this icon change announcement judgment End the process. Here, in the "content of effect according to the icon display mode scenario", whether the character relating to the throwing kiss notice throws kisses or leaves and an icon hit by the thrown heart when throwing kisses (the notice of the notice The target icon), whether or not to change the display mode of the icon, and the display mode after the change in the case of changing are included.

  The cast kiss announcement effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the throwing kiss announcement effect control command, the image control board 105 executes throwing kiss announcement according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received throwing kiss announcement effect control command. Details of the throwing kiss notice will be described later.

  In step S 1317-4, sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not to execute the handshake meeting advance notice in the (current) fluctuation effect corresponding to the special view fluctuation pattern designation command related to the icon change determination processing, and makes a handshake meeting advance notice. If it is determined to execute, the process proceeds to step S1317-5, and if it is determined not to execute a handshake meeting advance notice, the icon change notice determination processing is ended.

  In step S1317-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a handshake meeting advance presentation control command indicating the contents of the presentation according to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1317-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines this icon change announcement. End the process. Here, the “content of effect according to the icon display mode scenario” includes the number of lines in the notice of the handshake meeting and the change pattern of the display mode of the icon during fluctuation.

  The handshake event advance notice control command set in the transmission buffer is sent to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When receiving the handshake presentation advance notice control command, the image control board 105 executes handshake presentation according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received handshake presentation presentation control command. Details of the handshake meeting advance notice will be described later.

(Pre-reading zone effect end processing of effect control board)
Next, the pre-reading zone effect end processing will be described using FIG.

  In step S1320-1, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not effect mode A is currently set, that is, whether or not the effect mode flag "00H" is set in the effect mode flag storage area. If it is determined that there is a process, the process proceeds to step S 1320-2. If it is determined that the process is not in the effect mode A, the pre-reading zone effect end process is ended.

  In step S 1320-2, the sub CPU 102 a confirms the pre-reading zone effect scenario indicated by the pre-reading zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102 c in the effect information of the sub RAM 102 c, and pre-reading zone effect ends with the current variable effect. If it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect is ended, the process proceeds to step S1320-3, and if it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect is not ended, the process proceeds to step S1320-5.

  In step S 1320-3, the sub CPU 102 a ends the pre-reading zone effect, and sets a pre-reading zone effect end control command for returning to the background image or the like for effect mode A in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102 c.

  The pre-reading zone effect end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the pre-reading zone effect end control command, the pre-reading zone effect is ended, and the background image, BGM, and the illumination effect mode of the effect illumination device 16 for effect mode A Return to things.

  In step S 1320-4, the sub CPU 102 a performs an icon effect control command (hereinafter referred to as “first method”) to set the display mode of all the icons displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode by executing the prefetch zone effect. The reset icon effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  As a result, the icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the icons of all prefetch zone effect notification modes displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are changed to the normal mode. A process for changing (returning) is performed.

  In step S 1320-5, the sub CPU 102 a confirms the zone precursor presentation scenario indicated by the zone precursor presentation scenario data stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102 c in the presentation information of the sub RAM 102 c, and the gassezone precursor presentation ends in the current fluctuation presentation. If it is determined that the gasse zone precursor effect is ended, the process proceeds to step S 1320-6. If it is determined that the gasse zone precursor effect is not ended, the pre-reading zone effect end process is ended.

  The sub CPU 102a executes an icon effect control command (hereinafter referred to as “second command operation mode”) in which the display mode of all the icons displayed in the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode is set to a normal mode by executing the gasse zone precursor effect in step S1320-6. The reset icon effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  As a result, the second reset icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the icons of all prefetch zone effect suggestion modes displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are displayed. A process is performed to change (return) to the normal mode.

(Effect control input processing of effect control board)
Next, the effect input control process will be described using FIG.

  In step S1500-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the change effect is currently being executed, and if it is determined that the change effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1500-2 to execute the change effect. If it is determined not, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1500-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms the operation effect pattern set in the operation effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and determines in step S1500-3 whether the operation effect pattern is an execution pattern or not. If it is determined that the execution pattern of the operation effect is determined, the process proceeds to step S1500-4. If it is determined that the execution pattern of the operation effect is not determined, the process proceeds to step S1500-16.

  In step S1500-4, the sub CPU 102a confirms the effect state of the operation effect scenario and the current fluctuation effect set in the operation effect scenario storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1500-5, the operation effect turning condition is If it is determined that the operation effect turning condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1500-6. If it is determined that the operation effect turning condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1500-7.

  Specifically, when the production state of the current fluctuation production is the timing to generate the operation production roar specified by the operation production scenario, it is determined that the operation production roaring condition is satisfied, and the production state of the current fluctuation production is If it is not the time to generate an operation effect beat specified by the operation effect scenario, it is determined that the operation effect hit condition is not satisfied.

  In step S1500-6, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, an operation effect rotation specification command corresponding to the type of operation effect rotation specified by the operation effect scenario, and ends this effect input control processing. As a result, the operation effect rotation specification command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to generate a rotation image (moving image) of a type corresponding to the operation effect rotation specification command. A process for displaying is performed.

  In step S1500-7, sub CPU 102a determines whether the effective period occurrence condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the effective period occurrence condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1500-8, and the effective period occurrence condition is If it is determined that the condition is not established, the process proceeds to step S1500-10.

  Specifically, it is determined that the effective period generation condition is satisfied when the current production state of the fluctuation effect is the generation timing of the effective period, and it is not the timing when the present generation state of the fluctuation effect is the generation of the effective period In this case, it is determined that the effective period occurrence condition is not satisfied.

  In step S1500-8, sub CPU 102a sets the valid period flag and the valid time in the predetermined area of sub RAM 102c, and in step S1500-9, transmits the operation promotion designation command corresponding to the type of operation promotion effect to sub RAM 102c. It sets to a buffer and ends this production input control processing.

  Thus, the operation promotion designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 causes the effect button 18A to emit light in the light emission mode corresponding to the operation promotion designation command. And a process for changing the effect button 18A into the projecting state, and a process for causing the image control board 105 to display on the image display device 14 a type of promotion image (moving image) corresponding to the operation promotion designation command. Is performed, and the operation promotion effect is performed.

  In step S1500-10, sub CPU 102a determines whether the valid period flag is set in sub RAM 102c (whether or not the valid period is in progress), and if it is determined that the valid period flag is set, step S1500. The process shifts to (-11), and when it is determined that the valid period flag is not set, the present effect input control process is ended.

  The sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect button 18A has been operated in step S1500-11, and if it is determined that the effect button 18A has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1500-12 and there is no operation of the effect button 18A. If it judges, processing is moved to step S1500-13.

  In step S1500-12, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effect designation command corresponding to the type of operation effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1500-14.

  As a result, an operation effect designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105, and the lamp control board 104 performs processing for driving the effect illumination device 16 and the effect product device 17, and A process for causing the image display device 14 to display an operation effect image (moving image) corresponding to the operation effect command is performed by the control substrate 105, and the operation effect is executed.

  In step S1500-13, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the valid time has elapsed. If it is determined that the valid time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1500-14, and if it is determined that the valid time has not elapsed, The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1500-14, sub CPU 102a clears the effective period flag set in sub RAM 102c, and in step S1500-15, sets an operation promotion end designation command indicating the end of the operation promotion effect in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c. Then, the effect input control process ends.

  As a result, the operation promotion end designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105, and the lamp control board 104 ends the light emission of the effect button 18A, and returns the effect button 18A to the normal state. While the processing is performed, the image control board 105 performs processing for ending the display of the promotion image (moving image), and the execution of the operation promotion effect is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1500-3 that the sub CPU 102a is not the execution pattern of the operation effect, in step S1500-16, the sub CPU 102a determines whether it is the execution pattern of the ST effect or the CD effect, and the story effect (ST If it is determined that the effect pattern of the countdown effect (CD effect) or the countdown effect (CD effect) is determined, the process proceeds to step S1500-7 to determine that it is not the execution pattern of the story effect (ST effect) or the countdown effect (CD effect). The present effect input control processing ends.

  Note that the operation promotion command may be transmitted at a time before a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the occurrence timing of the effective period. In this way, since the operation prompting image is displayed before the occurrence of the effective period, it is possible to eliminate the useless period in which the beginning of the effective period can not operate the effect button 18A.

  In addition, the operation promotion end command may be transmitted at a time before a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the end timing of the effective period. In this way, since the display of the promotion image ends before the end of the effective period, it is possible to eliminate the useless operation of the effect button 18A in the final part of the operation promotion effect and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Game information display control process)
Next, the game information display control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the big hit game has been started in step S1600-1, and determines that the big hit game has been started if it is determined that the big hit game has been started, and determines that the big hit game has not been started. The process moves to S1600-4.

  In step S1600-2, the sub CPU 102a sets a jackpot display command for jackpot in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a jackpot display command for jackpot is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 shoots the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 2A to the image display device 14. Processing for displaying right hitting information (right hitting image) prompting the user in the display mode for the jackpot is performed.

  In addition to the display mode (size: large, decorativeness: high) described above for the jackpot as the display mode of the right-handed information (right-handed image), a display for high probability during high probability gaming state described later There are an aspect (size: large, decorativeness: middle) and a display mode for time reduction during the low probability short game state (size: medium, decorativeness: low). The appeal (appealing power) to the player of the right-handed information (right-handed display image) is the display mode for time reduction <display mode for high probability <display mode for jackpot.

  At step S1600-3, sub CPU 102a sets a count display end command in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the number display end command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the jackpot number of times information of the jackpot which has been displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. A process for ending the display of the high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image) and the time shortening remaining number information (time short remaining number image) is performed.

  In step S1600-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state has been started, and if it is determined that the high probability gaming state has been started, the process proceeds to step S1600-5, and the high probability gaming state is started. If it is determined not, the process proceeds to step S1600-8.

  In step S1600-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a high probability right-handed display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a high-accuracy right-handed display command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 shoots the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 2A on the image display device 14. A process is performed to display the right-handed information (right-handed image) prompting the user in the display mode for high certainty.

  In step S1600-6, the sub CPU 102a sets a high probability series-of-times display command corresponding to the current number of series in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a high probability consecutive count display command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to have a large count of consecutive round count information (a continuous count number image). A process is performed to display in a display mode for high accuracy.

  In addition to the display mode for high certainty (size: medium, number of times display: white light) as a display mode of the consecutive soda frequency information (continuous soda frequency image), during the low certainty short game state described later There is a display mode for time reduction (size: middle, number display: white blinking). The appeal (appealing power) to the player of each display manner of the consecutive residence frequency information (consecutive number of times image) is the high accuracy display manner <time reduction display manner.

  In step S1600-7, sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining number of times display command 1 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number of times in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. Thus, the high probability remaining number display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to obtain high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image) A process for displaying in the first display mode for confirmation is performed.

  In addition to the above-mentioned first display mode for high probability (size: middle, number display: lit blue) as a display mode of the high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image), the high probability for use described later There are a second display mode (size: middle, number display: yellow light) and a high display third display mode (size: large, number display: red light). The appeal (appealing power) to the player of each display mode of the high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image) is the first display mode <the second display mode <the third display mode.

  In step S1600-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the high probability gaming state, and when it is determined that the high probability gaming state is in the processing, shifts the processing to step S1600-9, and the high probability If it is determined that the gaming state is not in progress, the processing is shifted to step S1600-15.

  In step S1600-9, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high probability remaining number has been updated. If it is determined that the number has been updated, the process proceeds to step S1600-10. If it is determined that the number has not been updated, the game information display control is performed. End the process.

  In step S1600-10, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high probability remaining number is more than "30". If it is determined that it is more than "30", the process proceeds to step S1600-11, and from "30" If it is determined that the number is not too large, the process proceeds to step S1600-12.

  In step S1600-11, sub CPU 102a sets a high probability remaining number of times display command 1 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number of times in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. Thus, the high probability remaining number display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to obtain high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image) A process for displaying in the first display mode for confirmation is performed.

  In step S1600-12, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high probability remaining number is more than "10". If it is determined that it is more than "10", the process proceeds to step S1600-13, and from "10" If it is determined that the number is not too large, the process proceeds to step S1600-12.

  In step S1600-13, sub CPU 102a sets high probability remaining number of times display command 2 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number of times in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high probability remaining number display command 2 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to obtain high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image) A process for displaying in the second display mode for confirmation is performed.

  In step S1600-14, sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining number of times display command 3 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number of times in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high probability remaining number display command 3 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to obtain high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image) A process for displaying in the third display mode for confirmation is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the low probability time short gaming state has been started in step S1600-15, and if it is determined that the low probability time short gaming state has been started, the process proceeds to step S1600-16 and the low probability time short gaming state If it is determined that is not started, the process proceeds to step S1600-19.

  In step S1600-16, the sub CPU 102a sets a time saving right hit display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a right-handed display command for time saving is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 shoots the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 2A in the image display device 14. A process is performed to display the right-handed information (right-handed image) prompting the user in the display mode for time saving.

  In step S1600-17, the sub CPU 102a sets a time-saving short-circuit number-of-times display command corresponding to the current number of consecutive lines in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the time-saving short-run number-of-times display command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 A process for displaying in the time-saving display mode is performed.

  In step S1600-18, sub CPU 102a sets time reduction remaining number display command 1 corresponding to the current time reduction number in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102 c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the time reduction display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 transmits the time reduction information (time reduction size image) to the image display device 14 for time reduction. A process for displaying in one display mode is performed.

  In addition to the above-described first display mode for time reduction (size: large, number display: white lighted), the second mode display for time reduction described later is the display mode of the time reduction remaining number information (time short remaining image). There is an aspect (size: medium, number display: white blinking). The appeal (appealing power) to the player of each display mode of the time reduction remaining number information (time reduction remaining number image) is the first display mode> the second display mode.

  In step S1600-19, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the low probability short game state, and shifts the process to step S1600-20 when determining that the low probability time short game state is in progress. If it is determined that the low probability time short game state is not in progress, the process moves to step S1600-24.

  In step S1600-20, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not there is an update of the number of remaining time reductions, and if it is determined that there is an update, the process proceeds to step S1600-21, and if it is determined that there is no update, the game information display control process is performed. Finish.

  In step S1600-21, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high probability remaining number is more than "20". If it is determined that it is more than "20", the process proceeds to step S1600-22, and from "20" If it is determined that the number is not too large, the process proceeds to step S1600-23.

  In step S1600-22, sub CPU 102a sets time reduction remaining number display command 1 corresponding to the current time reduction number in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102 c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the time reduction display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 transmits the time reduction information (time reduction size image) to the image display device 14 for time reduction. A process for displaying in one display mode is performed.

  In step S1600-23, sub CPU 102a sets time reduction remaining number display command 2 corresponding to the current time reduction number in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the time saving remaining number display command 2 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to display the second displaying manner of time saving remaining time information (time saving remaining time image). Processing for displaying at is performed.

  In step S1600-24, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the low probability time short gaming state has ended, and when it is determined that the low probability time short gaming state has ended, the process proceeds to step S1600-25, and the low probability time short gaming state If it is determined that the game has not ended, the game information display control process ends.

  In step S1600-25, the sub CPU 102a sets a left-handed display command for normal use in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Thereby, a left-handed display command for normal use is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 shoots the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 2A to the image display device 14. A process is performed to display left hitting information (left hitting image) prompting the user in a display mode for normal use (size: medium, decorativeness: low).

  In addition, left-handed information (left-handed image) displayed on the image display device 14 performs three times of variation effects which is smaller than the upper limit of the second special view holding number or 10 seconds from the display start for a predetermined period (for example, And / or 5 times of execution of the fluctuation effect more than the upper limit value of the second special view reservation number etc.) for ending the display of left-handed information (left-handed display image) by the image control board 105 Processing is performed.

  In step S1600-26, sub CPU 102a sets a count display end command in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102 c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the number display end command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the jackpot number information (the number of consecutive times picture) of the jackpot displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 A process is performed to end the display of the time saving remaining number information (time saving remaining number image).

  As described above, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the types of game information to be displayed on the image display device 14 are made different for each game state. Specifically, right hit information is displayed during the big hit game, right hit information during the high probability game state, consecutive beats number information, high probability remaining number information is displayed, and right hit information during the low probability time short game state The information on the number of consecutive times played and the information on the number of remaining time is displayed, and the information on the left is displayed during the normal gaming state. By doing this, it becomes possible to provide the player with appropriate game information according to the game state (game progress), and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the display mode (at least one of the size, the decorativeness, and the color) of the right-handed information and the information on the number of consecutive times displayed on the image display device 14 is different for each game state. I'm sorry. Specifically, in the display mode of the right-handed information, the appeal for the player (appealing power, how to stand out) is high in the order of low probability short game state <high probability game state <big hit game in progress, In the display mode of the number of consecutive times information, the appeal for the player is high in the order of low probability short game state <high probability game state. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the player's boredom and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the display mode (size, decorativeness, at least one of the colors) of the right-handed information is in a big hit game <high probability gaming state <low probability time short game state appealing power (appealing power, noticeable to the player) May be higher, or in any other order. Also, during the jackpot game, during the high probability gaming state, during the low probability time short gaming state, the display mode of the right-handed information in any two game states is the same, the display mode of the right-handed information in the remaining one gaming state It may be different from

  In addition, it may be made to display the number of consecutive times information during the big hit game, the display mode (at least one of the size, decorativeness and color) of the consecutive time number information during the low probability time short game state <high probability gaming state The appeal to the player may be made higher in the order of middle <big hit game state, or other orders may be adopted. In addition, during the big hit game, during the high probability gaming state, during the low probability time short gaming state the display mode of consecutive loin frequency information in any two states the same, the display mode of continuous loin frequency information in the remaining one state It may be different from

  Furthermore, in the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the advantageous period information indicating a period in which a state advantageous to the player continues, such as the high probability remaining number displayed on the image display device 14 and the time remaining number information. At least one of the size, the decorativeness, and the color) is made different between the high probability gaming state and the low probability time short gaming state. Specifically, in the low probability time short game state <high probability game state, the appeal to the player (appealing power, striking manner) becomes higher. By doing this, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the player has a different degree of advantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the appeal of the player (appealing power, striking manner) will be higher in the order of the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness and color) of the advantageous period information, high probability gaming state <low probability time short gaming state You may In this way, it is possible to suppress the player's boredom and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, a display mode of advantage period information indicating a period in which a state advantageous to the player continues, such as high probability remaining frequency information displayed on the image display device 14 or time short remaining frequency information. The (size, decorativeness, at least one of the colors) is changed in accordance with the number of times of the variable effect (varying display) in the high probability gaming state or the low probability time short gaming state. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the player's boredom and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the gaming information display control process in the present embodiment, the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness and color) of the high probability remaining number of times information in the high probability gaming state is until the high probability gaming state ends. The player's ability to appeal to the player (appealing power, how to stand out) becomes higher each time they change. In this way, it becomes easy for the player to recognize (acknowledge) that the high probability gaming state is nearing the end, and it is possible to effectively catch the player's feeling of frustration, thus improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

  When the display mode of the high probability remaining number information is changed over a plurality of times, the display manner of the high probability remaining number information is changed so that the appeal to the player becomes a mountain shape, the appeal to the player is The display mode of the high probability remaining number of times information may be changed to have a valley shape, or the display mode of the high probability remaining number of times information may be changed so that the appeal to the player may be corrugated. By doing this, it is possible to easily up and down the player's feelings (expected feeling, feeling of frustration, etc.), and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the display mode (at least one of the size, the decorativeness and the color) of the time short remaining information in the low probability short game state is until the low probability time short game state ends. It is changed over a plurality of times in between, and it is changed so that the appeal (appealing power, noticeable manner) to the player becomes lower each time it changes. By doing this, it is possible to gradually calm the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction with the end of the low probability time short game state.

  When the display mode of the time saving remaining number information is changed over a plurality of times, the display mode of the time saving remaining number information is changed so that the appeal to the player becomes a mountain shape, or the appeal to the player is a valley type. Alternatively, the display mode of the time remaining information may be changed, or the display mode of the time remaining information may be changed such that the appeal to the player becomes a wave. By doing this, it is possible to easily up and down the player's feelings (expected feeling, feeling of frustration, etc.), and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, the number of changes in the display mode (at least one of the size, the decorativeness and the color) of the high probability remaining number information (advantage period information) during the high probability gaming state is low. The number of times of change in the display mode of the time saving remaining number information (advantage period information) during the short time gaming state at the fixed time is made different. Specifically, the number of changes in the high probability gaming state is three, and the number of changes in the low probability time short gaming state is two. By doing this, it is possible to make the change modes of the player's emotion (expected feeling, feeling of frustration, etc.) different between the high probability gaming state and the low probability time short gaming state, and recognize that the gaming state is different. It is easy to do it, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the number of changes in the display mode of the time reduction remaining frequency information (advantage period information) in the low probability time short game state than the number of changes in the display mode of the high probability remaining frequency information (advantage period information) in the high probability gaming state May be increased. In addition, one of the display mode of high probability remaining frequency information (advantage period information) in high probability gaming state and the display mode of time saving remaining frequency information in low probability time short gaming state is not changed, the other one or more times It may be changed several times. In addition, the display mode of the advantageous period information may be changed when the variable lottery is won, or may be changed when the remaining number of the advantageous period information reaches a predetermined number when the variable lottery is won. May be

  Furthermore, in the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, the display mode (size, decorativeness, and the like of launch operation information indicating the mode of the launch operation of the game ball such as right strike information and left strike information to be displayed on the image display device 14. At least one of the colors is different for each gaming state. Specifically, in the normal gaming state <low probability short gaming state <high probability short gaming state <big hit gaming in order, the appeal (appealing power, striking manner) to the player is made higher. By doing this, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel dissatisfaction during the normal gaming state while giving the player a sense of excitement during the big hit game.

  Note that the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the firing operation information may be in the order of normal gaming state <high probability gaming state <low probability time short gaming state <big hit gaming in progress, and others It may be in the order of Also, the display mode of the firing operation information in the low probability time short gaming state and the high probability gaming state may be the same, or in the normal gaming state, in the low probability time short gaming state and in the high probability gaming state The display mode may be the same. Furthermore, the display mode of the firing operation information in the big hit game is different from the high probability game state or the low probability time short game state only during fanfare, and the high probability game state or the low probability time short game state during the round game or interval. It may be the same as inside.

(Display example of image display device in each gaming state)
Next, a display example of the image display device 14 in each gaming state will be described using FIG. FIG. 78 (a) is a display example of normal gaming state (effect mode A), and FIG. 78 (b) is a display example of high probability gaming state (effect mode B), and FIG. 78 (c) Is a display example of the low probability time short game state (effect mode C), and FIG. 78 (d) is a display example of a jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), during the normal gaming state, an effect mode image AMG indicating that the effect mode A is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14; In the central portion, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side, and three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), during the high probability gaming state, an effect mode image BMG indicating that the effect mode B is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit 140 The right-handed image KMG, which is the display mode for high probability described above, is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the jackpot frequency image KRG for jackpot that is the display mode for high probability described above is closer to the upper center of the display unit 140. The high probability remaining number image KKG, which is the display mode for high probability described above, is displayed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and three effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center of the display unit 140. The three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area 143.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), in the low probability time short game state, an effect mode image CMG indicating that the effect mode C is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit The right-handed image ZMG, which is the display mode for time shortening described above, is displayed on the upper right side of 140, and the big hit consecutive number image ZRG, which is the display mode for time shortening described above, is displayed closer to the upper center of the display unit 140. In the lower left side of the display unit 140, the time reduction remaining number image ZKG, which is the above-described display mode for time reduction, is displayed, and in the center of the display unit 140, three effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side. Three special effect designs TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect pattern TZ3 on the lower right side of 140 and the second reserved icon display area 143.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (d), during the jackpot game (during opening), the right-handed image OMG, which is the display mode in the above-mentioned jackpot, is displayed on the upper right of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, An opening image OPG indicating the opening of the jackpot game is displayed on the remaining portion of the display unit 140.

  The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed during the normal gaming state correspond to the vertically elongated rectangular symbol base image ZBG, the character image CYG indicating any of nine types of characters, and nine types of characters on a one-to-one basis. It is a composite image in which the identification image SG showing any one of the numbers 1 to 9 is superimposed, and it has a (complex) first aspect design (first effect design) with high decorativeness.

  The character image CYG is a single image imitating any of nine types of characters, and the identification image SG superimposes a hexagonal base image and one of the numeral images (identifiers) 1 to 9 It has become a composite image.

  The first mode symbol may be stored in the CGROM 105Bb as single symbol data, or the symbol base image ZBG, the character image CYG, and the identification image SG may be stored separately in the CGROM 105Bb, and the image display device 14 may be used. It may be synthesized when displayed on the screen. Alternatively, the base image and the number image forming the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105 Bb and may be combined when displayed on the image display device 14.

  The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed during the high probability gaming state and during the low probability short gaming state are single images of only one of the numeral images (identifiers) of 1 to 9, and the first mode symbol Also the decorativeness is low (simple) second mode symbol (second effect symbol).

  In addition, about the 2nd mode figure, although it is memorized in CGROM105Bb as single figure data, since it is the same figure (form) as the number picture which constitutes discernment picture SG in the 1st mode figure, the said number picture When they are stored independently in the CGROM 105Bb, they may be displayed on the image display device 14 using the same image data. This makes it possible to suppress the compression of the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb.

  The special effect pattern TZ4 displayed in the normal gaming state, in the high probability gaming state, and in the low probability short gaming state causes the hexagonal base image to overlap with any one of the numeral images (identifiers) 1 to 9 It is a composite image, and is a third mode symbol (third effect symbol), which is lower in decorativeness than the first mode symbol but higher in decorativeness than the second mode symbol.

  In addition, about the 3rd mode design, although it is stored in CGROM105Bb as single pattern data, since it is the same appearance (form) as the identification image SG in the 1st mode design, the identification image SG concerned is independent. When stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the same image data may be displayed on the image display device 14. This makes it possible to suppress the compression of the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb.

  As described above, the types of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A) and the high probability gaming state (rendering mode B) and the low probability time short gaming state (rendering mode C) are displayed. By making different the types of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 to be played, the effect symbols displayed on the image display device 14 can be changed when there is a change in the gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved. Is possible.

(Display example of the production design in the fluctuation production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 79 to FIG. 82, a display example of the effect design in the fluctuation effect will be described.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display example in the case where the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect pattern A 001 (without pseudo turning) is normally executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A).

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the image display device 14, three first mode symbols (first effect symbols) “1”, “3” and “5” are stopped and displayed as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. It is being displayed, and the 3rd 3rd pattern (the 3rd production design) "1" "3" "5" is stopped and displayed as special production design TZ4 corresponding to production design TZ1-TZ3.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the hold icon A00 in the normal mode displayed on the first display portion 141a of the first hold icon display area 141 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and changed to the changing icon A00. Then, the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 start variable display. Along with this, the special effect pattern TZ4 also starts variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (c), when the first mode symbol "1" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1, the character image CYG of the first mode symbol "1" performs a predetermined action (changes the display mode The stop effect presentation is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the left symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (d), when the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ3, the action image at stop is predetermined when the character image CYG of the first mode symbol "9" performs a predetermined action. It takes place over a period of time (e.g. 0.5 seconds). At this time, the right symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (e), when the first mode symbol "4" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ2, the action image at stop is predetermined when the character image CYG of the first mode symbol "4" performs a predetermined action. It takes place over a period of time (e.g. 0.5 seconds). At this time, the middle symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the first mode symbol "4" as the effect symbol TZ2 is temporarily stopped, the first mode symbol "as effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3" "1", "4" and "9" are stopped and displayed. Along with this, three third mode symbols "1", "4" and "9" corresponding to the first mode symbols "1", "4" and "9" are stopped and displayed as the special effect pattern TZ4, and the variation effect is ended. .

  As described above, when the fluctuation effect pattern A001 (without false rotation) is normally executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 are the first over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. It is configured to be displayed by a mode symbol (first effect symbol). Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the action image at the time of stop is performed by the character image CYG of the first mode symbol.

  As for the fluctuation effect patterns without reach such as the fluctuation effect pattern A002, the fluctuation effect pattern A003, the fluctuation effect pattern A021, and the fluctuation effect pattern A024, as in the case of the fluctuation effect pattern A001 described above, from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation stop The rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the first mode symbol (first rendering symbol) over the entire period of. Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the action image at the time of stop is performed by the character image CYG of the first mode symbol.

  By doing this, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the variation production by increasing the movement of the rendering design while enhancing the decorativeness of the rendering designs TZ1 to TZ3 in the period in which the fluctuation rendering without reach is being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a display example in the case where the fluctuation effect pattern A000 (simulated turning without shortening fluctuation) is executed in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A).

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the hold icons A00 to A03 in the normal mode displayed in the first display area 141a to the fourth in the first hold icon display area 141 shift toward the fluctuating icon display area 142. When the hold icon A00 changes to the changing icon A00, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start variable display. Along with this, the special effect pattern TZ4 also starts variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the first mode symbol "1" as the effect symbol TZ1 is temporarily stopped without performing the action effect at the time of stop, and the effect symbol as the effect symbols TZ2 and TZ3. "4" and "9" are fluctuatingly displayed at low speed. At this time, the left symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (c), when a predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the rendering symbol TZ1, the first mode symbol "9" as the rendering symbol TZ3 is temporarily stopped without performing the action rendering at the time of stopping, and the rendering symbol TZ3 is When a predetermined time has elapsed from the temporary stop, the first mode symbol "4" is temporarily stopped as the effect pattern TZ2 without performing the action effect at the stop time. At this time, the middle symbol and the right symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbols TZ2 and TZ3 do not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (d), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the first mode symbol "4" as the effect symbol TZ2 is temporarily stopped, the first mode symbol "as effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3" "1", "4" and "9" are stopped and displayed. Along with this, three third mode symbols "1", "4" and "9" corresponding to the first mode symbols "1", "4" and "9" are stopped and displayed as the special effect pattern TZ4, and the variation effect is ended. .

  As described above, when the fluctuation effect pattern A000 (simulated no shortening fluctuation) is executed in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A), the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 are the first over the entire period from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation stop. It is designed to be displayed by one mode symbol (first effect symbol). Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the action effect at the time of stop by the character image CYG of the first mode symbol is not performed.

  As for the fluctuation effect pattern A020 (zone turn failure 1 shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation effect pattern A 023 (zone turn failure 2 shortening fluctuation), as in the case of the fluctuation effect pattern A000 described above, all from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation The rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the first mode symbol (the first rendering symbol) over the period. Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the action effect at the time of stop by the character image CYG of the first mode symbol is not performed.

  By doing this, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect (variation display) to be executed is more likely to be shorter than the normal gaming state (the super shortening fluctuation is easily performed) in the high probability gaming state or the low probability time short gaming state By reducing the decorativeness of the designs TZ1 to TZ3 and reducing the movement of the production design, the identification (visibility) of the production design can be secured, and it is difficult to identify the production design, thereby reducing the interest of the game. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a display example in the case where the fluctuation effect pattern A006 (SP reach 1 effect) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A).

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the hold icon A00 of the normal mode displayed on the first display portion 141a of the first hold icon display area 141 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and changed to the changing icon A00. Then, the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 start variable display. Along with this, the special effect pattern TZ4 also starts variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (b), when the first mode symbol "1" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1, the character image CYG of the first mode symbol "1" performs a predetermined action (changes the display mode The stop effect presentation is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the left symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (c), when the first mode symbol "1" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ3, the action image at stop is predetermined when the character image CYG of the first mode symbol "9" performs a predetermined action. The normal reach effect is performed over a period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the right symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (d), the transition presentation (development presentation) is suggested (implemented in the process of developing to SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation), which suggests the development to specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). It is executed, the production design TZ1-TZ3 moves to the upper right of the screen and is displayed in a reduced size and changes to the second mode design (the second production design) which becomes the same as in the high probability gaming state and the low probability time short gaming state . At this time, the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ3 does not change with the third mode symbol, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (e), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the transition effect is started, an effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed, and the SP reach effect is started Ru. At this time, the variation symbols of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 continue as they are in the second mode symbol, and the variation symbols of the special effect symbol TZ4 remain as they are on the third symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the SP reach effect is started, a character image indicating that the teammate character has won the battle is displayed. At this time, the effect pattern TZ2 variably displayed on the upper right side of the screen is temporarily stopped at the second mode symbol “1”, and a combination of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying a big hit is displayed. At this time, the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ3 does not change with the third mode symbol, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (g), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the character image indicating that the teammate character has won the battle is displayed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 move to the original position. In addition to being displayed enlarged to the normal size, it returns to the first mode symbol (the first effect symbol) and performs the action effect at the time of stop in the state where it is temporarily stopped. At this time, the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ3 does not change with the third mode symbol, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (h), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the action production at the time of stop, the first mode symbol “1” “1” as effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 notifying a big hit “1” is displayed stopped. Along with this, three third mode symbols “1” “1” “1” corresponding to the first mode symbols “1” “1” “1” are stopped and displayed as the special effect pattern TZ 4, and the fluctuation effect ends .

  As described above, when the fluctuation effect pattern A006 (SP reach 1 effect) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the period from the start of the fluctuation until the transition effect is performed and the specific reach effect (here, In the period from when the SP reach effect is over to the stop display, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the first mode symbol (the first effect symbol), and the transition effect is started until the SP reach effect is ended In the period of, the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the second mode symbol (second rendering symbol). In addition, at the time of temporary stop of production design TZ1-TZ3, action production at the time of stop by the 1st mode design is performed.

  In addition, also about the fluctuation production pattern more than the SP reach production such as the fluctuation production patterns A007-A017, A034-A040, A054-A060, the transition production is executed from the fluctuation start like the case of the above-mentioned fluctuation production pattern A 006 In the period up to the period and from the end of the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) to the stop display, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the first mode symbol (the first effect symbol), and the transition effect starts In the period from when it is done to the end of the SP reach effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the second mode symbol (the second effect symbol). In addition, at the time of temporary stop of production design TZ1-TZ3, action production at the time of stop by the 1st mode design is performed.

  By doing this, during the period in which the effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the normal size, the effect of the variable effect is produced by increasing the movement of the effect symbols while enhancing the decorativeness of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. While improving, during the period when the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a reduced size, the decorativeness of the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is lowered and the movement of the production symbols is reduced to reduce the identification (visibility) of the production symbols. It is possible to secure and to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a display example in the case where the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect pattern B 001 (without pseudo-scoring) is executed in the high probability gaming state (rendering mode B).

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the image display device 14, three second mode symbols (second effect symbols) “1”, “3” and “5” are stopped and displayed as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. It is being displayed, and the 3rd 3rd pattern (the 3rd production design) "1" "3" "5" is stopped and displayed as special production design TZ4 corresponding to production design TZ1-TZ3.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the hold icon A00 in the normal mode displayed on the first display portion 141a of the second hold icon display area 143 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and changed to the changing icon A00. Then, the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 start variable display. Along with this, the special effect pattern TZ4 also starts variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (c), when a predetermined time has passed from the start of fluctuation, the second mode symbol "8" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 without performing the action effect at stop. At this time, the left symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (d), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the effect pattern TZ1, the second mode symbol "5" is temporarily stopped as the effect pattern TZ3 without performing the action effect at the time of stop. At this time, the right symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (e), when a predetermined time has elapsed after temporary stop of the effect pattern TZ3, the first mode symbol "2" is temporarily stopped as the effect pattern TZ2 without performing the action effect at the time of stop. At this time, the middle symbol of the special effect pattern TZ4 corresponding to the effect pattern TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the second mode symbol "2" as the effect symbol TZ2 is temporarily stopped, the second mode symbol "as effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3" 8 "," 2 ", and" 5 "are stopped and displayed, and a combination of effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 for reporting a loss is displayed. Along with this, three third mode symbols “8” “2” “5” corresponding to the first mode symbols “8” “2” “5” are stopped and displayed as the special effect pattern TZ 4, and the fluctuation effect ends .

  As described above, when the fluctuation effect pattern B001 (no pseudo-scratching normal fluctuation) is executed in the high probability gaming state (rendering mode B), the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 are the first over the entire period from the start of the fluctuation to the fluctuation stop. It has become to be displayed by 2 mode design (the 2nd production design). In addition, at the time of temporary stop of production design TZ1-TZ3, action production at the time of stop by the 2nd mode design is not performed.

  In addition, also about all the fluctuation production patterns in other fluctuation production patterns in the high probability gaming state (rendering mode B) and the low probability time short gaming state (rendering mode C), it is fluctuation similarly to the case of the fluctuation playing pattern B001 mentioned above The rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the second mode symbol (the second rendering symbol) over the entire period from the start to the fluctuation stop. In addition, at the time of temporary stop of production design TZ1-TZ3, action production at the time of stop by the 2nd mode design is not performed.

  By doing this, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect (variation display) to be executed is more likely to be shorter than the normal gaming state (the super shortening fluctuation is easily performed) in the high probability gaming state or the low probability time short gaming state By reducing the decorativeness of the designs TZ1 to TZ3 and reducing the movement of the production design, the identification (visibility) of the production design can be secured, and it is difficult to identify the production design, thereby reducing the interest of the game. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, the third mode symbol (third effect symbol) is displayed in any of the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the high probability gaming state (effect mode B), and the low probability time short game state (effect mode C). The special effect pattern TZ4 to be played is configured not to execute the action effect at the time of stop. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of seeing the special effect pattern TZ4 smaller than the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp (recognize) the progressing state of the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A), the high probability gaming state (rendering mode B), and the low probability time minor gaming state (rendering mode C), the special effect design TZ4 is used as the third mode symbol (first It was made to display in 3 production symbols, but like the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the high probability gaming state (rendering mode B) and the low probability time short gaming state (rendering mode C), the second mode symbols (second representation) The symbol may be displayed.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A), during the period when the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is being executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the second mode symbol (second effect symbol) Although it has been described, it may be displayed in the third mode symbol (third effect symbol) in the same manner as the special effect symbol TZ4.

  Further, in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A), when the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is ended and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are returned to the normal size, the action effect at stop is performed. However, the stop action effect may not be performed, or the stop action effect may be performed in the case of the big hit and the stop action effect may not be performed in the case of the loss.

  Also, instead of notifying the result of the fluctuation effect (variation display) by the combination of three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed by the combination of three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and three special effect symbols TZ4 The result of may be reported.

  In addition, the combination of three special design symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of three special special design symbols TZ4 when the fluctuation effect (variation display) is finished are the same, but in the case of a big hit, the effect pattern TZ1 to T8 The combination of TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect designs TZ4 are made identical, and in the case of a loss, the combination of the effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 may be different. It is also good. In that case, the number of combinations of the three special effect designs TZ4 may be more or less than the number of combinations of the three effects designs TZ1 to TZ3.

(Display example from operation effect to operation effect)
Next, display examples from operation effect rotation to operation effect will be described using FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG.

  FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of a garbled effect executed during the first normal reach effect when the operation effect scenario A6-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

  First, as shown in FIG. 83 (a-1), when the display symbols 140 of the image display device 14 temporarily stop the rendering symbols TZ1 and TZ3 with the same rendering symbol "1" and normal reach rendering is started, An image 1A-1 or a promotion image 1A-2 is displayed to indicate that there is a possibility that a valid period may occur. A dark image consisting of a base image AG of the first embodiment and a button image BG in a normal state. The fake effect is executed as the) moves from the upper right to the lower left of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (a-2), the normal reach effect is continued, but the roaring image AG1 which has moved to the lower left of the screen disappears out of the screen, and the effective period does not occur. Non-emission of light is maintained. As a result, the player recognizes (acknowledges) that the executed operation effect has been a false effect.

  FIG. 83 (b) is a display example from operation effect turning to operation effect performed during the second normal reach effect in the case where the operation effect scenario A6-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A. .

  First, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-1), when the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the effect symbols TZ 1 and TZ 3 with the same effect symbol “1” in the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, An image 1A-1 (a dark or semi-transparent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promotion image 1A) is a screen that indicates that the image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A-2 may be displayed and a valid period may occur. Titling effect A moving from the upper right to the lower left is executed. Up to this point, since the effect mode is the same as the squeaky effect, the player can not grasp whether it is the squeaky effect or the sicca effect A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-2), in a state in which normal reach production is continued, a crawl image A1 which is continuously moved to the lower left of the screen and moved so as to be folded back toward the center of the screen The promotion image 1A-1 is displayed in place of the blurred image AG1. At this time, the effect button 18A emits white light and an effective period occurs, and the gauge width of the gauge image of the promotion image 1A-1 is reduced in accordance with the remaining time of the effective period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the effective period, the display of the promotion image 1A-1 displayed at the center of the screen in a state in which normal reach effect is continuing When the light emission and the effective period of the effect button 18A end and an image in which a large number of petals scatter is displayed over a predetermined period, the operation effect (flower blowing 3) is executed. As a result, the player is notified of the expectation (the big hit game is executed) of the big hit in the variable effect (the variable effect) being executed.

  As described above, the garbled staging effect and the staging effect A are renderings (stinging) to expect that the promotion image is displayed and the effective period may occur. Therefore, by performing the garbled staging effect and the staging effect A, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the effective period can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that when the garbled effect and the turning effect A are executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, it is a sign that the effective period occurs and the promotion image 2A (2A-1 to 2A-3) is displayed. The to-be-worn image AG3 (a dark or semi-transparent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promotion image 2A) is displayed.

  FIG. 84 (a) is a display example from operation effect wrap to operation effect executed during SPSP reach effect when the operation effect scenario A6-2 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

  First, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-1), at the predetermined timing during SPSP reach effect, an effective period occurs on the front side of the heart-shaped effect image, and the promotion image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A Image AG1 which indicates that -2 will be displayed, and image AG2 which indicates that accelerated image 1B-1 or accelerated image 1B-2 will be displayed due to the occurrence of a valid period (gauge image from accelerated image 1B The echo production B is executed by moving the dark or translucent image (excluding CG) in an annular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-2), in the state in which SPSP reach effect is continued, the turning effect B ends, and instead of the turning image AG1 and the turning image AG2, the radial effect image and the promotion image 1A -2 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 18A emits yellow light and an effective period occurs, and the gauge width of the gauge image of the promotion image 1A-2 is reduced in accordance with the remaining time of the effective period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the effective period, in the promotion image 1A-2 displayed at the center of the screen in the state where the SPSP reach effect continues. The operation effect (green cut-in 2) is displayed by the display and the light emission and effect period of the effect button 18A ending and the cut-in image CIG by the character 2 being displayed in green with a green background and / or edge. To be executed. As a result, the player is notified of the expectation (the big hit game is executed) of the big hit in the variable effect (the variable effect) being executed.

  FIG. 84 (b) is a display example from operation effect wrap to operation effect executed during SPSP reach effect when the operation effect scenario A6-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

  First, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-1), at a predetermined timing during SPSP reach effect, an effective period occurs on the front side of the heart-shaped effect image, and the promotion image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A The roaring image AG1 which predicts -2 to be displayed, and the roaring image AG2 which predicts that the promotion image 1B-1 or the promotion image 1B-2 is displayed due to the occurrence of a valid period moves in a ring shape. Thus, a sting effect B is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-2), in the state where the SPSP reach effect is continued, the turning effect B is ended, and instead of the turning image AG1 and the turning image AG2, the radial effect image and the promotion image 1B -2 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 18A changes from the normal state to the protruding state, and the effect button 18A in the protruding state emits yellow light and an effective period occurs, and the promotion image 1B-2 is adjusted according to the remaining time of the effective period. The gauge width of the gauge image shrinks.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the effective period, in the promotion image 1B-2 displayed at the center of the screen in a state where the SPSP reach effect continues. While the light emission and effective period of the display and effect button 18A are ended, the cut-in image CIG by the character 2 is displayed over a predetermined period with the background and / or the edge being red, and the operation effect (red cut-in 2) is displayed. To be executed. As a result, the player is notified of the expectation (the big hit game is executed) of the big hit in the variable effect (the variable effect) being executed.

  As described above, the turning effect B is an effect that predicts (predicts) the type of the promotion image to be displayed as well as determining that the promotion image is to be displayed when the effective period occurs. For this reason, by performing the roaring effect B, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation as to which type of promotion image is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the turning effect B is executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, a turning image AG3 which indicates that the promotion image 2A (2A-1 to 2A-3) is displayed due to the effective period occurring. , A false image AG4 (a dark or semi-transparent image obtained by removing the gauge image from the prompt image 2B), which indicates that the prompt image 2B (2B-1 to 2B-3) is displayed due to occurrence of the valid period, the valid period Image AG5 (a dark or semi-transparent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promotion image 3A) that indicates that the promotion image 3A (3A-1 to 3A-3) is to be displayed, and a valid period occurs Any of four images of a rotting image AG6 (a dark or semi-transparent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promotion image 3B) which is a sign that the promotion image 3B (3B-1 to 3B-3) is displayed Or 2 There has been adapted to be selectively displayed.

  In other words, in the perversion effect B executed in the effect modes A to C, it corresponds to one introductory image corresponding to the promotion image displayed during the effective period occurring thereafter, and the promotion image displayed during the effective period One more irritating image is displayed. For example, when the promotion image 2A-1 is displayed during the effective period in the effect mode B, one of the blurred image AG3 and the blurred images AG4 to AG6 is displayed as another image. By doing this, a clear contradiction does not occur between the blurred image and the promotion image displayed on the image display device 14, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that instead of randomly determining the other beat images displayed when the beat effect B is executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, they may be determined according to the expectation of the jackpot win. .

  Specifically, since the expectation of the jackpot winning when the defeated image is displayed is the beaten image AG3 <the beaten image AG4 <the beaten image AG5 <the beaten image AG6, the expectation for the jackpot win is lower as the expectation degree is lower. It is preferable that the low beat image (for example, the beat image AG3) is easy to be selected, and the higher the expectation of the big hit is, the easier to select the high beat image (for example, the beat image AG6). In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of the big hit by the other hit images, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when performing turning effect B in effect modes A to C, two or more may be displayed instead of displaying only one other promotion image. In this way, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning in more detail, when determining the other hit images according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning.

  In addition, with regard to the garbled staging effects performed in the rendering modes A to C, the staging effect A, and the staging effect B, the rendering mode is the same except that the type of the staging image displayed differs, but for each rendering mode Different rendering modes may be used, and the same rendering mode may be used in the two rendering modes, but different rendering modes may be used in the remaining one rendering mode. In this way, the manner of production of the roaring effect will be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, about the roving image and the promotion image, the roving image should not overlap in front of the reduced effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 displayed on the left side of the screen or the special effect pattern TZ4 displayed on the lower right of the screen. It is good to be displayed in a layer on the rear side of the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 or the special rendering symbol TZ4, or to be displayed at a position not overlapping at least one of the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special rendering symbol TZ4.

(Notice of handshake meeting)
Next, the handshake meeting advance notice will be described. The handshake event notice is constituted by a combination of the pending icon change notice and the fluctuating icon change notice, and the display of the fluctuating icon by the handshake event (operation including conversation) of the fluctuating icon in the special mode and the predetermined character It is an advance notice effect of whether the expectation of the big hit of the big hit judgment (special symbol lottery) corresponding to the changing icon is improved by changing the mode (so-called, whether the chance is raised or not), and the prior judgment It is a kind of pre-reading advance notice (continuous advance notice effect) performed based on the result. First, a presentation flow of a handshake meeting advance notice will be described using FIG.

  When the fluctuating icon that is the target of the handshake meeting advance notice is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 and the fluctuating display (rectification effect) of the effect pattern is started, the fluctuating icon display area 142 is firstly notified as the handshake meeting notice. A handshake meeting place appears in the vicinity, and a handshake character that shakes hands with a silhouette of a person involved in the changing icon and a guard character that guards the handshake character appear at a predetermined position on the display unit 140.

  Then, next, when the handshake character and the fluctuating icon shake hands, and a predetermined line appears from the handshake character along with the handshake, the color starts to gradually change under the fluctuating icon, and the color of the fluctuating icon changes. An effect (hereinafter referred to as "changing icon color change turning effect") of whether or not to change (whether or not the display mode of the changing icon changes) is executed. Then, when the color is completely changed (color change is successful), so-called "promotion success (chance up)" is obtained, and while the jackpot expectation for the icon during the change is increased, the color change is ended halfway, When returning to the color before the variable icon color change overdrow effect is performed (color change fails), it becomes so-called "promotion failure", and the jackpot expectation for the variable icon is maintained.

  When the first changing icon color change turning effect is over, then the second line appears again from the handshake character, and the handshake meeting notice continues, and the escort character is sent out for the changing icon Branch and branch when the notice of the handshake meeting is finished.

  When the second dialogue appears again from the handshake character and the handshake meeting advance is continued, the second changing icon color change turning presentation is executed. Then, during the second variation, as in the first case, during the second variation, the color changes completely (the color change is successful) and becomes the promotion success (chance up), or the color change is halfway It ends (color change fails) and it becomes promotion failure.

  Then, when the second changing icon color change overdrow effect is finished, the third line appears again from the handshake character, and the handshake party's notice continues again, and the escort character leaves the changing icon. A guide is given, and branching is performed when the handshake meeting advance notice ends.

  When the third dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting advance is continued, the third changing icon color change turning presentation is executed. Then, during the third variation, as in the case of the first and second times, the color changes completely and becomes a promotion success (chance up), or the color change ends halfway along as in the case of the first and second changes during the third change. It becomes promotion failure.

  Then, when the third changing icon color change turning effect is finished, the fourth line appears from the handshake character, and the handshake meeting notice continues further, and the escort character gives a discharge guidance to the changing icon. Go and branch when the notice of the handshake meeting is ended.

  When the fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the notice of the handshake meeting continues, in the fourth fluctuating icon color change inclining effect, the color must completely change and become a promotion success (chance up), The escort character gives an exit guidance to the changing icon, and the handshake meeting advance notice ends.

  Next, a handshake meeting advance notice will be described using a specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the hold icons A10 to A12 of the normal mode are displayed on the first display portion 141a to the third display portion 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, a loss is indicated. It is assumed that the stop display of the effect pattern shown is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 88 (b) to 88 (c), the pending icons A10 to A12 displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c are changing icon display area 142, the first While shifting to the display part 141a and the 2nd display part 141b, the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is started. In addition, since the hold icon A10 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the holding icon A10 to the changing icon A10.

  And, when the fluctuation display of the production design (the fluctuation display of the special design) is executed, the game ball enters the 1st starting opening 6, the 1st special figure reservation occurs newly, the said 1st The first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of the special view reservation, and it is determined in the start opening winning processing that it is determined to execute a handshake meeting advance notice, and the number of lines of the handshake meeting announcement is twice. The color of the changing icon changes to green (fourth special embodiment 12) in the fourth special aspect 21 → first line at the time of winning → the color of the changing icon in the second line is red (fourth It is assumed that an icon display mode scenario for notifying the handshake event of the content of the effect changing to the special mode 13) is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 89A, the hold icon A13 corresponding to the newly generated first special view hold is displayed in the fourth special mode 21. At this time, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the display mode of the fluctuating icon A10 does not change, but the hold icons A11 and A12 corresponding to the advance hold for the newly generated first special view hold is the fourth special While changing to the mode 41, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the handshake meeting site AK appears in the vicinity of the fluctuating icon display area 142 while partially hiding in the effect EF1.

  In addition, holding icon A13 is displayed in the fourth special mode 21 and holding icons A11 and A12 are displayed in the fourth special mode 41 by executing the handshake meeting advance notice based on the occurrence of the first special view holding. In this case, a heart is attached to the chest portion of the silhouette of the person pertaining to the hold icon A13 that is the subject of the handshake meeting advance notice so that the player can easily recognize the target of the handshake meeting advance notice. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), when the effect EF1 is deleted, the handshake character C1 that performs handshake related to the handshake meeting advance notice and the escort character C2 that guards the handshake character C1 are in the handshake meeting room AK. Appear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the stop display of the effect pattern indicating a loss is performed, and the fluctuating icon A10 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 90 (b), it corresponds to the hold icon A11. When the variable display of the effect pattern to be performed is started, the reserved icons A11 to A13 shift, and shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portions 141a and 141b, respectively. Here, the hold icon A11 shifts from the hold icon A11 to the changing icon A11 to shift to the changing icon display area 142, and the display mode changes from the fourth special mode 41 to the fourth special mode 31 along with the shift. Change.

  Also, as soon as the floating icon A11 is displayed in the floating icon display area 142, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the silhouette of the person related to the floating icon A11 and the handshake character C1 shake hands. Here, since the fluctuating icon A11 is not the target of the suggestion of the jackpot expectation of the handshake meeting advance notice, the dialogue character does not appear from the handshake character C1, and the display mode (color) of the fluctuating icon A11 also changes. do not do.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 (b) and 90 (c), the hold icon A13 of the fourth special mode 21, the hold icon A12 of the fourth special mode 41, and the fluctuating icon A11 of the fourth special mode 31 are displayed. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 while the handshake event notice suggestion effect is being executed, in other words, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the ball entry is displayed in the normal mode. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, this is caused by entering the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 before the end of the handshake meeting advance notice, when it is determined to execute the handshake meeting advance notice. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special view hold. However, the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special view hold generated by entering the first starting opening 6 etc. by the end of the handshake meeting advance notice is permitted, and the icon display mode determined The hold icon A14 may be displayed in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  While the variable display of the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuating icon A11 is finished, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the escort character C2 performs an operation to check the clock, and the variable display of the effect pattern is ended. Suggest that. Then, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the variation start to stop, as shown in FIG. 91 (a) to FIG. 91 (b), the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation for the changing icon A11. The handshake character C1 performs an action (bye-bye) to say goodbye to the fluctuating icon A11, and the fluctuating icon A11 is shrunk as if it is leaving. Then, as shown in FIG. 91C, when the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 is performed, the fluctuating icon A11 is completely erased, and the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 return to the standby state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the pending icon A13 which is the target of the handshake meeting advance notice is shifted from the first display portion 141a to the changing icon display area 142, and the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 11 is displayed. As A13, the silhouette of the person relating to the fluctuating icon A13 and the handshake character C1 immediately shake hands.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 while the handshake party advance notice is being executed, the reserved icon A15 corresponding to the entered ball is displayed in the normal mode. Be done. In the present embodiment, this is caused by entering the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 before the end of the handshake meeting advance notice, when it is determined to execute the handshake meeting advance notice. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special view hold. However, the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special view hold generated by entering the first starting opening 6 etc. by the end of the handshake meeting advance notice is permitted, and the icon display mode determined The hold icon A14 may be displayed in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  When a handshake is performed between the fluctuating icon A13 and the handshake character C1 in the fourth special aspect 11, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the first dialogue appears from the handshake character C1 and FIG. 92 (c) As shown in FIG. 6, during the change, the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, from white to green). Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), when the color of the fluctuating icon A13 completely changes and the color change succeeds, the fluctuating icon A13 performs a gut pose to succeed in the change (promotion) of the color. The semi-transparent effect EF2 indicating the success of the color change is displayed visibly on the fluctuating icon A13.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), when the fluctuating icon A13 continues the handshake with the handshake character C1 in the color (here, green) after changing due to the first fluctuating icon color change overturn effect. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second line appears from the handshake character C1, and the color of the fluctuating icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom to the bottom (here, from green to red). A roaring effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), when the color of the fluctuating icon A13 completely changes and the color change succeeds, the fluctuating icon A13 again pauses, and the color change (promotion) is performed. Take action to indicate success.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), while the reach state is established, the escort character C2 performs the exit guidance operation on the fluctuating icon A13, and the handshake character C1 separates from the fluctuating icon A13. When it is notified that the notice of the handshake meeting is finished, the predetermined reach effect (for example, normal reach) is started, as shown in FIG. 94 (b) to FIG. 94 (c). In addition, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are erased along with the execution of the development effect that develops to SP reach, and the display mode of the during-changing icon A13 displayed in the fourth special mode 13 is red at that time. It changes to the 2nd special mode 13 in common, a handshake meeting advance is finished, and SP reach is started.

  As described above, by the notice of the handshake meeting, the color of the changing icon (in a wide sense, the display mode) gradually changes, and the changing icon color overproduction of whether the color changes or not is performed. As described above, by displaying the color change process, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the changing icon and easily recognize the change of the color of the changing icon.

  In the present embodiment, although it is a color that changes as a target of the handshake meeting advance notice, the change target is not limited to the color, and may be the size or shape of the changing icon. Furthermore, the change process may be displayed by appropriately combining a plurality of elements constituting the display mode of the changing icon such as color, size and shape. When a plurality of elements are appropriately combined, for example, the color changes in the first line appearance, the size changes in the second line appearance, and the shape changes in the third line appearance; It is also possible to change the changing elements according to the order of.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting advance notice is carried out based on the pre-judgment result, but the jackpot decision result of the special view judgment information targeted for the handshake meeting advance notice, the special symbol judgment result, or the special view fluctuation It is also possible to do based on the pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting advance notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect pattern, but the execution timing of the handshake meeting advance notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the contents of the change effect production can do. As other execution timings of the handshake party advance notice, it develops into a predetermined cut-in notice, speech advance notice, appearance of character, or super reach at the time of pseudo stop or re-variation, so-called step-up advance step-up. At the time of execution of the development effect, at the time of reaching the reach state, or at the time of execution of a predetermined operation effect by the effect product device 17, the setting can be appropriately made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting advance notice is given to the changing icon, but can be given to the hold icon. In this case, for example, the handshake meeting venue appears in the vicinity of any one of the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d, and is displayed on the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d where the handshake conference hall appears. It is also possible to give notice of a handshake meeting to the hold icon and display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, the method for determining the contents of the presentation of the handshake notification by the icon display mode scenario determination for handshake notification in the present embodiment (steps S1307-4 to S1305-4-12, FIG. 55 to FIG. A handshake meeting can be made in the same manner as in FIG.

  Also, as another embodiment for giving a notice of a handshake event, for example, during the variable display of the effect pattern, the handshake character shakes hands sequentially to all or a part of the icons displayed at that time. In this way, it is possible to give notice of a handshake meeting and display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, for example, when change presentation is started, it can be performed by determining, for example, which icon the handshake meeting advance notice is to be executed on, and the display mode after change in the case of execution. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the process of the color change of the icon (change of the display mode) is displayed, the icon and the handshake character are shaking hands, in other words, the color change target icon The action is being performed, but some action is performed one or more times before the color change target icon changes color, and the color changes after the action ends (for example, a predetermined character for the target icon It is also possible to kisses and change the color of the target icon after the kiss is finished), and the color change may be more easily performed as the number of actions increases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one to four lines of speech appear for one handshake meeting advance notice, and one changing icon color change overdue effect is executed with the appearance of one line. Ru. Therefore, as the number of lines appearing in one handshake meeting notice increases, the possibility of color change success, in other words, the probability of winning a jackpot win increases (chance up) increases, so the player The interest of the game can be improved by focusing attention on the appearance of lines. In addition, even if a color change fails in a certain changing icon color change presentation, or even if a desired change is not made, in the notice of one handshake event, if the next line appears, the player's color It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for change (increase of jackpot expectation).

  In the present embodiment, one handshake meeting advance notice is executed in one variation production (variation display of production design), but a plurality of handshake conference notices in one fluctuation production (variation display of production design) Can also be implemented. Then, the number of lines of notice of each handshake meeting notice of the plural handshake meetings is determined by a scenario or by an independent drawing, and the color change is successful as the number of lines appearing in the plural handshake meeting notices increases. In other words, it is possible to increase the probability that the jackpot expectation is high (chance up).

  In addition, the fact that the possibility of color change success increases as the number of lines increases, it means that the time for shaking hands at the handshake meeting notice, in other words, the action is performed on the icon that is the target of the handshake meeting notice. The longer the time is spent, the higher the possibility of the color change success, so that the player can pay attention to the operation and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the notice content of the handshake event is one handshake, it is an effect that one or more lines appear, and this is caused by the time when the number of lines is shaking hands However, for example, it is possible to set the effect content in which one or more words are issued in one speech, and to change the time of shaking hands with the length of the words in one speech.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one to four lines of speech appear for one handshake meeting advance notice, and one changing icon color change overdue effect is executed with the appearance of one line. Ru. Therefore, as the number of lines appearing in one handshake meeting advance notice increases, the possibility of color change success, in other words, the probability of winning a jackpot win increases (chance up).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the appearing handshake meeting venue AK, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are set to one type, but a plurality of types are set respectively, and the number of speech times ( It is also possible to make the expectation of the color change success different from the handshake meeting advance notice step number), the time of shaking hands (demonstration time of the handshake meeting advance notice), and the like.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first line content, the second line content, the third line content and the fourth line content in the handshake meeting advance notice are set to be different from each other, and each line content Is set to one type. Here, a plurality of types of speech contents of each time are set, and the expectation degree of the color change success can be made to differ depending on the speech contents. Moreover, it is also possible to set a speech content according to the kind of handshake character. Furthermore, the handshake character can be made to be selected by the player by operating the selection button 19A and the effect button 18A, for example, in a preset period such as a customer waiting state.

(Tossing kiss notice)
Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described. The throwing kiss notice is constituted by the pending icon change notice and / or the changing icon change notice, and the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss (the action of skipping the heart) by the predetermined character, and the jackpot determination corresponding to the icon It is a notice effect of whether or not to improve the jackpot expectation of (special symbol lottery) (so-called, chance up or not), and it is a kind of pre-reading notice performed based on the pre-judgment result (hold icon change In the case of being executed by the icon change notice in advance notice and change, it can also be said to be a continuous notice effect. First, the presentation flow of the throwing kiss preview will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the throwing kiss announcement is started, a predetermined character first appears at a predetermined position on the display unit 140. In the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed along with the start of the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern.

  The character which has appeared either casts a heart toward any of the already displayed icons (hold icon or fluctuating icon) or throws away without performing a kisses and disappears from the display unit 140. When the character leaves and disappears from the display unit 140, the throwing kiss notice ends.

  When a character kisses a kisses, a heart hits the icon targeted by the kisses, and a predetermined effect is generated on the icon. Then, after the effect disappears, if the display mode of the icon changes, the character performs an operation according to the success of the change of the display mode, and then disappears.

  On the other hand, if the display mode of the icon does not change after the effect disappears, the character performs an operation according to the failure of the change of the display mode and then disappears.

  Next, a state in which the throwing kiss notice is executed after the holding icon to be subjected to the throwing kiss notice changes to the special mode will be described with reference to FIGS. For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the hold icon A21 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display portion 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and the hold icon A20 in the normal mode is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142. When displayed, it is assumed that the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern is performed.

  Then, the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the first special view is newly generated, and the first starting opening winning designation command is the effect control board 102 according to the first special view being held. It is determined that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed in the start winning process, and the throwing kiss notice is determined to be the scenario 93.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the hold icon A22 corresponding to the above-mentioned newly generated first special view hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then stop display of the effect design showing a loss is performed At the same time, the fluctuating icon A20 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), when the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the reserved icons A21 to A22 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 141a, respectively. Here, the hold icon A21 is changed from the hold icon A21 to a changing icon A21 in order to shift to the changing icon display area 142. In addition, the display mode of the holding icon A22 changes to the second special mode 13 (red) along with the shift to the first display unit 141a.

  Then, the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the first special view is newly generated, and the first starting opening winning designation command is the effect control board 102 according to the first special view being held. It is assumed that it is determined that the throwing kiss notice is not to be executed in the start winning process.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the hold icon A23 corresponding to the above-mentioned newly generated first special view hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then the stop display of the effect design showing a loss is displayed. At the same time, the fluctuating icon A21 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), when the variable display of the effect pattern is started, the reserved icons A22 to A23 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 141a, respectively, and the throwing kiss is notified in advance. The character C3 concerned appears, and a changing icon change notice is started. Here, the hold icon A22 shifts from the hold icon A22 to the changing icon A22 in order to shift to the changing icon display area, and the display mode is changed from the second special mode 13 (red) to the second special mode according to the shift. Change to 14 (zebra pattern).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the character C3 throws a kisses to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. The icon for skipping the heart HT is determined by the normal icon display mode scenario indicated by the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information suspension storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in this case, it is directed to the fluctuating icon A20. It is assumed that the heart HT has been skipped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the heart HT strikes the fluctuating icon A20, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the fluctuating icon A20, making the fluctuating icon A20 difficult to see or invisible. (Not shown).

  Thereafter, when the predetermined effect is deleted, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the display mode of the in-motion icon A22 changes from the second special mode 14 to the second special mode 15 (rainbow), and A change notification image HG notifying that the display mode of the icon has been changed by “20% up” is displayed in the vicinity of the fluctuating icon A22 which is the target of the throwing kiss notice, and the display mode of the icon from the voice output device 15 A voice notifying of the change of is output (for example, "power-up" is emitted by the voice of the character C3), and the illumination device 16 for effect performs the illumination effect in a mode dedicated to the change. Note that, in the present embodiment, the change notification image HG is formed of an image including the text “power up”, but the display mode is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

  Then, after the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change in the display mode (in FIG. 97 (b), an operation of spreading both hands with a smile), the character C3 is erased as shown in FIG. 97 (c). .

  Next, the throwing kiss announcement will be described using another specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 98A, when the hold icons A30 and A31 of the normal mode (white) are displayed on the first display portion 141a and the second display portion 141b of the first hold icon display area 141. It is assumed that stop display of the effect pattern indicating a loss has been performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the pending icons A30 and A31 displayed on the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. At the same time, when the variable display of the effect pattern is started, the character C3 relating to the throwing kiss notice appears. In addition, since the hold icon A30 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A30 to the changing icon A30.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the character C3 throws a kisses to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. Here, it is assumed that the heart HT is blown toward the fluctuating icon A30.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the heart HT strikes the fluctuating icon A30, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the fluctuating icon A30, making the fluctuating icon A30 difficult to see or invisible. (Not shown).

  After that, when the predetermined effect is erased, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the display mode of the fluctuating icon A30 is changed to the second special mode 11 (white), and from the audio output device 15, the display mode is changed. A voice notifying of the change is output (for example, "power-up" is emitted by the voice of the character C3), and the illumination device 16 for effect performs the illumination effect in a mode dedicated to the change.

  Then, the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change of the display mode, and then is erased as shown in FIG. 99 (c).

  As described above, when the changing icon changes due to the throwing kiss notice, the display of the change notification image HG by the image display device 14, the occurrence of “power-up” by the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16. Since it is notified that the changing icon has changed by the illumination effect according to the aspect dedicated to the change, the player can easily recognize that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the change notification image HG, the fact that the changing icon has changed is also notified by the character C3 performing a successful operation according to the change of the changing icon. As described above, since it is notified that the changing icon has changed due to the shape and the character, it is easy for the player to understand that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect illumination device 16 notify that the changing icon has changed, but the notification is a part of these various effect devices ( For example, any one or two of the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect illumination device 16 may be used.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 95 to FIG. 99, a specific example has been described in which the throwing kiss notice is given to the fluctuating icon, but similarly to the holding icon, the change of the throwing kiss notice and the display mode of the icon Notification is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is performed only when the shape of the icon does not change but the color of the icon changes, but the display mode is also performed when the shape of the icon changes. It is also possible to notify of the change of As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the change in the icon display mode, and to suppress the decrease in the rendering effect due to the change in the icon display mode.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, “power-up 20%” is displayed in the change notification image HG, but the “20%” part is based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change. It can also be made selectable. Also, the color and size of the change notification image HG can be changed instead of the "20%" portion based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change.

  Further, notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change of the display mode of the icon is performed for the change of the display mode of the icon performed through the action of the throwing kiss by the character C3, but such an action For example, it can also be performed for a change in the display mode of the icon that is suddenly performed when the icon is shifted.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is performed based on the preliminary determination result, but the jackpot determination result of the special view determination information to be the target of the throwing kiss notice, the special symbol determination result, or the special figure change It is also possible to do based on the pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect pattern, but the execution timing of the throwing kiss notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the contents of the change production. can do. As another execution timing of the throwing kiss notice, it develops into a predetermined cut-in notice, speech notice, appearance of character, or super reach at the time of temporary stop or re-variation of pseudo ream, step-up of so-called step-up notice. At the time of execution of the development effect, when the reach state is established, it is possible to appropriately set to a predetermined operation effect by the effect thing device 17 or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one heart is blown toward one icon at one notice of a throwing kiss, and it is notified whether or not the display mode changes once for one icon. However, it is predicted whether or not the display mode changes multiple times with respect to one icon, in which a plurality of hearts are blown toward one icon at the same time or every predetermined time interval in one throwing kiss notice. May be performed. In this case, it is also possible to execute notification of the change in the display mode of the icon each time the display mode of the icon changes, and also for one throwing kiss notice (after the last heart is skipped ) It is also possible to perform notification of changes in the display mode of the icons once at once.

  Furthermore, it may be possible to give notice of whether or not the display mode changes with respect to a plurality of icons by sending a heart to a plurality of icons in a single notice of the throwing kiss. In this case, it is also possible to execute notification of the change in the display mode of the icons for all the icons whose display modes have changed, and the display mode of the icons with respect to some of the icons whose display modes have changed. It is also possible to notify of the change of

(Pre-reading zone effect, zone turn effect and zone precursor effect)
Next, the pre-read zone effect, zone turn effect and zone precursor effect will be described. The pre-reading zone effect is an advance notice effect that suggests the jackpot winning expectation level over one or more fluctuation effects, and the zone turning effect is an advance notice effect asking whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed, It is performed using a special symbol in the variable display and stop display of the production symbol. The zone precursor effect is an advance notice effect for suggesting or notifying execution of the pre-reading zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in the pre-reading zone effect informing mode or the pre-reading zone effect informing mode. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect, the zone turning effect, and the pre-zone effect are executed in the variable effect in the effect mode A, and are performed on the basis of the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command. It is a kind of preview effect). First, an outline of the pre-reading zone effect, the zone turning effect, and the zone precursor effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-1), when the zone turning success effect is executed in the fluctuation display (variation production) of the production design, the time of the start of the fluctuation display of the next production design The pre-reading zone effect is started from. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-2), when the zone turning failure effect is executed in the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the production symbol, the prefetch zone is started from the start of the fluctuation display of the next production symbol. The production is not performed.

  Here, when the zone turning success effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 87 (b-1), when the change display of the effect pattern is being performed, the left pattern of the left area of the display unit 140 is first performed. The "pre-reading" symbol stops, and then the "zone" symbol stops as the right symbol on the right side of the display unit 140, suggesting that the pre-reading zone effect will be performed, and finally, the middle symbol of the central region of the display unit 140 "Push" symbol stops as. In this way, all special symbols set in advance ("prefetched" symbol, "zone" symbol and "stop" symbol) are stopped to become "special symbol aligned", and pre-reading zone effect is executed It is informed.

  On the other hand, when zone turning failure effect 1 is executed as a zone turning failure effect, as shown in FIG. 87 (b-2), when the fluctuation display of the effect design is being performed, "left symbol first" The "pre-reading" symbol is stopped, then the "zone" symbol is stopped as the right symbol, and finally, the execution of the pre-reading zone effect is suggested by trying to stop the "rush" symbol as the middle symbol, but it does not stop The normal effect pattern determined by the normal effect pattern stop display pattern determination in step S1309-3 is stopped as a middle pattern. As described above, when only a part of the special symbol set in advance is stopped, it becomes "special symbol irregular", and it is informed that the pre-reading zone effect is not performed.

  When a special symbol appears as a zone turning effect, the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed until then may be displayed in a contracted state in the upper right portion of the display unit 140, for example. For example, when a special symbol appears while the normal effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are variably displayed in the upper right portion of the display unit 140 along with the appearance. Then, when the variable display ends and special symbol alignment or special symbol misalignment is performed, the same stopping time (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) as the normal case in the upper right portion of the display unit 140, A stop display of reduced normal effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 (effect symbols indicating a loss) is performed. Furthermore, when special symbol alignment or special symbol unevenness ends and new variable display is started, the special symbol is erased and the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed while being returned to the original size It moves to the normal position in the part 140, and the variation display of the effect pattern as usual is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 (c-1) and 87 (c-2), the change in size of the changing icon performed in conjunction with the zone turning effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the size of the fluctuating icon increases in accordance with the stop of the special symbol performed as the zone turning effect.

  In the zone turning success effect, the size of the fluctuating icon increases by one step according to the stop of the “prefetch” symbol, and the size of the fluctuating icon increases by one step according to the stop of the “zone” symbol, and the second step The size of the fluctuating icon is further increased by one step according to the stop of the "rush" symbol, and becomes the third step. In addition, when the zone turning success effect is finished and the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, the fluctuating icon is maintained at the size of the third step.

  On the other hand, in zone turning failure effect 1, the size of the fluctuating icon is increased by one step according to the stop of the "prefetch" symbol, and the size of the fluctuating icon is further increased by one step according to the stop of the "zone" symbol. In the second stage, the sliding of the "Plunge" symbol returns the size of the floating icon to its original normal size.

  As described above, by gradually increasing the size of the changing icon which the player can easily pay attention to, it is possible to have a stronger sense of expectation for the pre-reading zone effect.

  Next, specific examples of pre-read zone effect, zone precursor effect and zone turn effect will be described. Here, the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 when the number of the first special view reserve is "2", and the first special view reserve is newly generated, and the first special view reserve is generated. Accordingly, the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start opening winning processing, finally, the pre-reading zone effect scenario No "6" shown in FIG. 50 and the precursor effect scenario "14 shown in FIG. A specific example in the case where the icon display mode scenario “8” shown in FIG. 53 is selected as an example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), when the first to third display portions 141a to 141b of the first on-hold icon display area 141 are displaying the on-hold icons A40 to A42 in the normal mode, an effect showing a loss When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the fluctuating icon displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A40, the hold icons A40 to A42 change the icon display area 142 during change, the first display portion 141a, While shifting to the 2nd indicator 141b, the fluctuation indicatory of production design is started. In addition, since the hold icon A40 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A40 to the changing icon A40.

  And, when the fluctuation display (the fluctuation production) of the production design is executed, the game ball enters the 1st starting opening 6, the 1st special figure reservation newly occurs, the 1st special figure reservation concerned In response to the occurrence of the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, in the processing at the time of starting opening winning, pre-reading zone effect scenario No "6" shown in FIG. 50 and a prologue effect scenario "14 shown in FIG. It is assumed that "-3" is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the suspension icon A43 corresponding to the newly generated first special view suspension is displayed in the third special mode 41, and is shown in FIG. 100 (d). Thus, the hold icons A41 and A42 and the fluctuating icon A40 corresponding to the preceding hold for the newly generated first special view hold change to the third special mode 41.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), as shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the variation display of the effect design started in FIG. 100 (b) is stopped and displayed with the effect design indicating a loss, The fluctuating icon A 40 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the change display of the effect pattern corresponding to the hold icon A41 is started, each of the hold icons A41 to A43 is in the changing icon display area 142, the first display section 141a, while shifting to the second display portion 141b, the display mode of the icon A43 which is an execution target of the prefetch zone effect is changed to the third special mode 21 (the prefetch zone effect suggestive mode 2), and the prefetch zone effect is not performed The display modes of the icons A41 and A42, which are the icons A41 and A42, change to the third special mode 51 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2). In addition, since the hold icon A41 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A41 to the changing icon A41.

  Here, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the icon is already displayed in the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2, so as shown in FIG. Zone effect non-target icon) A44 is displayed on the third display portion 141 c in the same pre-reading zone effect indication mode 2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the fluctuation display of the production design corresponding to the fluctuating icon A41 is the production design of the production design two before the fluctuation display of the production design corresponding to the icon A43 which is the zone effect target icon. Since the variable display is performed, zone turning effects are executed during the variable display of the effect pattern.

  Here, since the zone turn effect is determined to be a zone turn success effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (a) to FIG. 102 (c), the “look ahead” symbol, “zone” symbol, as zone turn effect And, it is informed that the "rush" symbol is temporarily stopped in order, and the pre-reading zone effect is executed. Here, the size of the fluctuating icon A 42 gradually increases in accordance with the stop of the "prefetch" symbol, the stop of the "zone" symbol, and the stop of the "rush" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the fluctuation display of the effect design started in FIG. 101 (c) is completely stopped and displayed in a state of being aligned with the special symbol, the fluctuation icon A41 is erased Ru. In this case, the normal effect design may be sequentially stopped and displayed in the state of being shrunk to the upper right portion of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 corresponding to the stop display of each of the three special symbols. It becomes a combination of the production design which becomes a loss.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the variable display of the effect pattern corresponding to the reserve icon A42 is started, the prefetch zone background image HK indicating that it is the prefetch zone is displayed, and the BGM and the illumination mode are displayed. Is switched from that of the effect mode A to that for the pre-reading zone effect, the pre-reading zone effect is started. That is, although the start icons have not been changed from the start time of the hold icon change advance notice and the continuous advance notice effect, the execution times are performed so as to overlap.

  Further, each of the hold icons A42 to A44 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b. Here, since the hold icon A42 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A42 to the changing icon A42.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is an execution target of the pre-reading zone effect, changes to the third special mode 31 (pre-reading zone effect notification mode), and the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44 which are non-target of the pre-reading zone effect Is changed to the third special mode 61 (pre-reading zone effect notification mode). In addition, the size of the fluctuating icon A 42 continues to be the third size.

  Here, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, since the icon is already displayed in the pre-reading zone effect notification mode, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the hold icon (zone related to the ball entry) The effect non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display portion 141 c in the same pre-reading zone effect notification mode 6.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), when the fluctuation display of the effect design started in FIG. 103 (b) is stopped and displayed with the effect design indicating a loss, it is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 The fluctuating icon A42 of the third special aspect 31 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern corresponding to the hold icon A43 related to the starting opening prize designation command which has caused the pre-reading zone effect is started, the hold icon Each of A43 to A45 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display portion 141a, and the second display portion 141b, and the pre-reading zone effect is continued. In addition, since the hold icon A43 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A43 to the changing icon A43.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the variable display of the effect symbol and the reach state is established, the display mode of the in-motion icon A43 changes to the third special mode 33. Then, the color of the main silhouette portion turns red, and the pre-reading zone effect continues.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the predetermined super reach effect (for example, SP reach) is developed, the pending icons A44 and A45 displayed until just before that are hidden and the fluctuating icon A43 is displayed. The display mode of is changed to the third special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette portion becomes a zebra pattern, and the pre-reading zone effect is finished.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), when the stop display of the effect symbol (“7” match) indicating the big hit is performed, the seven silhouettes of the fluctuating icon A43 are notified of the big hit and As a result, I raise my hands and express joy.

  As described above, when the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the pre-reading zone effect is a pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode before the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the zone precursor effect that suggests the execution of the pre-reading zone effect Is done. Here, in the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode, the expectation zone 1 has high expectation from the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 1 and the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 1 (the third special aspect 1 and the third special aspect 4). A prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2 (third special mode 2, third special mode 5) is provided. In the following, the zone precursor effect by the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 is referred to as "zone precursor effect 1", and the zone flag effect by the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2 is referred to as "zone precursor effect 2".

  The pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 1 is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone precursor effect 1, and the characters “? Zone?” Are attached as the icon display mode, and the number of people of the silhouette of the person is configured by three people. In addition, the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2 is also an icon display mode dedicated to zone pre-event effect 2 with the letters “Δ zone Δ” attached as an icon display mode, and the number of people's silhouettes is five There is. Therefore, the player suggests that the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed by looking at the icons (the pending icon and the fluctuating icon) displayed in the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2. Since it is possible to easily recognize that the prognostic effect is being performed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

  When the pre-reading zone is being executed, it is informed that pre-reading zone effect is being executed by setting the display mode of the icon to the pre-reading zone effect notification mode (the third special mode 3 and the third special mode 6) Zone notification production is performed.

  The pre-reading zone effect notification mode is an icon display mode dedicated to zone notification effect, with the letter “○ zone ○” attached as the icon display mode, and the number of people in the silhouette is seven. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the zone notification effect is being performed by looking at the icons (the hold icon and the changing icon) displayed in the pre-reading zone effect notification mode. It is possible to prevent the reduction of the effect.

  Further, zone precursor effects 1 and 2 and zone notification effect are provided as effects indicating the prefetch zone execution expectation degree, and the prefetch zone execution expectation degrees indicated by each effect are zone precursor effect 1 <zone precursor effect 2 <zone It is an announcement effect. And since the icon display mode according to zone precursor effect 1, the icon display mode according to zone precursor effect 2 and the icon display mode according to zone notification effect are different from each other, the player can easily expect the prefetching zone execution expectation. It can be recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although there are one type of prefetch zone effect, a plurality of types of prefetch zone effects different in the jackpot winning expectation may be provided. In this case, a first pre-reading zone effect and a second pre-reading zone effect having a higher jackpot expectation than the first pre-reading zone effect are provided, and the second pre-reading zone effect is via the first pre-reading zone effect. It is also possible that there is a case where it is executed from the first pre-reading zone effect and a case where it is suddenly executed without passing through the first pre-reading zone effect. Then, the type of pre-reading zone effect to be executed can be suggested according to the type of zone precursor effect.

  The icon according to the third special aspect is the same for the shape of the main silhouette portion regardless of the type, but the color of the main silhouette portion differs depending on the type, and the jackpot winning expectation differs depending on the color. Also, the icons according to the third special mode differ depending on the type of characters attached to the number of people in the secondary silhouette part (“? Zone?”, “Δ zone Δ”, “○ zone ○”) The icon according to the third special aspect is a letter attached with the number of people in the secondary silhouette part, and the prefetching execution expectation is different.

  Therefore, when the pre-reading zone suggestion effect and the pre-reading zone notification effect are executed, if attention is paid to the display mode of the icon, the player can also recognize the big hit winning expectation in addition to the pre-reading zone execution expectation. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the elements constituting the third special modes 1 to 6 suggest the prefetching execution expectation and the jackpot winning expectation, but the suggested content is not limited to this, and may be set appropriately. it can. For example, depending on the elements constituting the third special aspects 1 to 6, an expectation degree at which a specific effect such as SP reach or SPSP reach or pseudo ream is executed, or a specific type of jackpot such as a probability variation jackpot or long jack It is possible to be able to indicate the degree of expectation to be made.

Furthermore, although the prefetch execution expectation degree and the big hit winning expectation degree are suggested or notified by the display mode of the icon, these suggestions or notifications are not the display mode of the icon, for example, the display mode of the effect pattern or the feature for effect It can also be performed by other specific effects such as the operation mode of the movable part 17A of the device 17. Although the zone precursor effect is performed on an icon, it may be performed using another image such as a background image or effect pattern displayed on the display unit 140. In addition, the zone precursor effect can be performed not using the image display device 14 but using other effect devices such as the sound output device 15, the effect illumination device 16, and the effect product device 17.

  Further, depending on the elements constituting the icon display mode, the number of suggested contents is not limited to the embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. In addition, as an element constituting an icon display mode that suggests a predetermined matter, the shape, size, operation mode, etc. of the icon can be appropriately set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect and the pre-zone effect effect and the zone notification effect are performed based on the pre-determination result, but the special-image determination to be the target of the pre-reading zone effect and zone pre-event effect and zone notification effect It is also possible to carry out based on the jackpot determination result of information, the special symbol determination result, or the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is executed at the start of the variable display of effect symbols, and the zone precursor effect and zone notification effect are executed at the time of winning or on hold shift, but the execution timing of these effects is Not limited to this, it can be set appropriately according to the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect. As other execution timings of these effects, for example, temporary stop or re-variation in pseudo ream, step-up notice of so-called step-up notice, development to predetermined cut-in notice, speech notice, appearance of character, or super reach At the time of execution of the development effect to be performed, and when the reach state is established, it is possible to appropriately set to a predetermined operation effect or the like by the effect product device 17.

(Outline of zone pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern during pre-reading zone production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, an outline of a zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern that is executed when the pre-reading zone effect is already being performed in the effect mode A will be described.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A056 which is the above-mentioned first zone simulated fluctuation production pattern (first specific performance mode).

At the timing of T0, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the pre-reading zone effect period in which the pseudo 1 variation and the first zone effect are executed by the image display device 14 which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol It becomes a production period).
When the timing of T1 comes, while the temporary stop time of the effect design which has been temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 1 change elapses and the pseudo 1 change ends, the second change display of the effect pattern by the re-change of the effect design. The pseudo 2 fluctuation which is is started.

At the timing of T2, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern which has been temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 2 change has passed and the pseudo 2 change ends, the third change display of the effect pattern by the re-change of the effect pattern The pseudo-3 fluctuation which is is started.
At the timing of T3, the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stop of the first rendering symbol.

At the timing of T4, while the pre-reading zone effect period continued from the start of fluctuation ends, it becomes a transition effect period where transition effect which suggests development to specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed.
When the timing of T5 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the first SP reach effect is started, which becomes the first specific effect period.

At the timing of T6, the first SP reach effect and the first specific effect period end, while the first SPSP reach effect is started, which results in a second specific effect period.
At the timing of T7, the temporary SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end in a combination in which the effect symbol notifies the result of the variable display, and the first SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end, and it becomes a fixed period in which the combination of the effect symbol temporarily stopped is decided.
At the timing of T8, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect pattern A056 which is the first zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern (the first specific effect mode) is a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP) by the transition effect being executed after the first zone effect is executed. It has become a fluctuation production pattern that develops into reach production.

  FIG. 106 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A 057 which is the above-mentioned second zone pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern (second specific presentation mode).

At the timing of T0, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the pre-reading zone effect period in which the pseudo 1 variation and the first zone effect are executed by the image display device 14 which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol It becomes a production period).
At the timing of T1, while the temporary stop time of the production design which has been temporarily stopped from the end of the pseudo 1 fluctuation has passed and the pseudo 1 fluctuation ends, the second time of the production design by the production design re-fluctuating The pseudo 2 fluctuation which is the fluctuation display is started.

At the timing of T2, normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol.
At the timing of T3, the look-ahead zone effect period continued from the start of the change is over, and the read-out effect that suggests the development to the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) and the development to the specific reach effect are denied and read ahead It is a transition effect period in which the return effect for returning to the zone effect period is executed.

At the timing of T4, while the temporary stop time of the temporary stop of the effect design which has been temporarily stopped by execution of the return effect elapses and the pseudo 2 change and the transition effect period end, the third time of the effect pattern by the change of the effect pattern The pseudo 3 change which is the change display of is started and returns to the pre-reading zone effect period where the first zone effect is executed.
At the timing of T5, normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol.

When the timing of T6 comes, while the pre-reading zone effect period continued from the timing of T4 ends, it becomes a transition effect period in which the transition effect which suggests the development to the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed.
When the timing of T7 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the second SP reach effect is started, which becomes the first specific effect period.

When the timing of T8 comes, the second SP reach effect and the first specific effect period end, while the second SPSP reach effect is started, which results in a second specific effect period.
At the timing of T9, the second SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end temporarily in the combination in which the effect symbol notifies the result of the variable display, and the second SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end, and it becomes a fixed period in which the combination of the effect symbol temporarily stopped is decided.
At the timing of T10, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the transition effect is performed after the first zone effect is performed, but the return effect is performed in the change effect pattern A057 that is the second zone simulated change effect pattern (second specific effect mode). The transition effect is executed after returning to the first zone effect, and it is a fluctuation effect pattern that develops into a specific reach effect.

  FIG. 106 (c) is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A061 which is the above-mentioned fifth zone pseudo fluctuation production pattern (fifth specific production mode).

At the timing of T0, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, it becomes a pre-reading zone effect period in which the pseudo 1 variation and the first zone effect are executed by the image display device 14 which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol. .
When the timing of T1 comes, while the temporary stop time of the effect design that has been temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 1 change has passed and the pseudo 1 change ends, the second change display of the effect pattern by the re-change of the effect pattern The pseudo 2 fluctuation which is is started.

At the timing of T2, normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol.
At the timing of T3, the prefetch zone effect period continued from the start of fluctuation ends, and transition effect which suggests development to specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) and return effect to return to prefetch zone effect period are executed It will be the transition production period to be performed.

  At the timing of T4, while the temporary stop time of the temporary stop of the effect design which has been temporarily stopped by execution of the return effect elapses and the pseudo 2 change and the transition effect period end, the third time of the effect pattern by the change of the effect pattern The pseudo 3 change which is the change display of is started and returns to the pre-reading zone effect period where the first zone effect is executed.

  At the timing of T5, normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol.

  When the timing of T6 comes, while the pre-reading zone effect period continued from the timing of T4 ends, it becomes a transition effect period in which the transition effect which suggests the development to the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed.

At the timing of T7, while the temporary stop time of the production design that has been temporarily stopped due to the execution of the return production passes and the pseudo 2 change and the transition production period end, the production design is changed again by the third change of the production design While the pseudo 3 change which is the fluctuation display of is started the promotion production which reports the promotion of zone production is executed, the pre-reading zone where the second zone production where the expectation of the big hit is higher than the 1st zone production is executed is executed Return to the production period.
At the timing of T8, normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol.

At the timing of T9, while the pre-reading zone effect period continued from the timing of T7 ends, it becomes a transition effect period where transition effect which suggests development to specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed.
When the timing of T10 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the second SP reach effect is started, which becomes the first specific effect period.

At the timing of T11, the second SP reach effect and the first specific effect period end, while the second SPSP reach effect is started, which becomes the second specific effect period.
At the timing of T12, the second SPSP reach and the second specified effect period end temporarily in a combination in which the effect design notifies the result of the variable display, and the second SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end, which is a fixed period in which the combination of the temporarily stopped effect design is determined.
At the timing of T13, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the transition effect is performed after the first zone effect is performed, but the transition effect is performed after the change effect is executed for the fluctuation effect pattern A061 that is the fifth zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern (fifth specific effect mode). After the transition effect is executed after returning to the first zone effect, the transition effect is further executed after the return effect is executed, and then the transition effect is executed to develop the specific reach effect. It is a pattern.

(Display example of zone pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern during pre-reading zone effect)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109, display examples of variation effects by the zone pseudo variation effect pattern executed during the pre-reading zone effect will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a display example of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect pattern A056 which is the first zone simulated fluctuation effect pattern (first specific effect mode). FIGS. 107 (a-1) to 107 (a-8) are display examples at the timings shown in FIGS. 106 (a-1) to 106 (a-8), respectively.

  First, as shown in FIG. 107 (a-1), the image display device 14 displays a prefetch zone background image HK that enables recognition of the execution of the first zone effect, and the third special aspect 31 The pseudo 1 change is performed among the change display of the effect design corresponding to the changing icon A 45 of (pre-reading zone effect notification mode). At this time, the BGM and the illumination mode are also zone BGM and zone illumination dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (a-2), after the changing icon A45 becomes the third special mode 33, the first mode symbol "9" and the first mode symbol as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ2 “9” is temporarily stopped, the first mode symbol “7” is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ3, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped at the pseudo run.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (a-3), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 107 (a-2) is re-varied, and the pseudo 2 of the variation display of the effect pattern corresponding to the in-fluctuating icon A45 A change is made. At this time, the display of the pre-reading zone background image HK, the zone BGM, and the zone illumination continue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (a-4), the first mode symbol "9" and the first mode symbol "9" temporarily stop as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ2, and the first aspect as the effect symbol TZ3. The symbol "7" is temporarily stopped, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped in a pseudo run.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (a-5), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 107 (a-4) is changed again, and the pseudo 3 of the change display of the effect pattern corresponding to the changing icon A45 A change is made. At this time, the display of the pre-reading zone background image HK, the zone BGM, and the zone illumination continue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (a-6), the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, and normal reach effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 and the effect pattern TZ3 perform an action effect when stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (a-7), the display of the pre-read zone background image HK is ended, and the transition presentation (development presentation) is executed, which suggests the development to the specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are moved to the upper right side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size and changed to the second mode symbol. In addition, zone BGM and zone lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (a-8), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the transition effect is started, an effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed, and The 1SP reach effect is started, and then the first SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As described above, in the first zone simulated change effect pattern (first specified effect mode), the zone effect is executed over a plurality of times of simulated change, so the player's expectation for the jackpot by the synergetic effect with the simulated connected effect The feeling can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a display example of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect pattern A057 that is the second zone simulated fluctuation effect pattern (second specific effect mode). FIGS. 108 (b-1) to 108 (b-8) are display examples at the timings of FIGS. 106 (b-1) to 106 (b-8), respectively.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108 (b-1), the image display device 14 displays a prefetch zone background image HK which makes it possible to recognize that the first zone effect is being performed, and the third special aspect 31 Pseudo-2 change is performed among the change display of the effect design corresponding to the changing icon A45 of (pre-reading zone effect notification mode). At this time, the BGM and the illumination mode are also zone BGM and zone illumination dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b-2), after the changing icon A45 becomes the third special mode 33, the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3. , Normal reach production is started. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 and the effect pattern TZ3 perform an action effect when stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b-3), the display of the pre-read zone background image HK is ended, and the transition presentation (development presentation) is performed, which suggests the development to the specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are moved to the upper right side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size and changed to the second mode symbol, and the changing icon A45 becomes the third special mode 34. In addition, zone BGM and zone lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b-4), a return effect is performed in which the progress to the specific reach effect is denied and the return to the pre-read zone effect is notified, and a second mode symbol "9" is produced as a effect pattern TZ2. As the temporary stop is performed, the effect pattern TZ3 temporarily stopped is slipped, and the second mode symbol “7” is temporarily stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b-5), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 108 (b-4) moves to the center of the screen and is enlarged and displayed in the normal size and re-varied, and the fluctuating icon The pseudo 3 change of the change display of the effect design corresponding to A45 is performed. At this time, display of the prefetch zone background image HK, zone BGM, and zone illumination are resumed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b-6), the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, and normal reach effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 and the effect pattern TZ3 perform an action effect when stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b-7), the display of the pre-read zone background image HK is ended, and the transition presentation (development presentation) is executed, which suggests the development to the specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are moved to the upper right side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size and changed to the second mode symbol. In addition, zone BGM and zone lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b-8), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the transition effect is started, an effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed, and The 2SP reach effect is started, and then the second SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As described above, in the second zone simulated change effect pattern (the second specific effect mode), the zone effect ended by the transition effect is restored after the return effect is executed, so the game is performed according to the novel change effect effect mode which has not been achieved conventionally. It is possible to give the player a surprise and to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a display example of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect pattern A061 which is the fifth zone simulated fluctuation effect pattern (fifth specific effect mode). FIGS. 109 (c-1) to 109 (c-8) are display examples at the timings shown in FIGS. 106 (c-1) to 106 (c-8), respectively.

  First, as shown in FIG. 109 (c-1), the image display device 14 displays a prefetch zone background image HK that enables recognition of the execution of the first zone effect, and the effect pattern TZ1 and effect The normal reach effect in which the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the symbol TZ3 is being executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (c-2), the display of the pre-reading zone background image HK is ended, and the transition presentation (development presentation) is executed, which suggests the development to the specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are moved to the upper right side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size and changed to the second mode symbol, and the changing icon A45 becomes the third special mode 34. In addition, zone BGM and zone lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (c-3), a return effect is given, in which the progress to the specific reach effect is denied and the return to the pre-read zone effect is notified, and a second mode symbol "9" is produced as the effect symbol TZ2. As the temporary stop is performed, the effect pattern TZ3 temporarily stopped is slipped, and the second mode symbol “7” is temporarily stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (c-4), the effect symbol temporarily stopped in FIG. 109 (b-3) moves to the center of the screen and is enlarged and displayed in the normal size and re-varied, and the fluctuating icon The pseudo 3 change of the change display of the effect design corresponding to A45 is performed. At this time, display of the prefetch zone background image HK, zone BGM, and zone illumination are resumed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (c-5), the display of the pre-reading zone background image HK is ended, and the transition presentation (development presentation) is executed that suggests the development to the specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are moved to the upper right side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size and changed to the second mode symbol. In addition, zone BGM and zone lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (c-6), a return effect is performed in which the progress to the specific reach effect is denied and the return to the pre-read zone effect is notified, and a second mode symbol “9 as effect symbol TZ2 is performed. As the temporary stop is performed, the effect pattern TZ3 temporarily stopped is slipped, and the second mode symbol “7” is temporarily stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (c-7), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 109 (c-6) moves to the center of the screen and is enlarged and displayed in the normal size and re-varied, and the fluctuating icon The pseudo 4 fluctuation of the fluctuation display of the production design which corresponds to A45 is done. In addition, the movable effect 17A of the effect product device 17 moves to the center of the screen to perform a light emission effect of a predetermined mode, whereby a promotion effect of notifying promotion of a zone effect is performed. At this time, the display of the prefetched zone background image HK2, which makes it possible to recognize that the second zone effect is being performed, zone BGM, and zone illumination are resumed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (c-8), the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, respectively, and normal reach effect is started, and thereafter, the second SP reach effect and the second 2 SPSP reach production will be executed.
. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 and the effect pattern TZ3 perform an action effect when stopped.

  As described above, in the fifth zone pseudo change effect pattern (fifth specific effect mode), the zone effect ended by the transition effect is promoted after the return effect is promoted and returned. According to the aspect, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, and by promoting the zone effect, it is possible to effectively boost the player's expectation for the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, for the zone fluctuation effect patterns (six types of fluctuation effect patterns A050 to A055) that do not accompany the pseudo-series effect executed when the pre-reading zone effect is already in effect mode A, the fluctuation effect pattern A054 is an example I will give a brief explanation of it.

  In the fluctuation effect pattern A054, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, it becomes a pre-reading zone effect period (prediction effect period) in which the first zone effect is executed by the image display device 14, and temporary stop of the first effect symbol Following this, the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the second effect pattern with the same effect pattern as the first effect pattern.

  A transition effect period is executed in which transition effect is suggested after a predetermined period after normal reach effect is started, which indicates development to specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect). The prefetch zone effect period ends, and thereafter the first SP The reach effect is started, and the transition effect period ends as the first specific effect period.

  The first SP reach and the second specified effect period are ended temporarily in the combination in which the effect design reports the result of the variable display after a predetermined period after the first SP reach effect is started, and the combination of the temporarily stopped effect design is determined It becomes a fixed period to make the change production end.

  As described above, the change effect pattern A 054, which is a zone change effect pattern, is a effect pattern in which the transition effect is performed after the first zone effect is performed, and the specific reach effect is developed.

  In addition, in the zone simulated fluctuation effect pattern, when the produced pattern is temporarily stopped a plurality of times in the pseudo run, the same simulated run pattern is displayed temporarily in each time so that the zone effect is uniformed. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the zone pseudo change production of this embodiment, when the production design is temporarily stopped a plurality of times in the pseudo run, the same pseudo run production design is displayed for a temporary stop each time, but FIG. 121 As shown in FIG. 5, different pseudo serial game effect symbols may be displayed temporarily for a temporary stop each time.

  Fig. 121 (c-1) to Fig. 121 (c-8) correspond to Fig. 106 (c-1) to Fig. 106 (c-8), and the effect contents are shown in Fig. 109 (c-1) to Fig. 109 Since it is substantially the same as (c-8), the detailed description is omitted.

As described above, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pseudo-sequence effect by temporarily displaying a different pseudo-sequence effect pattern that is different each time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Outline of zone pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern during non-prefetch zone production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the outline of the zone pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern executed during the non-prefetch zone zone production in the production mode A will be described.

  Fig. 110 (a) is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A036 which is the above-mentioned first zone simulated fluctuation production pattern (the first specific performance mode).

When the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T0, the image display device 14 starts the pseudo 1 variation which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol.
At the timing of T1, it becomes a zone turning effect period in which a zone turning success effect is executed.

At the timing of T2, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (here special symbol) temporarily stopped by the zone turning success effect passes and the pseudo 1 change ends, the effect pattern changes again due to the re-change of the effect pattern The pseudo 2 fluctuation which is the 2nd fluctuation display is started, and it becomes pre-reading zone production period (prediction production period).
At the timing of T3, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern which has been temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 2 change has passed and the pseudo 2 change ends, the 3rd change display of the effect pattern by the re-change of the effect pattern The pseudo-3 fluctuation which is is started.

At the timing of T4, the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stop of the first rendering symbol.
At the timing of T5, while the pre-reading zone effect period continued from the start of fluctuation ends, it becomes a transition effect period where transition effect which suggests development to specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed.

When the timing of T6 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the first SP reach effect is started, which becomes the first specific effect period.
At the timing of T7, the first SP reach effect and the first specific effect period end, and the first SPSP reach effect is started, thereby becoming a second specific effect period.

At the timing of T8, the temporary SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end in a combination in which the effect symbol notifies the result of the variable display, and the first SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end, and it becomes a fixed period in which the combination of the effect symbol temporarily stopped is decided.
When the timing of T9 comes, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect pattern A036, which is the first zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern (the first specific effect aspect), is a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP) by the transition effect being executed after the first zone effect is executed. It has become a fluctuation production pattern that develops into reach production.

  FIG. 110 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A 037 which is the above-mentioned second zone simulated fluctuation production pattern (second specific performance mode).

When the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T0, the image display device 14 starts the pseudo 1 variation which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol.
At the timing of T1, it becomes a zone turning effect period in which a zone turning success effect is executed.

At the timing of T2, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (here special symbol) temporarily stopped by the zone turning success effect passes and the pseudo 1 change ends, the effect pattern changes again due to the re-change of the effect pattern The pseudo 2 fluctuation which is the 2nd fluctuation display is started, and it becomes pre-reading zone production period (prediction production period).
At the timing of T3, the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stop of the first rendering symbol.

At the timing of T4, while the pre-reading zone effect period continued from the fluctuation start is ended, the return to return to the pre-reading zone effect period following the transition effect which suggests the development to the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) It is a transition effect period in which the effect is executed.
At the timing of T5, while the temporary stop time of the temporary stopped production design has passed by the execution of the return production and the pseudo 2 change and the transition production period end, the production design is changed again by the third change of the production design The pseudo 3 change which is the change display of is started and returns to the pre-reading zone effect period where the first zone effect is executed.

At the timing of T6, normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol.
When the timing of T7 comes, while the pre-reading zone effect period continued from the timing of T5 ends, it becomes a transition effect period in which the transition effect which suggests the development to the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed.

When the timing of T8 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the second SP reach effect is started, which becomes the first specific effect period.
At the timing of T9, the second SP reach effect and the first specific effect period end, and the second SPSP reach effect is started, which results in a second specific effect period.

At the timing of T10, the second SPSP reach and the second specified effect period are temporarily stopped in a combination in which the effect symbol notifies the result of the variable display, and the second SPSP reach and the second specified effect period end, which is a fixed period in which the combination of the temporarily stopped effect symbols is determined.
At the timing of T10, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the transition effect is executed after the first zone effect is executed, but the transition effect is executed after the change effect is executed for the fluctuation effect pattern A 037 which is the second zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern (the second specific effect mode). After returning to the first zone effect, the transition effect is executed, and this is a variation effect pattern developed to a specific reach effect.

  FIG. 110C is a diagram illustrating a time chart of the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A041 that is the above-described fifth zone pseudo fluctuation production pattern (fifth specific production mode).

When the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T0, the image display device 14 starts the pseudo 1 variation which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol.
At the timing of T1, it becomes a zone turning effect period in which a zone turning success effect is executed.

At the timing of T2, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (here special symbol) temporarily stopped by the zone turning success effect passes and the pseudo 1 change ends, the effect pattern changes again due to the re-change of the effect pattern The pseudo 2 fluctuation which is the 2nd fluctuation display is started, and it becomes pre-reading zone production period (prediction production period).
At the timing of T3, the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stop of the first rendering symbol.

At the timing of T4, the pre-read zone effect period continued from the start of the change ends, and the transition effect which suggests the development to the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) and the return effect for returning to the pre-read zone effect period are executed It will be the transition production period to be performed.
At the timing of T5, while the temporary stop time of the temporary stopped production design has passed by the execution of the return production and the pseudo 2 change and the transition production period end, the production design is changed again by the third change of the production design The pseudo 3 change which is the change display of is started and returns to the pre-reading zone effect period where the first zone effect is executed.

At the timing of T6, normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol.
At the timing of T7, the pre-reading zone effect period continued from the timing of T5 ends, and the transition effect that suggests the development to the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) and the return effect for returning to the pre-reading zone effect period are It is a transition effect period to be executed.

  At the timing of T8, while the temporary stop time of the production design that has been temporarily stopped due to the execution of the return production passes and the pseudo 2 change and transition production period end, the production design is changed again by the third change of the production design While the pseudo 4 fluctuation which is the fluctuation display of is started the promotion production which reports the promotion of zone production is executed, the pre-reading zone where the second zone production where the expectation of the big hit is higher than the 1st zone production is executed is executed Return to the production period.

At the timing of T9, following to the temporary stop of the first rendering symbol, the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol.
At the timing of T10, while the pre-read zone effect period continued from the timing of T5 ends, it becomes a transition effect period in which the transition effect which suggests the development to the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed.

At the timing of T11, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, and the second SP reach effect is started, which is the first specific effect period.
At the timing of T12, the second SP reach effect and the first specific effect period end, and the second SPSP reach effect is started, which results in a second specific effect period.

At the timing of T13, the second SPSP reach and the second specified effect period are temporarily stopped in a combination in which the effect symbol notifies the result of the variable display, and the second SPSP reach and the second specified effect period end, which becomes a fixed period in which the combination of the temporarily stopped effect symbols is fixed.
At the timing of T14, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the transition effect is executed after the first zone effect is executed, but the transition effect is executed after the change effect pattern A041, which is the fifth zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern (fifth specific effect mode). After returning to the second zone effect, transition effect is executed, and it is a variation effect pattern that develops into specific reach effect.

(Display example of zone pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern during non-prefetch zone production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, a display example of the change effect by the zone pseudo change effect pattern executed during the non-pre-reading zone effect will be described.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a display example of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect pattern A036 which is the first zone simulated fluctuation effect pattern (first specific effect mode). FIGS. 111 (a-1) to 111 (a-8) are display examples at the timings of FIGS. 110 (a-1) to 110 (a-8), respectively.

  First, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-1), in the image display device 14, the pseudo display among the variation display of the effect design corresponding to the changing icon A 45 of the third special aspect 21 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion aspect 2) 1 Fluctuation is made.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-2), the zone turning success effect is executed, and a special symbol consisting of a “prefetched” symbol, a “zone” symbol, and a “rush” symbol as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. The temporary stop is notified, and it is informed that the pre-reading zone effect is executed, and the changing icon A 45 is changed to the third special mode 31 (pre-reading zone effect informing mode).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-3), the pseudo 2 change of the change display of the effect design corresponding to the changing icon A 45 is performed, and it is recognized that the first zone effect is being executed. A look-ahead zone background image HK to be enabled is displayed. At this time, the BGM and the illumination mode also become zone BGM and zone illumination dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-4), the first mode symbol "9" and the first mode symbol "9" temporarily stop as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ2, and the first aspect as the effect symbol TZ3. The symbol "7" is temporarily stopped, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped in a pseudo run.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-5), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 111 (a-4) is changed again, and the pseudo 3 of the change display of the effect pattern corresponding to the changing icon A45 A change is made. At this time, the display of the pre-reading zone background image HK, the zone BGM, and the zone illumination continue.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-6), the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, and normal reach effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 and the effect pattern TZ3 perform an action effect when stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-7), the display of the pre-read zone background image HK is ended, and the transition presentation (development presentation) is executed, which suggests the development to the specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are moved to the upper right side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size and changed to the second mode symbol. In addition, zone BGM and zone lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (a-8), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the transition effect is started, an effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed, and The 1SP reach effect is started, and then the first SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As described above, in the first zone simulated change effect pattern (first specified effect mode), the zone effect is executed over a plurality of times of simulated change, so the player's expectation for the jackpot by the synergetic effect with the simulated connected effect The feeling can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, about the fluctuation production by fluctuation production pattern A037 which is the 2nd zone false fluctuation production pattern (the 2nd specified production mode), the display example in the timing of Figure 110 (b-1)-Figure 110 (b-8), These correspond to FIGS. 108 (b-1) to 108 (b-8), respectively, and exhibit the same effects as the fluctuation effect pattern A057.

  Moreover, about the fluctuation production by fluctuation production pattern A041 which is the fifth zone false fluctuation production pattern (fifth specific production mode), the display example at the timing of FIG. 110 (c-1) to FIG. 110 (c-8) is They correspond to FIGS. 109 (c-1) to 109 (c-8), respectively, and exhibit the same effects as the fluctuation effect pattern A061.

  In the explanation of the zone simulated fluctuation presentation pattern described above, the normal reach presentation was not considered as the transition presentation, but the normal reach presentation is a presentation that is executed in the process of developing into the specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). It may be a transition effect that suggests the development of reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect). In this case, in addition to the period in which the transition effect is being performed, the period in which the normal reach effect is being performed is also the transition effect period.

(Outline of the story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern)
Next, the outline of the story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern executed in the presentation mode A will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation presentation by the fluctuation presentation pattern A008 which is a normal story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern.

When the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T0, the image display device 14 starts the pseudo 1 variation which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol.
When the timing of T1 comes, while the temporary stop time of the effect design (the pseudo run) which has temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 1 fluctuation passes and the pseudo 1 fluctuation ends, the effect of the design symbol re-varies, the first of the effect design While the pseudo 2 fluctuation which is the 2nd fluctuation display is started, the introduction effect which announces the start of the story effect is executed, it becomes the special effect period (indication effect period) where the first step effect of the story effect is executed .

At the timing of T2, following the temporary stop of the first production design, the second production design is temporarily stopped with the same design as the first production design, and reach reach production that asks whether it will be reach or not (In this case reach reach success production to reach a temporary stop) is started.
At the timing of T3, the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol, and the transition rendering period starts Become.

At the timing of T4, transition presentation is started which suggests development to specific reach presentation (ST presentation 1 dedicated reach presentation).
When the timing of T5 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the ST effect 1 dedicated reach effect is started, which becomes the first specific effect period.

At the timing of T6, the temporary stop is performed by the combination of notifying the result of the fluctuation display with the effect design, and the ST effect 1 dedicated reach effect and the first specific effect period are ended, and the fixed period for fixing the combination of the temporarily stopped effect pattern It becomes.
At the timing of T7, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect pattern A008, which is a normal story pseudo fluctuation effect pattern, is developed into a specific reach effect (here, ST effect 1 dedicated reach effect) by the transition effect being executed after the story effect is executed. It has become a fluctuation presentation pattern.

  FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation presentation by the fluctuation presentation pattern A 010 which is the above-mentioned first story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern (first specific presentation mode).

When the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T0, the image display device 14 starts the pseudo 1 variation which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol.
When the timing of T1 comes, while the temporary stop time of the effect design (the pseudo run) which has temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 1 fluctuation passes and the pseudo 1 fluctuation ends, the effect of the design symbol re-varies, the first of the effect design While the pseudo 2 fluctuation which is the 2nd fluctuation display is started, the introduction effect which announces the start of the story effect is executed, it becomes the special effect period (indication effect period) where the first step effect of the story effect is executed .

At the timing of T2, following the temporary stop of the first production design, the second production design is temporarily stopped with the same design as the first production design, and reach reach production that asks whether it will be reach or not (Here, it is not a reach, but a reach-rolling failure effect to temporarily stop in a pseudo sequence) is started.
At the timing of T3, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (the pseudo sequence) which has been temporarily stopped at the end of the reach-rolling effect passes and the pseudo 2 change ends, the effect pattern changes again and the second of the effect pattern The pseudo 3 change which is the 3rd change display is started and the progress effect for notifying the progress of the story is executed, and the special effect period in which the second step effect of the story effect is performed is performed.

At the timing of T4, the normal reach effect is started by temporarily stopping the second rendering symbol with the same symbol as the first rendering symbol following the temporary stopping of the first rendering symbol, and the transition rendering period starts Become.
At the timing of T5, transition presentation is started which suggests development to specific reach presentation (ST presentation 2 dedicated reach presentation).

  When the timing of T6 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the ST effect 2 dedicated reach effect is started, which becomes a second specific effect period.

At the timing of T7, a temporary stop is made with the combination that the effect design reports the result of the fluctuation display, and the ST effect 2 dedicated reach effect and the second specific effect period are over, and the fixed period to fix the temporary stop effect pattern combination It becomes.
At the timing of T8, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the fluctuation presentation pattern A010, which is the first story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern (the first specific aspect), is implemented by the transition presentation after the story presentation is executed, and the specific reach presentation (ST presentation 2 dedicated reach presentation) It has become a fluctuation presentation pattern that develops into

  FIG. 112C is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A013, which is the above-mentioned second story simulated fluctuation production pattern (second specific performance mode).

When the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T0, the image display device 14 starts the pseudo 1 variation which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol.
When the timing of T1 comes, while the temporary stop time of the effect design (the pseudo run) which has temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 1 fluctuation passes and the pseudo 1 fluctuation ends, the effect of the design symbol re-varies, the first of the effect design While the pseudo 2 fluctuation which is the 2nd fluctuation display is started, the introduction effect which announces the start of the story effect is executed, it becomes the special effect period (indication effect period) where the first step effect of the story effect is executed .

  At the timing of T2, following the temporary stop of the first production design, the second production design is temporarily stopped with the same design as the first production design, and reach reach production that asks whether it will be reach or not (Here, it is not a reach, but a reach-rolling failure effect to temporarily stop in a pseudo sequence) is started.

  At the timing of T3, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (the pseudo sequence) which has been temporarily stopped at the end of the reach-rolling effect passes and the pseudo 2 change ends, the effect pattern changes again and the second of the effect pattern The pseudo 3 change which is the 3rd change display is started and the progress effect for notifying the progress of the story is executed, and the special effect period in which the second step effect of the story effect is performed is performed.

At T4 timing, following the temporary stop of the first production design, the second production design is temporarily stopped with the same design as the first production design, and reach reach production (whether or not to reach) Here, a temporary stop is made at the point where reach is reached).
At the timing of T5, following the temporary stop of the first production symbol, the normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second production symbol with the same symbol as the first production symbol, and the transition production period and Become.

At the timing of T6, while the temporary stop time started by temporary stop at the final stage of the normal reach effect and temporary stop time has passed and the pseudo 3 change ends, the effect pattern changes again due to the second change of the effect pattern The pseudo 4 change which is the 4th change display is started, and the progress effect for notifying the progress of the story is executed, and it becomes a special effect period in which the third step effect of the story effect is executed.
At the timing of T7, following the temporary stop of the first production pattern, the second reach production pattern is temporarily stopped by the same design as the first production pattern, and a transition reach period is started in which normal reach production is started Become.

At the timing of T8, transition presentation is started which suggests development to specific reach presentation (ST presentation 3 dedicated reach presentation).
At the timing of T9, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the ST effect 3 dedicated reach effect is started, which becomes the second specific effect period.

At the timing of T10, a temporary stop is made in the combination of notifying the result of the fluctuation display with the effect design, and the ST effect 3 dedicated reach effect and the second specific effect period are over, and the fixed period for fixing the combination of the temporary stop effect symbols It becomes.
At the timing of T11, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the transition effect is executed after the story effect is executed, but the transition effect is executed for the change effect pattern A013, which is the second story simulated change effect pattern (the second specific aspect), but the story effect is achieved by executing the return effect. After returning to the transition effect is executed, and it is a fluctuation effect pattern that develops into a specific reach effect (ST effect 3 dedicated reach effect).

(Display example of story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116, a display example of the fluctuation effect by the story pseudo fluctuation effect pattern will be described.

  FIG. 113 and FIG. 114 are diagrams showing display examples of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect pattern A010 that is the first story pseudo fluctuation effect pattern (first specific effect aspect). FIGS. 113 (a-1) to 113 (a-8) and FIGS. 114 (a-9) to 114 (a-14) respectively correspond to FIGS. 112 (a-1) to 112 (a-14). It is an example of a display in timing.

  First, as shown in FIG. 113 (a-1), in the image display device 14, the pseudo 1 fluctuation is performed in the fluctuation display of the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation-in-progress icon A50.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (a-2), the reach turning effect is executed, and the pseudo-sequence consisting of the first mode symbols "4" "4" "7" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Ru. At this time, an effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 informing that the pseudo run has stopped, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 perform special actions different from the normal stop action effects When the special action effect is performed, a special stop sound ("Pishen" in this embodiment) different from the normal effect pattern stop sound is output from the voice output device 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (a-3), it is suggested that the movable part 17A of the effect character product device 17 moves from the initial position to the first operation position, and the effect pattern is re-varied. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (a-4), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 113 (a-2) is re-varied, and the introduction effect of notifying (recommending) the execution of the story effect in a recognizable manner is executed. Be done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (a-5), a story background image SHK1 representing cloudiness of the weather, which is the first step, is displayed instead of the introductory effect executed for a predetermined time, One-step effect is executed. At this time, the BGM and the lighting mode are also story BGM and story lighting dedicated to story production. Specifically, in the illumination mode when the first step effect is being performed, the effect illumination device 16 performs an illumination effect in which each lamp emits blue light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (a-6), in a state where the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1, whether or not the first mode symbol "9" is stopped as the effect symbol TZ3. In addition to the execution of the reach-rolling effect (here, the reach-rolling failure effect), the operation promotion image is displayed. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 performs an action effect at the time of stop.

  Then, in response to the effect button 18A being operated, as shown in FIG. 113 (a-7), the first mode symbol "9" of the effect pattern TZ3 slides, and the first mode symbol "7" is tentative While stopping, the first mode symbol "3" temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ2. At this time, an effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 informing that the pseudo run has stopped, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 perform special actions different from the normal stop action effects When the special action effect is performed, a special stop sound ("Pishen" in this embodiment) different from the normal effect pattern stop sound is output from the voice output device 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (a-8), it is suggested that the movable part 17A of the effect character product device 17 moves from the initial position to the first operation position, and the effect pattern is re-varied. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (a-9), the effect design that has been temporarily stopped in FIG. 113 (a-7) is re-varied, and progressing rendering is carried out to inform (suggest) the execution of the story rendering in a recognizable manner. Be done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (a-10), a story background image SHK2 representing the sunny or cloudy state of the weather, which is the second step, is displayed instead of the progress effect performed for a predetermined time. The second step effect of is executed. In the illumination mode when the second step effect is being performed, the effect illumination device 16 performs an illumination effect in which each lamp emits green light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (a-11), whether or not the first mode symbol "9" is stopped as the effect symbol TZ3 while the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1. In addition to the execution of the reach-rolling effect (here, the reach-rolling failure effect), the operation promotion image is displayed. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 performs an action effect at the time of stop.

  Then, in response to the effect button 18A being operated, as shown in FIG. 114 (a-12), the first mode symbol "9" is temporarily stopped as the effect pattern TZ1 and the effect pattern TZ3, respectively, and the story effect is The second step effect is finished and normal reach effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern TZ3 performs an action effect at the time of stop. In addition, story BGM and story lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (a-13), transition effect (development effect) is suggested that indicates development to a specific reach effect (ST effect 2 dedicated reach effect), and the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 are at the top of the screen. It moves to the right and is displayed in a reduced size and changes to the second mode symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (a-14), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the transition effect is started, the title image TE of the ST effect 2 dedicated reach effect is displayed, and the ST effect 2 is displayed. Dedicated reach production is started.

  As described above, in the first story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern (the first specific presentation mode), each step presentation of the story presentation is sequentially performed over a plurality of simulated fluctuations, so the jackpot by the synergetic effect with the pseudo connected presentation Thus, the player's expectation for the player can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a display example of fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A014 that is the second story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern (second specific presentation mode). FIGS. 115 (b-1) to 115 (b-6) and FIGS. 116 (b-7) to 116 (b-9) respectively correspond to FIGS. 112 (b-1) to 112 (b-9). It is an example of a display in timing.

  First, as shown in FIG. 115 (b-1), the first pattern symbol "3" is temporarily stopped as the effect pattern TZ1 and the effect pattern TZ3 by execution of the reach-roll success effect, and the second step effect of the story effect is It ends and normal reach production is started. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 perform the action effect at the time of stop, and the second step effect ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (b-2), the rendering symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are slipped, and the pseudo run consisting of the first mode symbols "5" "5" "7" is temporarily stopped as the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Ru. At this time, an effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 informing that the pseudo run has stopped, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 perform special actions different from the normal stop action effects When the special action effect is performed, a special stop sound ("Pishen" in this embodiment) different from the normal effect pattern stop sound is output from the voice output device 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (b-3), the movable part 17A of the effect character product device 17 moves from the initial position to the second operation position to perform light emission effect in a predetermined mode, and the effect pattern changes It is suggested to be done.
In addition, at the time of temporary stop of the pseudo run before shifting to the 3rd step production, unlike the time of temporary stop of the pseudo run before moving to the 1st step production and the 2nd step production, the presentation service apparatus 17 The movable portion 17A moves from the initial position to the second operation position instead of the first operation position, and performs a light emission effect in a predetermined mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (b-4), the effect design that has been temporarily stopped in FIG. 115 (b-2) is re-varied, and progress rendering is performed to inform (suggest) the execution of the story rendering in a recognizable manner. Be done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (b-5), a story background image SHK3 representing fine weather, which is the third step, is displayed instead of the progress effect performed for a predetermined time, and the story effect image is displayed. Three-step effect is executed. In the illumination mode when the third step effect is performed, the effect illumination device 16 performs an illumination effect in which each lamp emits red light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (b-6), the first mode symbol "3" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 performs an action effect at the time of stop.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (b-7), when the first mode symbol "3" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ3, the third step effect of the story effect is ended and normal reach effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern TZ3 performs an action effect at the time of stop. In addition, story BGM and story lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (b-8), transition effect (development effect) is suggested that indicates development to a specific reach effect (ST effect 3 dedicated reach effect), and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are at the top of the screen. It moves to the right and is displayed in a reduced size and changes to the second mode symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (b-9), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the transition effect is started, the title image TE of the ST effect 3 dedicated reach effect is displayed, and the ST effect 3 is displayed. Dedicated reach production is started.

  As described above, in the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern (the second specific effect mode), the story effect terminated by the normal reach effect is restored after the execution of the return effect, so a game is performed according to an effect mode which has not been conventionally novel It is possible to give the player a surprise and to improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, in the pseudo story fluctuation generation pattern, when the rendering pattern is temporarily stopped a plurality of times in the pseudo run, a pseudo running effect design that is different each time is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing this, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pseudo-sequence effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the story pseudo variation effect pattern, when the pseudo serial production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect image is displayed around the production patterns TZ1 to TZ3, and the production patterns TZ1 to TZ3 are normal stop action production and Performs a special action effect at the time of performing a different special action so that a special stop sound ("Pishen" in this embodiment) different from the normal effect pattern stop sound is output from the audio output device 15. It has become. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the story effect effectively, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, when the pseudo serial production design pattern before transitioning to the first step production and the second step production is temporarily stopped, the movable part 17A of the presentation character apparatus 17 is at the initial position The movement for moving from the first movement position to the first movement position is performed, and when the pseudo serial rendering effect pattern before shifting to the third step (final step) rendering is temporarily stopped, the rendering bonus device A moving operation of moving the 17 movable portions 17A from the initial position to the second operation position is performed. By doing this, it is notified that the third step (final step) effect has been transferred, and the player's expectation for the jackpot can be effectively enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

  Further, in the simulated story fluctuation variation effect pattern, the promotion operation image is displayed, and in response to the operation of the effect button 18A, the effect pattern is stopped at the pseudo run. By doing this, it is possible to cause the player to actively participate as if the player stopped the simulated sequence by operating the effect button 18A, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

  In the explanation of the above-mentioned story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern, reach production (reach production failure production, reach production success production) was not considered as transition production, but specific reach production (ST production 1 to 3 dedicated reach production for reach production) Since this is a presentation performed in the process of developing into a presentation), it may be a transition presentation that suggests the development of a specific reach presentation (ST presentation 1 to 3 dedicated reach presentation). In such a case, in addition to the period in which the normal reach effect and the transition effect are being performed, the period in which the reach turning effect is being performed is also a transition effect period.

(Summary of countdown simulated fluctuation production pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, an outline of the countdown pseudo fluctuation effect pattern executed in the effect mode A will be described.

  FIG. 117 (a) is a diagram showing a time chart of fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A011, which is the first countdown pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern (first specific presentation mode).

When the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T0, the image display device 14 starts the pseudo 1 variation which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol.
At the timing of T1, an introduction effect that indicates that the countdown effect is to be performed is started.

  At the timing of T2, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (pseudo sequence) temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 1 fluctuation (introduction effect) passes and the pseudo 1 fluctuation ends, the production symbol re-fluctuates The pseudo 2 change which is the second change display of the effect design is started, and it becomes a special effect period (indication effect period) in which the first step effect of the countdown effect is executed.

At the timing of T3, following the temporary stop of the first production design, the second production design is temporarily stopped with the same design as the first production design, and reach reach production that asks whether it will be reach or not (Here, it is not a reach, but a reach-rolling failure effect to temporarily stop in a pseudo sequence) is started.
At the timing of T4, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (the pseudo sequence) which has been temporarily stopped at the end of reach turning effect passes and the pseudo 2 change ends, the effect pattern changes again and the second of the effect pattern This is a special effect period in which the pseudo 3 change which is the third change display is started and the second step effect of the countdown effect is executed.

At the timing of T5, following the temporary stop of the first production symbol, the normal reach production is started by temporarily stopping the second production symbol with the same symbol as the first production symbol, and the transition production period and Become.
At the timing of T6, transition presentation is started which suggests development to specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation).

When the timing of T7 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the second SP reach effect is started, which becomes the first specific effect period.
When the timing of T8 comes, the second SP reach effect and the first specific effect period end, while the second SPSP reach effect is started, which results in a second specific effect period.

At the timing of T9, the second SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end temporarily in the combination in which the effect symbol notifies the result of the variable display, and the second SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end, and it becomes a fixed period in which the combination of the effect symbol temporarily stopped is decided.
At the timing of T10, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect pattern A011, which is the first countdown simulated fluctuation effect pattern (the first specific aspect), is a transition effect that is executed after the countdown effect is executed, and a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) It has become a fluctuation presentation pattern that develops into

  FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the fluctuation production by the fluctuation production pattern A 014 that is the second countdown simulated fluctuation production pattern (second specific performance mode).

When the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T0, the image display device 14 starts the pseudo 1 variation which is the first variation display of the rendering symbol.
At the timing of T1, an introduction effect that indicates that the countdown effect is to be performed is started.

  At the timing of T2, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (pseudo sequence) temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo 1 fluctuation (introduction effect) passes and the pseudo 1 fluctuation ends, the production symbol re-fluctuates The pseudo 2 change which is the second change display of the effect design is started, and it becomes a special effect period (indication effect period) in which the first step effect of the countdown effect is executed.

  At the timing of T3, following the temporary stop of the first production design, the second production design is temporarily stopped with the same design as the first production design, and reach reach production that asks whether it will be reach or not (Here, it is not a reach, but a reach-rolling failure effect to temporarily stop in a pseudo sequence) is started.

  At the timing of T4, while the temporary stop time of the effect pattern (the pseudo sequence) which has been temporarily stopped at the end of reach turning effect passes and the pseudo 2 change ends, the effect pattern changes again and the second of the effect pattern This is a special effect period in which the pseudo 3 change which is the third change display is started and the second step effect of the countdown effect is executed.

At T5 timing, following the temporary stop of the first production design, the second production design is temporarily stopped with the same design as the first production design and reach reach production (whether or not to reach) Here, a temporary stop is made at the point where reach is reached).
At the timing of T6, following the temporary stop of the first production symbol, the second reach production symbol is temporarily stopped with the same symbol as the first production symbol, and the normal reach production is started and the transition production period Become.

At the timing of T7, while the temporary stop time started by temporary stop at the end of the normal reach effect and the pseudo stop time passes and the pseudo 3 change ends, the effect pattern changes again due to the second change of the effect pattern This is a special effect period in which the fourth pseudo-change, which is the fourth change display, is started and the third step effect of the countdown effect is executed.
At the timing of T8, following to the temporary stop of the first production pattern, the second reach production pattern is temporarily stopped by the same pattern as the first production pattern, and a transition reach period is started in which normal reach production is started Become.

  At the timing of T9, transition presentation is started that suggests development to specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation).

When the timing of T10 comes, the transition effect and the transition effect period end, while the second SP reach effect is started, which becomes the first specific effect period.
At the timing of T11, the second SP reach effect and the first specific effect period end, while the second SPSP reach effect is started, which becomes the second specific effect period.

At the timing of T12, the second SPSP reach and the second specified effect period end temporarily in a combination in which the effect design notifies the result of the variable display, and the second SPSP reach and the second specific effect period end, which is a fixed period in which the combination of the temporarily stopped effect design is determined.
At the timing of T13, the fixed period ends and the fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, the change effect pattern A013, which is the second countdown simulated change effect pattern (the second specific aspect), has the transition effect executed after the countdown effect is executed, but the countdown effect is performed by the return effect being executed. After the transition to the transition effect is executed, it is a variation effect pattern that develops into a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect).

(Display example of countdown simulated fluctuation effect pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 118 to FIG. 120, a display example of the fluctuation effect by the countdown simulated fluctuation effect pattern will be described.

  FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 are diagrams showing display examples of change effects based on the change effect pattern A011, which is the first countdown simulated change effect pattern (first specific effect mode). FIGS. 118 (a-1) to 118 (a-8) and FIGS. 119 (a-9) to 119 (a-13) respectively correspond to FIGS. 117 (a-1) to 117 (a-13). It is an example of a display in timing.

  First, as shown in FIG. 118 (a-1), in the image display device 14, a pseudo 1 change is performed in the change display of the effect design corresponding to the changing icon A 60 in the normal mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (a-2), blackout display is performed as an introduction effect that suggests that the countdown effect is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (a-3), the blackout display executed for a predetermined time is ended, and the first mode symbols "3" "3" "7" as effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. The pseudo run consisting of is temporarily stopped. At this time, an effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 informing that the pseudo run has stopped, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 perform special actions different from the normal stop action effects When the special action effect is performed, a special stop sound ("Pishen" in this embodiment) different from the normal effect pattern stop sound is output from the voice output device 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (a-4), it is suggested that the movable part 17A of the effect character product device 17 moves from the initial position to the first operation position, and the effect pattern is re-varied. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (a-5), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 118 (a-3) is changed again, and a predetermined character can specify the number of times the step effect has been performed. The image producing the voice "2", which is information, is displayed, and the first step effect of the countdown effect is executed. At this time, the BGM and the illumination mode are also the countdown BGM and the countdown illumination dedicated to the countdown effect. Specifically, in the illumination mode when the first step effect is being performed, the effect illumination device 16 performs an illumination effect in which each lamp emits blue light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (a-6), whether or not the first mode symbol "3" is stopped as the effect symbol TZ3 while the first mode symbol "3" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 In addition to the execution of the reach-rolling effect (here, the reach-rolling failure effect), the operation promotion image is displayed. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 performs an action effect at the time of stop.

  Then, in response to the effect button 18A being operated, as shown in FIG. 118 (a-7), the first mode symbol "3" of the effect pattern TZ3 slides, and the first mode symbol "7" is temporarily stopped. At the same time, the first mode symbol “3” temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ2. At this time, an effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 informing that the pseudo run has stopped, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 perform special actions different from the normal stop action effects When the special action effect is performed, a special stop sound ("Pishen" in this embodiment) different from the normal effect pattern stop sound is output from the voice output device 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (a-8), it is suggested that the movable part 17A of the presentation service object device 17 moves from the initial position to the first operation position, and the presentation symbol is re-varied. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (a-9), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 118 (a-7) is re-varied, and the predetermined character can specify the number of times the step effect has been performed. An image showing a voice of "1", which is information, is displayed, and the second step effect of the countdown effect is executed. At this time, the BGM and the illumination mode are also the countdown BGM and the countdown illumination dedicated to the countdown effect. Specifically, in the illumination mode when the second step effect is being performed, the effect illumination device 16 performs an illumination effect in which each lamp emits green light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (a-10), after the first mode symbol "3" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1, the first mode symbol "3" is temporarily stopped from the low speed fluctuation as the effect symbol TZ3. Whether or not to reach, whether or not reach reach production is performed, and the operation promotion image is displayed. At this time, the effect pattern TZ1 performs a stop action.

  Then, in response to the effect button 18A being operated, as shown in FIG. 119 (a-11), the first mode symbol "3" is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, and the countdown effect is The second step effect is finished and normal reach effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern TZ3 performs an action effect at the time of stop. In addition, story BGM and story lighting end.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (a-12), a transition effect (development effect) is suggested that indicates the development to a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect), and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are on the upper right side of the screen It moves to and is reduced and displayed and it changes to the second mode symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (a-13), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the transition effect is started, an effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed. The 2SP reach effect is started, and then the second SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As described above, in the first countdown simulated fluctuation effect pattern (the first specific effect mode), each step effect of the countdown effect is sequentially performed over a plurality of simulated fluctuations, so a big hit is achieved by the synergetic effect with the pseudo connected effect Thus, the player's expectation for the player can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a display example of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect pattern A014 that is the second countdown simulated fluctuation effect pattern (second specific effect mode). FIGS. 120 (b-1) to 120 (b-7) are display examples at the timings of FIGS. 117 (b-1) to 117 (b-7), respectively.

  First, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-1), the first pattern symbol "3" is temporarily stopped as the rendering symbol TZ1 and the rendering symbol TZ3 by execution of the reach crawling success representation, and the second step representation of the countdown representation is It ends and normal reach production is started. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 perform the action effect at the time of stop, and the second step effect ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-2), the first mode symbol "3" of the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 slides, and as the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3, from the first mode symbols "3" "3" "7" The pseudo run is temporarily stopped. At this time, an effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 informing that the pseudo run has stopped, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 perform special actions different from the normal stop action effect at the stop A special action effect is performed, and a special stop sound ("Pishen" in the present embodiment) different from a normal effect pattern stop sound is output from the audio output device 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-3), the movable part 17A of the effect character product device 17 moves from the initial position to the second operation position to perform light emission effect in a predetermined mode, and the effect pattern changes again It is suggested to be done.
In addition, at the time of temporary stop of the pseudo run before shifting to the 3rd step production, unlike the time of temporary stop of the pseudo run before moving to the 1st step production and the 2nd step production, the presentation service apparatus 17 The movable portion 17A moves from the initial position to the second operation position instead of the first operation position, and performs a light emission effect in a predetermined mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-4), the effect pattern temporarily stopped in FIG. 120 (b-2) is changed again, and a predetermined character can specify the number of times the step effect has been performed. An image producing a voice of "0", which is information, is displayed, and the third step effect of the countdown effect is executed. At this time, the BGM and the illumination mode are also the countdown BGM and the countdown illumination dedicated to the countdown effect. Specifically, in the illumination mode when the third step effect is executed, the effect illumination device 16 performs an illumination effect in which each lamp emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-5), when the first mode symbol "3" temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, the third step effect of the story effect ends and normal reach effect starts Be done. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 perform an action effect at the time of stop. In addition, story BGM and story lighting end.
In addition, after the third step effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 119 (a-10), the reach tilt effect may be performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-6), a transition effect (development effect) that indicates the development to a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are on the upper right side of the screen It moves to and is reduced and displayed and it changes to the second mode symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-7), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the transition effect is started, an effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed, and The 2SP reach effect is started, and then the second SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As described above, in the second countdown simulated fluctuation effect pattern (the second specific effect mode), the countdown effect ended by the normal reach effect is restored after the execution of the return effect. It is possible to give the player a surprise and to improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, in the countdown pseudo fluctuation effect pattern, when the rendering pattern is temporarily stopped a plurality of times in the pseudo run, the same pseudo run production pattern is displayed temporarily in each stop. By doing this, the countdown effect becomes an effect with a sense of unity, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the countdown pseudo fluctuation effect pattern, when the pseudo serial production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect image is displayed around the production patterns TZ1 to TZ3, and the production patterns TZ1 to TZ3 are normal stop action production and Performs a special action effect at the time of performing a different special action so that a special stop sound ("Pishen" in this embodiment) different from the normal effect pattern stop sound is output from the audio output device 15. It has become. By doing this, the countdown effect can be effectively enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the countdown pseudo fluctuation effect pattern, when the pseudo serial production effect pattern before the transition to the first step production and the second step production is temporarily stopped, the movable part 17A of the presentation service apparatus 17 is at the initial position The movement for moving from the first movement position to the first movement position is performed, and when the pseudo serial rendering effect pattern before shifting to the third step (final step) rendering is temporarily stopped, the rendering bonus device A moving operation of moving the 17 movable portions 17A from the initial position to the second operation position is performed. By doing this, it is notified that the third step (final step) effect has been transferred, and the player's expectation for the jackpot can be effectively enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

  In addition, in the countdown pseudo fluctuation effect pattern, the promotion operation image is displayed, and in response to the operation of the effect button 18A, the effect pattern is stopped at the pseudo run. By doing this, it is possible to cause the player to actively participate as if the player stopped the simulated sequence by operating the effect button 18A, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

  In the explanation of the countdown pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern mentioned above, reach production (reach production failure production, reach production success production) was not considered as transition production, but about reach production, it is to specific reach production (SP / SPSP reach production) Since this is a presentation performed in the process of development, it may be a transition presentation that suggests the development to a specific reach presentation (SP / SPSP reach presentation). In such a case, in addition to the period in which the normal reach effect and the transition effect are being performed, the period in which the reach turning effect is being performed is also a transition effect period.

  In the present embodiment, in the zone pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, the story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, and the countdown pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, transition to the next pseudo fluctuation is made by temporary stop of the pseudo run but the dedicated pseudo It may be made to shift to the next pseudo fluctuation by the temporary stop of the run symbol, or it may be made to shift to the next pseudo fluctuation by the temporary stop of the combination of the production symbols of the same color, or even It may be made to shift to the next simulated fluctuation by temporarily stopping the combination of the rendering symbols, or may be shifted to the next simulated fluctuation by temporarily stopping the combination of the odd rendering symbols.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern when the effect pattern of the false series is temporarily stopped in the story change effect pattern and the countdown change effect pattern. The EF may change the display color according to the jackpot winning expectation. Further, the display color may be changed according to the number of times (steps) in which the step effect is executed. For example, the effect image EF before the first step effect is executed is displayed in blue, and the effect image EF before the second step effect is executed is displayed in green, the third step effect In the case of the effect image EF before is executed, it may be displayed in red.
In this way, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot can be effectively enhanced by the progress (step-up) of the story presentation and the countdown presentation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo serial production pattern temporarily stops in the story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern and the countdown pseudo fluctuation production pattern, the display of the effect image EF around the production design, the production design TZ1 to TZ3 are special In the special action production at the time of a stop performing special action, the output of a special stop sound as the effect pattern stop sound, and the movement operation of the rendering character object device 17 are performed, it is not limited to these effects. it can. For example, each lamp may be made to emit light in a special light emission mode by the effect illumination device 16, or any one of these effects may be executed or may be combined. Further, the effect to be executed may be changed according to the number of steps of the step effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of temporary stop of all pseudo stations in the story pseudo change effect pattern and the countdown pseudo effect pattern, the pseudo run effect pattern is temporarily stopped in response to the operation of the effect button 18A. However, it may be done in part instead of all. For example, it may be performed only during normal reach production. Also, the effect may not be accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A.

In addition, in the step effect in the countdown effect of the present embodiment, information for specifying the number of times the step effect is performed is displayed, and in the step effect in the story effect, the number of times in which the step effect is performed is enabled. Although the information is not displayed, it may be displayed also as a step effect in the story effect. By doing this, the number of steps of the step effect being executed can be recognized, so that the effect can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, conversely, the step effect in the countdown effect may not be displayed, or the step effect in the countdown effect and the step effect in the story effect may not be displayed.

  In addition, in the countdown effect of the present embodiment, the countdown effect does not end in the first step effect, and is always performed until the second step effect (CD effect 2). On the other hand, in the story production, the story production may be ended even in the first step production, but in the story production, the story production may not be ended in the first step production. In the countdown effect, the countdown effect may be ended in the first step effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the introduction effect is performed in the story pseudo fluctuation effect pattern and the countdown pseudo fluctuation effect pattern, but a fluctuation effect pattern other than the story pseudo fluctuation effect pattern and the countdown pseudo fluctuation effect pattern, that is, the story You may make it perform also in the fluctuation production in which production and countdown production are not performed (what is called gusset production). By doing this, even if the introduction effect is executed, it is not possible to know whether the story effect or the countdown effect is executed after that, so the player can be excited and the interest of the game can be improved. Is possible.
In addition, the effect mode of the introduction effect is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a whiteout display may be performed, an effect accompanied by an operation of the effect button 18A, or an effect that indicates whether a predetermined character appears and a story effect or a countdown effect is performed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, SP reach (SPSP reach) is always executed in the story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern and the countdown pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, but SP reach (SPSP reach) is not executed. There may be. For example, when only the first step effect is performed, the normal reach may be performed or the reach may not be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern and the countdown pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, the light emission color of each lamp performed by the presentation illumination device 16 is blue, according to the number of steps (steps) of step presentation. Although it was made green and red, it is not restricted to these colors and can be set up suitably. In addition, when the jackpot is won, there may be iridescent light colors which can be selected without being related to the number of steps with a predetermined low probability. For example, as the number of steps is larger, the color may be iridescent. Also, depending on the number of steps (steps) of the step effect, it is not necessary to change the light emission color, and the light emission location may be changed, or the light emission order is lighted in a special order The number of lamps emitting light may be gradually increased.
In addition, the emission color may not change even if the number of steps is increased (increased).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a dedicated reach effect is performed according to the number of executions of the step effect of the story effect, but it may not be dedicated, and any reach may be executable. In this case, as the number of executions of the step effect is larger, the reach with a higher expectation of the jackpot may be made easier to be executed. For example, when the third step effect is performed, SPSP reach effect may be performed more easily than when only the first step effect is performed. The same is true for countdown effects.

Further, in the story effect and the countdown effect according to the present embodiment, the moving operation of the movable portion 17A of the effect product device 17 displays the image from the “initial position” (original position) above the image display device 14 The operation was to move to the “first operation position” which is a position above the center of the front surface of the device 14 or the “second operation position” which is the center position of the front surface of the image display device 14. It is not limited to. For example, from the “initial position” (original position) below the image display device 14, “first operation position”, which is a position below the center of the front surface of the image display device 14, or the front surface of the image display device 14 An operation of moving to the “second operation position” which is a central position of, or an operation of rotating the movable portion 17A of the character combination device 17 for presentation on the spot may be used.
In addition, the movement (operation) width may be increased as the step effect progresses.

  Further, in the story rendition and countdown rendition of the present embodiment, in the plurality of transition effect periods (including reach-roll effect) before the indication effect period is performed, the effect of operating the effect button 18A is performed. When it comes to a plurality of the transition effects period (including reach-roll effect) before the effect period comes, it may be performed every time, or a plurality of transition effect periods (including reach-roll effect) before it becomes the indication effect period Even if you do, you may or may not do it. In addition, it may be performed also in the transition production period (including reach-roll production and normal reach production) before shifting to the specific production (SP / SPSP reach, ST dedicated reach).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the transition presentation (development presentation) of the zone pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, the story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, and the countdown pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern are the same presentation mode, but in different presentation modes It is also good. Furthermore, although the changing icon or the hold icon is displayed during the transition effect (development effect) or during the specific reach effect, it may be temporarily erased until the transition effect or the specific reach effect ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the development effects in the first story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern and the second story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern are the same production mode, but the second story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern is the fifth zone pseudo The movable portion 17A of the effect service device 17 may be operated as in the variation effect pattern.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the fluctuation production pattern with a pseudo continuous production was mentioned as the 1st specified production mode, the 2nd specified production mode, and the 3rd specified production mode, specific reach production (SP As long as it develops into (SPSP reach effect), it may be a fluctuation effect pattern without a pseudo continuous effect, or may be both a fluctuation effect pattern with a pseudo continuous effect and a fluctuation effect pattern without a pseudo continuous effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading zone effect is started, the zone turning success effect is always executed before the start, but the zone turning success effect is not performed, and the variation display of the design pattern The preview zone effect may be performed immediately at the start of the re-variation display (including the re-variation display in the series effect) or halfway through.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine Y is configured to generate the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state after all the big hit games are over, but if the big hit game occurs due to the stop display of the specific big hit special symbol After the end while generating high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state until the next big hit game, when big hit gaming occurs due to the stop display of the normal jackpot special symbol low probability gaming state and time saving gaming state for a predetermined period (for example 100 times It is good also as game machine Y made to generate over a variation display of a special symbol.

  Also, when the game ball passes (winning) a specific area provided inside the large winning opening 8 in a specific round (for example, 8 rounds and 15 rounds) during the big hit game, the high probability gaming state and time saving game after the big hit game is over While the state is generated for a predetermined period (for example, the variable display of 120 special symbols), the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state are determined for a predetermined period (for example, It is good also as game machine Y made to generate over 100 times (variation display of a special symbol).

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2012-083892), when the game ball enters the starting opening when the variation display of the special symbol is performed, the determination information is Based on the held data stored as held data and before the special symbol judgment based on the held data is performed, the judgment result of the special symbol judgment carried out based on the held data is “execute special game If it is determined (predetermined) whether or not to "do", and the determination result of the prior determination is "to execute a special game", from the normal normal effect mode production mode, stop display of a specific special symbol There is a risk that the player may not notice that there is a possibility that the specific effect mode may be set although the specific effect mode is set such that the expectation of the event being performed is higher than the normal effect mode. There is a problem in that.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after a gaming medium (such as a gaming ball) passes through the starting area (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) , Based on the fact that the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) is satisfied, in the predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), the variable display of the symbol is performed, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified Is a gaming machine that executes a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous for the player when the stop display of the symbol is performed, and based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area, the determination information (special figure determination information ) And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) for the variable display of symbols in which the game medium has passed the start area but the start condition of the variable display of the symbol has not yet been established. To the limit, the said judgment information acquisition The special game based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means with the hold storage means for storing the judgment information acquired by the stage as the hold storage and the start condition of the variable display of the symbol being satisfied Determination means for determining whether or not to execute, presentation control means for performing notification effect (variation effect) for notifying the determination result when the determination by the determination means is performed, and the effect control means Effect mode setting means that can be set to a specific effect mode (pre-reading zone effect) having a higher expectation of executing the special game than the normal effect mode (for example, the effect mode A) as the effect mode of the notification effect; When the special effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means, before the special effect mode is set, a prophetic performance indicating the setting of the specific effect mode A prophecy effect execution means for executing (a zonal prognostic effect), and a prognostic effect execution notification (display of an icon according to a predictive zone effect suggestive mode) indicating that the prognostic effect is being performed when the prognostic effect is being performed And means for notifying the effect execution.

  By doing in this way, it can be suggested that the precursor effect is being performed, and it can be made easy to notice that there is a possibility of being set in the specific effect mode.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in JP 2012-083892A), when the game ball enters the starting opening while the variation display of the special symbol is being performed, the determination information is Based on the held data stored as held data and before the special symbol judgment based on the held data is performed, the judgment result of the special symbol judgment carried out based on the held data is “execute special game If it is determined (predetermined) whether or not to "do", and the determination result of the prior determination is "to execute a special game", from the normal normal effect mode production mode, stop display of a specific special symbol In the specific effect mode, the expectation for performing the game is set to be higher than the normal effect mode, but the player can not recognize the expectation for being set in the specific effect mode. There was.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after a gaming medium (such as a gaming ball) passes through the starting area (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) , Based on the fact that the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) is satisfied, in the predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), the variable display of the symbol is performed, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified Is a gaming machine that executes a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous for the player when the stop display of the symbol is performed, and based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area, the determination information (special figure determination information ) And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) for the variable display of symbols in which the game medium has passed the start area but the start condition of the variable display of the symbol has not yet been established. To the limit, the said judgment information acquisition The special game based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means with the hold storage means for storing the judgment information acquired by the stage as the hold storage and the start condition of the variable display of the symbol being satisfied Determination means for determining whether or not to execute, presentation control means for performing notification effect (variation effect) for notifying the determination result when the determination by the determination means is performed, and the effect control means Effect mode setting means that can be set to a specific effect mode (pre-reading zone effect) having a higher expectation of executing the special game than the normal effect mode (for example, the effect mode A) as the effect mode of the notification effect; When the special effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means, before the special effect mode is set, a prophetic performance indicating the setting of the specific effect mode A prophecy effect execution means for executing (a zonal prognostic effect), and a prognostic effect execution notification (display of an icon according to a predictive zone effect suggestive mode) indicating that the prognostic effect is being performed when the prognostic effect is being performed And the notification mode of the indication effect execution notification is of a plurality of types, and the notification mode of the indication effects execution notification of the plurality of types is the degree of expectation that the specific effect mode is set The first precursor effect execution notification mode (pre-reading zone indication effect mode 1) indicating that the first expectation degree, and the second expectation degree in which the expectation degree for which the specific effect mode is set is higher than the first expectation degree And a second precursor effect execution notification mode (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2) indicating that the

  By doing this, it is possible to make the player recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in JP 2012-083892A), when the game ball enters the starting opening while the variation display of the special symbol is being performed, the determination information is When stored as held data and the held data is stored, a held image corresponding to the held data is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device. Moreover, before the special symbol determination based on the said pending | holding data is performed based on the pending | holding data memorize | stored, the determination result of the special symbol determination performed based on the said pending | holding data is "A special game is performed". It is an expectation that the special game will be executed by making a judgment (prejudging) whether or not to change the display mode of the hold image to a special display mode different from the normal based on the judgment result of the prior judgment Although it was suggesting or informing the degree, the expectation for the special game to be executed is higher than that in the normal effect mode based on the judgment result of the prior judgment about the fluctuation effect performed corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol There is a possibility that high specific effect mode is set, but the expected degree to be set in the specific effect mode by the effect mode of the specific effect indicating the expected degree that the special game is executed such as the display of the hold image is Because 唆又 is not informed, the player has a problem that it is impossible to recognize the degree of expectation to be set to a specific effect mode by directing aspects of a particular effect.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after a gaming medium (such as a gaming ball) passes through the starting area (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) , Based on the fact that the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) is satisfied, in the predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), the variable display of the symbol is performed, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified Is a gaming machine that executes a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous for the player when the stop display of the symbol is performed, and based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area, the determination information (special figure determination information ) And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) for the variable display of symbols in which the game medium has passed the start area but the start condition of the variable display of the symbol has not yet been established. To the limit, the said judgment information acquisition The special game based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means with the hold storage means for storing the judgment information acquired by the stage as the hold storage and the start condition of the variable display of the symbol being satisfied Determination means for determining whether or not to execute, presentation control means for performing notification effect (variation effect) for notifying the determination result when the determination by the determination means is performed, and the effect control means An effect mode setting unit that can be set in a specific effect mode (prediction zone effect) having a high expectation of performing the special game than a normal effect mode (for example, effect mode A) as an effect mode of notification effect, and And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (display of an icon) indicating a set predetermined item, wherein the specific effect is an expectation of executing the special game. A first specific effect showing the said specific effect mode is adapted to a second specific effect indicating the expectation of being set.

  By doing this, it becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode by the effect mode of the specific effect.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-195682), the variation display of the special symbol is performed based on the determination result as to whether or not the special game advantageous to the player is executed. When the result of the variable display is a predetermined special result, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In such a gaming machine, the interest of the game is enhanced by performing variational rendering in which the rendering symbol is variably displayed by the image display means in accordance with any of a plurality of types of variation patterns so as to correspond to the variation display of the special symbol. There is something. However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent documents, there is a room for improvement in the fluctuation presentation, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is poor.

  As a first configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player, (Variant display means for carrying out fluctuation display of symbols (special)) for informing the judgment result of the judgment means, and for the player when the result of the fluctuation display becomes a predetermined special result (big hit special symbol) A gaming machine capable of executing an advantageous special game, including effect control means for performing a variable effect for producing the variable display, and specifying the expectation that the special effect is expected in the effect mode of the variable effect The indication including the non-specific effect mode in which the effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is not performed, and the specific effect mode in which the specific effect is performed, and the specific effect mode indicates that the special result is to be obtained. The first specification to execute the specific effect after the transition effect period (the transition effect or the normal reach execution period) to perform the transition effect to the specific effect from the indication effect period (prediction zone effect or story effect execution period) The effect mode (variation effect pattern A013, A038, A058, etc.) and the transition effect period from the indication effect period through the transition effect period is returned to the indication effect period, and then the specific effect is executed after the transition effect period There are two specific effect modes (variation effect patterns A014, A039, A059, etc.), and the effect control means executes the change effect according to any of the effect modes according to the determination result of the determination means. ing. Further, the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher in the case where the change effect is executed by the second specific effect mode than in the case where the change effect is executed by the first specific effect mode. I have to.

  As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, the fluctuation effect includes an indication effect period for performing an indication effect for predicting the special result Transition effect that suggests transition to a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect only reach effect) that expects to be the special result after execution of a story effect or countdown effect) A transition effect period to be performed (execution period of transition effect or normal reach), and then the transition effect period starts after the indication effect period comes, and then the transition effect period starts after the indication effect period comes, and then the transition effect period There is a specific effect mode (a change effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) for executing a specific effect, and the effect control means temporarily stops the plurality of effect symbols in a plurality of transition effect periods of the change effect of the specific effect mode. It is possible to display, and in the plurality of transition effect periods, the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same manner.

  As a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player, And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, the fluctuation effect includes an indication effect period for performing an indication effect that the special result is expected. Transition to perform transition effect (transition effect or normal reach execution period) that suggests transition to a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect only reach effect) that is expected to become the special result later The transition period comes after the indication period, and then the transition effect period, and after the transition period comes, the transition effect period, and then the specific effect aspect (variation effect) in which the specific effect is executed There is a pattern A0013, A014 etc., and the effect control means can temporarily display the plurality of effect symbols in a plurality of transition effect periods of the fluctuation effect of the specific effect aspect, and the plurality of effect symbols are displayed. In the transition effect period, while displaying the plurality of effect symbols temporarily in the same mode and displaying the effects using the effect symbols (effect display displayed around the effect symbols, special action effect at stop, etc.) ing.

  As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player, An effect control means for executing a fluctuation effect that causes a stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means after fluctuating display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the determination result of the determination means, and an operable movable member ( A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the change effect is a predetermined special result, comprising: a movable portion 17A) of the effect product device 17; Is a specific effect (SP / SPSP) which is expected to become the special result after the predictive effect period (the execution period of the story effect and the countdown effect) performing the predictive effect which causes the special result to be obtained. It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) to perform transition effect that suggests transition to ST effect only reach effect), and then it becomes the transition effect period after the indication effect period is reached, and thereafter After the indication effect period comes, the transition effect period starts, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) for executing the specific effect thereafter, and the effect control means performs the change effect of the specific effect aspect The plurality of effect symbols can be temporarily stopped and displayed in a plurality of transition effect periods of, and the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same mode in the plurality of transition effect periods, and the movable The members are operated.

  As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; Based on the determination result of the determination means, after displaying a plurality of effect symbols in a fluctuating manner, effect control means for executing a variation effect that causes the stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, provided with a sound output means (voice output device 15), wherein the result of the fluctuation effect is a predetermined special result. A specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST) which is expected to become the special result after an indication effect period (an execution period of a story effect or a countdown effect) for performing an indication effect that indicates that the special result will be obtained It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) that performs transition effect that suggests transition to out-of-the-box reach effect), and then it becomes the transition effect period after it becomes the indication effect period, and then the indication After the effect period comes, the transition effect period comes, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) to execute the specific effect after that, the effect control means is for the change effect of the specific effect aspect In a plurality of transition effect periods, it is possible to temporarily display the plurality of effect symbols, and in the plurality of transition effect periods, the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the same mode, and the sound output is made. A specific effect sound (a special stop sound different from the normal effect pattern stop sound ("Pishen" in this embodiment)) is output from the means. I have to so that.

  As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player, Based on the determination result of the determination means, after a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed, the effect control means for executing a variation effect that causes the stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, provided with an operation means (effect button device 18), when the result of the change effect becomes a predetermined special result. A specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST) that is expected to become the special result after an indication effect period (an execution period of a story effect or a countdown effect) that performs an indication effect that is an indication that a special result will be obtained It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) that performs transition effect that suggests transition to out-of-the-box reach effect), and then it becomes the transition effect period after it becomes the indication effect period, and then the indication After the effect period comes, the transition effect period comes, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) to execute the specific effect after that, the effect control means is for the change effect of the specific effect aspect In a plurality of transition effect periods, it is possible to make a temporary stop display of the plurality of effect symbols, and a temporary stop display of the plurality of effect symbols can be performed according to the operation of the operation means, In a plurality of transition effect periods, the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily displayed in the same manner.

  As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, the fluctuation effect includes an indication effect period for performing an indication effect for predicting the special result Transition effect that suggests transition to a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect only reach effect) that expects to be the special result after execution of a story effect or countdown effect) A transition effect period to be performed (execution period of transition effect or normal reach), and then the transition effect period starts after the indication effect period comes, and then the transition effect period starts after the indication effect period comes, and then the transition effect period There is a specific effect mode (a change effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) for executing a specific effect, and the effect control means temporarily stops the plurality of effect symbols in a plurality of transition effect periods of the change effect of the specific effect mode. It is possible to display, and in the plurality of transition effect periods, the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode different from the mode in which the previous temporary display was stopped.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player, And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, the fluctuation effect includes an indication effect period for performing an indication effect for predicting the special result Transition effect that suggests transition to a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect only reach effect) that expects to be the special result after execution of a story effect or countdown effect) A transition effect period to be performed (execution period of transition effect or normal reach), and then the transition effect period starts after the indication effect period comes, and then the transition effect period starts after the indication effect period comes, and then the transition effect period There is a specific effect mode (a change effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) for executing a specific effect, and the effect control means temporarily stops the plurality of effect symbols in a plurality of transition effect periods of the change effect of the specific effect mode. It is possible to display
During the plurality of transition effect periods, the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in a mode different from the mode in which the previous temporary stop was displayed, and effects using the effect symbols (effect display displayed around the effect symbols or Special action effects etc.) are performed at the time of stop.

  As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; An effect control means for executing a fluctuation effect that causes a stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means after fluctuating display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the determination result of the determination means, and an operable movable member ( A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the change effect is a predetermined special result, comprising: a movable portion 17A) of the effect product device 17; Is a specific effect (SP / SPSP) which is expected to become the special result after the predictive effect period (the execution period of the story effect and the countdown effect) performing the predictive effect which causes the special result to be obtained. It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) to perform transition effect that suggests transition to ST effect only reach effect), and then it becomes the transition effect period after the indication effect period is reached, and thereafter After the indication effect period comes, the transition effect period starts, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) for executing the specific effect thereafter, and the effect control means performs the change effect of the specific effect aspect It is possible to make a temporary stop display of the plurality of effect symbols in a plurality of transition effect periods of, and in a mode different from the mode in which the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stop displayed previously in the plurality of transition effect periods. The temporary stop display is performed, and the movable member is operated.

  As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player, Based on the determination result of the determination means, after displaying a plurality of effect symbols in a fluctuating manner, effect control means for executing a variation effect that causes the stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, provided with a sound output means (voice output device 15), wherein the result of the fluctuation effect is a predetermined special result. A specific effect (SP / SPSP / S) which is expected to become the special result after an indication effect period (an execution period of a story effect or a countdown effect) for performing an indication effect that indicates that the special result will be obtained It becomes a transition production period to perform transition presentation that suggests transition to a production-only reach presentation), and then it becomes the transition presentation period (transition presentation and execution period of normal reach) after reaching the indication production period, and thereafter the indication After the effect period comes, the transition effect period comes, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) to execute the specific effect after that, the effect control means is for the change effect of the specific effect aspect In a plurality of transition effect periods, it is possible to temporarily display the plurality of effect symbols, and in the plurality of transition effect periods, it is temporary in a mode different from the mode in which the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped last time In addition to the stop display, a specific effect sound from the sound output means (a special stop sound (different from the normal effect pattern stop sound (this embodiment) In and is adapted to output the "Pishin")).

  As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player, Based on the determination result of the determination means, after a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed, the effect control means for executing a variation effect that causes the stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, provided with an operation means (effect button device 18), when the result of the change effect becomes a predetermined special result. A specific effect (SP / SPSP / S) that is expected to become the special result after an indication effect period (an execution period of a story effect or a countdown effect) that performs an indication effect that is an indication that a special result will be obtained It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) that performs transition effect that suggests transition to effect-only reach effect), and then the transition effect period after the indication effect period is reached, and then the indication After the effect period comes, the transition effect period comes, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) to execute the specific effect after that, the effect control means is for the change effect of the specific effect aspect In a plurality of transition effect periods, it is possible to make a temporary stop display of the plurality of effect symbols, and a temporary stop display of the plurality of effect symbols can be performed according to the operation of the operation means, In a plurality of transition effect periods, the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode different from the mode in which the previous temporary stop display was performed. That.

  As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, the fluctuation effect includes an indication effect period for performing an indication effect for predicting the special result Transition performance that suggests transition to a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect dedicated reach effect) that expects to be the special result after execution of a story effect or countdown effect) The transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) is performed, and then the transition effect period is after the indication effect period, and then the transition effect period is after the indication effect period. There is a specific effect mode (a change effect pattern A0013, A014 etc.) for executing the specific effect, and the effect control means temporarily converts the plurality of effect symbols in a plurality of transition effect periods of the change effect of the specific effect mode. The stop display can be performed, and the temporary stop display is performed in a mode different from the mode of the plurality of effect symbols in which the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in the stop state during the plurality of transition effect periods.

  As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, the fluctuation effect includes an indication effect period for performing an indication effect for predicting the special result Transition performance that suggests transition to a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect dedicated reach effect) that expects to be the special result after execution of a story effect or countdown effect) The transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) is performed, and then the transition effect period is after the indication effect period, and then the transition effect period is after the indication effect period. There is a specific effect mode (a change effect pattern A0013, A014 etc.) for executing the specific effect, and the effect control means temporarily converts the plurality of effect symbols in a plurality of transition effect periods of the change effect of the specific effect mode. It is possible to stop display, and during the plurality of transition effect periods, temporary stop display is performed in a mode different from the modes of the plurality of effect symbols in which the plurality of effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbols are used for The effect (effect display displayed around the effect pattern, special action effect at stop, etc.) is performed.

  As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; An effect control means for executing a fluctuation effect that causes a stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means after fluctuating display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the determination result of the determination means, and an operable movable member ( A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the change effect is a predetermined special result, comprising: a movable portion 17A) of the effect product device 17; Is a specific effect (SP / SPS) that is expected to become the special result after the indication effect period (the execution period of the story effect and the countdown effect) performing the predictive effect that causes the special result to be obtained It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) to perform transition effect that suggests transition to / ST effect only reach effect (transition effect or normal reach execution period), and then it becomes the transition effect period after it becomes the indication effect period, and thereafter After the indication effect period comes, the transition effect period starts, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) for executing the specific effect after that, and the effect control means changes the variation of the specific effect aspect In a plurality of transition effect periods of the effect, it is possible to temporarily display the plurality of effect symbols, and in the plurality of transition effect periods, an aspect of the plurality of effect symbols in which the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in the stop state The temporary stop display is performed in a mode different from the above, and the movable member is operated.

  As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; Based on the determination result of the determination means, after displaying a plurality of effect symbols in a fluctuating manner, effect control means for executing a variation effect that causes the stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, provided with a sound output means (voice output device 15), wherein the result of the fluctuation effect is a predetermined special result. A specific effect (SP / SPSP / S) which is expected to become the special result after an indication effect period (an execution period of a story effect or a countdown effect) for performing an indication effect that indicates that the special result will be obtained It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) that performs transition effect that suggests transition to effect-only reach effect), and then the transition effect period after the indication effect period is reached, and then the indication After the effect period comes, the transition effect period comes, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) to execute the specific effect after that, the effect control means is for the change effect of the specific effect aspect In a plurality of transition effect periods, it is possible to temporarily display the plurality of effect symbols, and in a plurality of transition effect periods, an aspect of the plurality of effect symbols in which the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in the stop state While displaying a temporary stop in a different mode, a specific effect sound from the sound output means (a special effect different from a normal effect pattern stop sound Sound stop (in the present embodiment "Pishin") so that to output).

  As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; Based on the determination result of the determination means, after a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed, the effect control means for executing a variation effect that causes the stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, provided with an operation means (effect button device 18), when the result of the change effect becomes a predetermined special result. A specific effect (SP / SPSP / S) that is expected to become the special result after an indication effect period (an execution period of a story effect or a countdown effect) that performs an indication effect that is an indication that a special result will be obtained It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) that performs transition effect that suggests transition to effect-only reach effect), and then the transition effect period after the indication effect period is reached, and then the indication After the effect period comes, the transition effect period comes, and there is a specific effect aspect (fluctuating effect pattern A0013, A014, etc.) to execute the specific effect after that, the effect control means is for the change effect of the specific effect aspect In a plurality of transition effect periods, it is possible to make a temporary stop display of the plurality of effect symbols, and a temporary stop display of the plurality of effect symbols can be performed according to the operation of the operation means, Temporary stop display in a mode different from the modes of the plurality of effect symbols in which the plurality of effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a plurality of transition effect periods It is as to cause.

  As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; Based on the determination result of the determination means, after a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed, the effect control means for executing a variation effect that causes the stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means A game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, provided with an operation means (effect button device 18), when the result of the change effect becomes a predetermined special result. A specific effect (SP / SPSP / S) that is expected to become the special result after an indication effect period (an execution period of a story effect or a countdown effect) that performs an indication effect that is an indication that a special result will be obtained It becomes a transition effect period (execution period of transition effect or normal reach) that performs transition effect that suggests transition to effect-only reach effect), and then the transition effect period after the indication effect period is reached, and then the specific There is a specific effect mode (such as variation effect pattern A 008) for performing effects, and in the transition effect period before the indication effect period, the indication effect period is started in response to the operation of the operation means. It's supposed to be possible.

  As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, the fluctuation effect includes an indication effect period for performing an indication effect for predicting the special result Transition performance that suggests transition to a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect dedicated reach effect) that expects to be the special result after execution of a story effect or countdown effect) And a first specific effect mode (such as a fluctuation effect pattern A 008) that executes the specific effect without becoming the indication effect period (transition effect or execution period of normal reach), and the indication effect period After the transition effect period comes, and after the indication effect period comes, the transition effect period comes, and then there are second specific effect modes (such as variation effect patterns A0010, A011, etc.) that execute the specific effect. The specific effect has a plurality of types of specific effects different in the degree of expectation that the special game is executed, and the special game is executed in the second specific effect aspect than the first specific effect aspect It is easy to execute a specific effect with a high degree of expectation.

  As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST) which is expected to be the special result for the fluctuation effect. The specific effect aspect includes a specific effect aspect for performing a reach-only effect effect, and the specific effect aspect performs a predictive effect for predicting the special result once or a plurality of times before the specific effect is performed. The specific effect aspect includes a first specific effect aspect (countdown effect) and a second specific effect aspect (story effect) having different effect aspects from the first specific effect aspect, and In the variation effect of the first specific effect aspect, information for making it possible to specify the number of times the indication effect has been performed is reported, while in the variation effect of the second specific effect aspect, the indication effect is performed It is configured not to notify information that makes it possible to identify the number of times the information has been sent.

  As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; Based on the determination result of the determination means, after displaying a plurality of effect symbols in a fluctuating manner, effect control means for executing a variation effect that causes the stop indication to be displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the determination means In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variation effect is a predetermined special result, the variation effect includes the special effect illumination device 16). Including a specific effect mode for executing a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect dedicated reach effect) which is expected to be the specific effect mode, and the specific effect mode is the special result before the specific effect is executed. It is possible to perform one or a plurality of cycles to perform the transition effect that suggests transition to the specific effect after performing the indication effect that indicates the sign, and the number of times of execution of the indication effect in the indication effect Accordingly, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emission means in accordance with the above.

  According to a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination unit that determines whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, the fluctuation effect includes an indication effect period for performing an indication effect for predicting the special result Transition performance that suggests transition to a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST effect dedicated reach effect) that expects to be the special result after execution of a story effect or countdown effect) And a first specific effect mode (such as a fluctuation effect pattern A 008) that executes the specific effect without becoming the indication effect period (transition effect or execution period of normal reach), and the indication effect period After the transition effect period comes, and after the indication effect period comes, the transition effect period comes, and then there are second specific effect modes (such as variation effect patterns A0010, A011, etc.) that execute the specific effect. When performing the change effect of the first specific effect aspect and the second specific effect aspect, in the change effect, it is possible to perform an introduction effect that suggests performing the indication effect There is.

  As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player; And a production control means for performing a fluctuation production for stopping and displaying the plurality of production symbols in a mode indicating the judgment result of the judgment means after the fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols based on the judgment result of the judgment means; In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined result is a predetermined special result, a specific effect (SP / SPSP / ST) which is expected to be the special result for the fluctuation effect. The first specific effect mode and the second specified effect mode that can include a specific effect mode for performing a special effect reach effect), and the specific effect mode can perform an indication effect that indicates that the special result will be obtained In the first specific effect mode, the predictive effect that predicts the special result is performed once or a plurality of times, while the second specific effect mode is that the special result is the special result. It is designed to make the omens of the omens to be performed several times.

  As described above, with the first configuration to the twenty-second configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by the novel variation effect presentation mode which has not been provided conventionally, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-158590), the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result of the determination means It is generally provided with a variable display means for changing and displaying a symbol to be notified at any of a plurality of change times, and performing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special result. It is. In such a gaming machine, any of the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (short time gaming state, high probability gaming state, etc.) in which a short fluctuation time is easily selected as a fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display than the normal gaming state. In the variable display of symbols, there is one that performs variable play with the variable display of a predetermined effect design (decorative design) by the image display device during the variable display of the design. However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent documents, even if there is a change in the gaming state, there is no change in the effect pattern displayed on the image display device, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is poor.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determination means And (f) a variable display means for performing variable display of a symbol in any of a plurality of fluctuation times based on the determination result of the, and when the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special result (big hit special symbol), In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game, either in the normal gaming state or in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state, low probability time short gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state Game condition control means that can be controlled, and fluctuation effect execution means that can execute fluctuation effects accompanied by fluctuation display of a plurality of effect symbols by the display means (image display device 14) during the fluctuation display; Said fluctuation The outing includes a normal fluctuation production (a shortening fluctuation production, an ultra shortening fluctuation production, a normal fluctuation production, a long fluctuation production) in which the reach production is not executed, and a reach fluctuation production in which the reach production is executed. There is a first effect pattern (first mode symbol) and a second effect pattern (second mode symbol or third mode symbol) with lower decorativeness than the first effect pattern, and the variation effect execution means The first effect symbol is displayed in the normal variation effect in the normal gaming state, and the second effect symbol is displayed in the normal variation effect in the specific gaming state.

  By doing this, it is possible to change the effect pattern displayed on the image display device when there is a change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-061360), it is judged as a judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a judgment result of the judging means In accordance with the display effect executing means for performing display effect according to the image display device, it is possible to control either the first gaming state or the second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state Some are common. In such a gaming machine, detection means capable of detecting an input from a player is provided, and a prompting image for prompting an input is displayed on the image display device when the effective period occurs during execution of an effect, and the generation of the effective period occurs. When there is an input detected, there is one that executes an operation effect that suggests the determination result of the determination means. However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent documents, even if there is a change in the gaming state, there is no change in the promotion image displayed on the image display device, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is poor.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determination means In a gaming machine provided with a variable effect executing means for performing a variable effect according to the judgment result of the display means (image display device 14), the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and the first gaming state It is possible to detect an input from the player and game state control means which can be controlled to any of the second game state (high probability game state, low probability time short game state) which is advantageous to the player A promotion display for causing the display unit to display a promotion image for prompting an input to the detection unit based on the detection unit (production button device 18, infrared sensor, touch panel, etc.) and the occurrence of the effective period during the fluctuation production. Means and said effective An operation effect execution unit capable of executing an operation effect that suggests the determination result of the determination unit based on detection of an input by the detection unit during the interval; 1 promotion image (promotion image 1A, 1B) and a second promotion image (promotion image 2A, 2B, promotion image 3A, 3B) different from the first promotion image, and the promotion display means is the first game The first promotion image is displayed in the variation effect in the state, and the second promotion image is displayed in the variation effect in the second gaming state.

  By doing this, the promotion image displayed on the image display device can be changed when there is a change in the gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-073377), the judging means for judging whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player, and the judgment result of the judging means It is general to include a fluctuation effect executing means for performing the corresponding fluctuation effect on the image display device. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control to any one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the display device relates to the gaming information relating to the gaming. There is something to display. However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent documents, there is no change in the display mode of the game information displayed on the image display device even if there is a change in the gaming state, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is poor. there were.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determination means In the gaming machine provided with the variation production execution means for performing the variation production according to the judgment result of the display means (the image display device 14), a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state, Game state control means capable of controlling any of high probability gaming state, low probability short gaming state, jackpot gaming, and predetermined gaming information (number of consecutive pavers information, high probability remaining number information, time reduction related to gaming Game information display means capable of causing the display means to display remaining number information, firing operation information, etc., and the first game state (low probability time short game state etc.) in the plurality of types of game states And the first gaming state Also including the second gaming state (high probability gaming state and the like) which is advantageous to the player, the variation production execution means, during the first gaming state and during the second gaming state production mode of the variation effect (( The variation information pattern and the like are made different, and the game information display means makes the display mode of the predetermined game information different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  By doing this, it is possible to change the display mode of the predetermined game information displayed on the image display device when there is a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines such as gaming machines Y, and can also be used for a jingle ball gaming machine and an arrange ball gaming machine.

Y game machine 6 1st starting opening 6a 1st starting opening detection sensor 7 2nd starting opening 7a 2nd starting opening detection sensor 8 large winning opening 10 winning gate 14 image display device 15 sound output device 16 effect lighting device 70 second Start opening control device 80 large winning opening control device 101 main control board 101a main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 effect control board 102a sub CPU
102b sub ROM
102c Sub RAM
140 display unit 141 first pending icon display area 142 changing icon display area 143 second pending icon display area

Claims (1)

A mode indicating the determination result of the determination means after a plurality of effect symbols are variably displayed based on the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result of the determination means The effect control means for executing the change effect to be stopped and displayed, and the sound output means capable of outputting the effect sound,
In the gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the fluctuation presentation becomes a predetermined special result.
For the said fluctuation production,
After the indication effect period of performing an indication effect indicating that the special result is to be made, a transition effect period of performing transition effect to a specific effect that is expected to be the special result is obtained, and then return to the indication effect period The first specific effect mode for executing the specific effect without
The transition effect period is after the indication effect period, and then the transition effect period is after returning to the indication effect period, and thereafter the second effect effect is executed without returning to the indication effect period. There is, and,
The effect control means is
In the transition effect period before the indication effect period, the temporary effect display is performed in a mode different from the aspect of the plural effect symbols in which the plural effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and a specific effect from the sound output unit It is possible to output sound,
The degree of expectation that the change effect of the second specific effect aspect is the special result is higher than the change effect of the first specific effect aspect,
A game machine characterized by